814203-1.0-EnG - X5 X-Ray Inspection System User Guide

X5 X-ray Inspection System User Guide
Document Number: 814203-1.0-ENG ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS Copyright 2015 Loma Systems

Table of Contents
Introduction ..............................................................................................1
About this Guide .................................................................................................................................. 2
General ............................................................................................................................................ 2
Audience .......................................................................................................................................... 2
Purpose ............................................................................................................................................ 2
Organisation ........................................................................................................................................ 3
Document Change Control .................................................................................................................. 4
Document Key ..................................................................................................................................... 4
Notes and Warnings ........................................................................................................................ 4
Hyperlinks ........................................................................................................................................ 4
Copyright and Acknowledgements ...................................................................................................... 5
The Loma Group of Companies .......................................................................................................... 6
About X-Ray Inspection ...........................................................................7

Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 7
Use of X-rays in the Food Industry ...................................................................................................... 7
X-Ray Generation ................................................................................................................................ 8
Detection of X-rays .......................................................................................................................... 8
Imaging Software ............................................................................................................................. 9
Contaminant Detection .................................................................................................................... 9
Producing an Image ......................................................................................................................... 9
Detection of Contaminants ................................................................................................................ 10
General .......................................................................................................................................... 10
Source of Contaminants ................................................................................................................ 10
Detection Capabilities .................................................................................................................... 10
Product Absorption ........................................................................................................................ 11
Relative Specific Gravity Chart ...................................................................................................... 12
Safety First .............................................................................................13

Safety Awareness.............................................................................................................................. 14
EC Declaration of Conformity ............................................................................................................ 14
Safety Warnings ................................................................................................................................ 15
Safety Labels ..................................................................................................................................... 16
Safety Guards .................................................................................................................................... 17
Guarding ........................................................................................................................................ 17
Interlock switches........................................................................................................................... 17
Safety Relay and Circuits............................................................................................................... 17
Responsibilities and Disclaimer ......................................................................................................... 18
Safety Measures................................................................................................................................ 18
i
Table of Contents
Intended Use of the Machine ............................................................................................................ 19

Permitted Use ................................................................................................................................ 19
Improper Use ................................................................................................................................. 19
Noise Levels ...................................................................................................................................... 19
End of Life Treatment ........................................................................................................................ 19
Emergency Procedures ..................................................................................................................... 20
Quality Assurance ............................................................................................................................. 20
ISO9000 ............................................................................................................................................ 21
Work Instructions, Training and Record Keeping .......................................................................... 21
End User Licence Agreement ........................................................................................................... 21
Technical Specifications.........................................................................23
X5 Standard X-ray Inspection System ............................................................................................... 23
X5 SpaceSaver X-ray Inspection System .......................................................................................... 24
X5c X-ray Inspection System.............................................................................................................. 25
Installation ..............................................................................................27
Warnings ........................................................................................................................................... 28
Receiving and Unpacking .................................................................................................................. 28
Receiving the machine................................................................................................................... 28
Unpacking the machine ................................................................................................................. 28
Removing Bolts and Fitting Wheels ............................................................................................... 28
Moving the Machine .......................................................................................................................... 29
Using a Crane ................................................................................................................................ 29
Using a Fork Lift Truck ................................................................................................................... 29
Adjusting / Levelling the Machine ...................................................................................................... 29
Clearance Requirements ................................................................................................................... 29
Unlocking the X-ray Tank Breather ................................................................................................... 30
Connecting the Air Supply ................................................................................................................. 30
Connecting the Electrical Supplies .................................................................................................... 32
Cable Connections......................................................................................................................... 33
Checking Belt Tracking...................................................................................................................... 34
Radiation Surveys ............................................................................................................................. 34
Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 34
Radiation Dose Rates .................................................................................................................... 34
Routine Operational Testing .......................................................................................................... 34
External Radiation.......................................................................................................................... 35
Frequency of Monitoring ................................................................................................................ 35
Summary of Test Procedures for Radiation Leakage.................................................................... 35
ii
Table of Contents
About the X-Ray Inspection System Range ...........................................37

Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 37
Reject Devices ................................................................................................................................... 40
Conveyor Belts .................................................................................................................................. 41
Flat Belts ........................................................................................................................................ 41
Plastic Modular Belts ..................................................................................................................... 42
Guards ............................................................................................................................................... 43
Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................................... 43
Getting Started .......................................................................................45

User Interface .................................................................................................................................... 45
X5 and X5 SpaceSaver Models ..................................................................................................... 45
Control Panel ................................................................................................................................. 46
X5c Model ...................................................................................................................................... 47
Control Panel ................................................................................................................................. 47
Isolator Switch (All Models) ........................................................................................................... 48
User Access ...................................................................................................................................... 48
Logging In and Out ............................................................................................................................ 49
Logging In ...................................................................................................................................... 49
Logging Out ................................................................................................................................... 51
Starting and Stopping ........................................................................................................................ 52
Starting the Machine ...................................................................................................................... 52
Stopping the Machine .................................................................................................................... 54
Emergency Stop ............................................................................................................................ 55
Starting the Machine after an Emergency Stop ............................................................................. 55
The User Interface .................................................................................57

General Navigation ............................................................................................................................ 57
Screen Access ............................................................................................................................... 57
Title Bar .......................................................................................................................................... 57
Selection Options ........................................................................................................................... 58
Entering Data ................................................................................................................................. 58
Saving Changes............................................................................................................................. 59
Screens.............................................................................................................................................. 59
Main Run Screen ........................................................................................................................... 60
Mimic Screen ................................................................................................................................. 60
Main Run ........................................................................................................................................... 60
GoTo .................................................................................................................................................. 63
Access Level ..................................................................................................................................... 64
Product Settings ................................................................................................................................ 65
General .......................................................................................................................................... 66
iii
Table of Contents
Scan Settings ................................................................................................................................. 73

Inspection ....................................................................................................................................... 78
System Settings ........................................................................................................................... 181
Statistics ....................................................................................................................................... 204
Diagnostics .................................................................................................................................. 215
Service Machine .......................................................................................................................... 243
Image Style ...................................................................................................................................... 266
Product Menus ................................................................................................................................ 267
Mimic ............................................................................................................................................... 268
Contaminant Detection Test ............................................................................................................ 270
Using the X-ray Inspection System ......................................................273

Establishing a Good Product Learn................................................................................................. 273
Selecting the Inspection Tools ........................................................................................................ 273
Image Processing ........................................................................................................................ 273
Contaminants ............................................................................................................................... 274
Product Integrity ........................................................................................................................... 274
Fill Level ....................................................................................................................................... 275
Checkweigh ................................................................................................................................. 275
Regular Inspection Performance Testing ........................................................................................ 275
Handling Rejected Products ............................................................................................................ 275
Operating Instructions ..........................................................................277

Setting Up the System ..................................................................................................................... 277
Setting the Time and Date ........................................................................................................... 278
Setting the Language ................................................................................................................... 280
Setting the Machine ID................................................................................................................. 282
Adding a New User ...................................................................................................................... 283
Configuring the System ................................................................................................................... 285
Setting the Units........................................................................................................................... 286
Setting Access Levels .................................................................................................................. 287
Managing Images ........................................................................................................................ 292
Setting PVS Testing ..................................................................................................................... 292
Managing Products.......................................................................................................................... 292
Changing the Product .................................................................................................................. 293
Adding a New Product ................................................................................................................. 293
Deleting a Product ....................................................................................................................... 294
Exporting a Product ..................................................................................................................... 294
Importing a Product...................................................................................................................... 295
Carrying Out a PVS Test ................................................................................................................. 295
iv
Table of Contents
Reports ................................................................................................297
Batch Reports .................................................................................................................................. 297
Shift Reports .................................................................................................................................... 297
PVS Reports .................................................................................................................................... 298
Configuration Reports...................................................................................................................... 298
Displaying and Saving Reports ....................................................................................................... 299
Maximum Reports ........................................................................................................................... 299
System Statistics ............................................................................................................................. 300
System Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 300
Diagnostic Functions ............................................................................301

Maintenance ........................................................................................303
Maintenance Warnings .................................................................................................................... 303
Inspection and Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 304
Cleaning Materials Required ....................................................................................................... 304
Daily ............................................................................................................................................. 304
Weekly ......................................................................................................................................... 305
Monthly ........................................................................................................................................ 305
Yearly ........................................................................................................................................... 306
PEC Maintenance............................................................................................................................ 306
Omron .......................................................................................................................................... 306
Sensopart ..................................................................................................................................... 307
SICK ............................................................................................................................................. 307
Air Regulator Unit Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 307
Setting Up the Air Supply ............................................................................................................. 308
Conveyor Belt Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 309
Adjusting the Belt Tension ........................................................................................................... 309
Adjusting the Belt Tracking .......................................................................................................... 310
Adjusting the Reject Devices ........................................................................................................... 311
Pusher and Plough Rejects ......................................................................................................... 311
Air Blast Reject ............................................................................................................................ 311
Signal Only ................................................................................................................................... 311
Multi-Flap Rejects ........................................................................................................................ 311
Software Upgrades .......................................................................................................................... 311
v
Table of Contents
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
vi
Introduction
X-ray inspection systems are fast becoming a common fixture in food processing and packaging
plants throughout the world. The advantages that x-ray inspection has over traditional metal detection
and checkweighing systems make them essential pieces of inspection equipment for many
companies.
Loma Systems has been designing and manufacturing inspection equipment for over 45 years and
has earned a reputation for consistent quality and advanced technology.
The following sections provide more information:
About this Guide

This section provides you with a general introduction to the guide, its purpose and the intended
audience.
Organisation
The guide is organised into a number of chapters providing information in a logical sequence.
This section lists and briefly describes the contents of each chapter.
Document Change Control

This guide is a controlled document which is subject to change in line with changes to our
products. As the principle aim of the guide is to provide you with the information that you need,
we would welcome any comments or feedback that will enable us to make improvements to the
guide.
Document Key
Special text is used throughout the document, highlighted through the use of icons, to add
notes and warnings where appropriate.
Copyright and Acknowledgements

This guide is copyright to Loma Systems. No part of this document may be reproduced,
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language, or
computer language in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Loma
Systems.
The Loma Group of Companies

Loma has offices around the world that can provide you with sales and support services. This
section includes address and contact details for the main offices but details for all offices are
available via the website at www.loma.com.
1
Introduction
About this Guide
General
This guide explains in plain language and by example how to use the X5 X-Ray Inspection System. It
begins with a conceptual overview of X-ray inspection and then walks through the processes required
to install, operate and maintain the machine. Each process is cross referenced to detailed information
covering the concepts, controls, parts, assemblies, software and items associated with the process.
Audience
This guide is designed for anyone using the X5 X-Ray Inspection System. There are four levels of
user access to the available features and functionality, each of which provides specific benefits to that
user.
Operators
The guide benefits operators who need to use the machine functionality and features to carry
out routine product inspections and remove non-conforming products from the production line.
Supervisor
The guide benefits supervisors who need to use the machine functionality and features to
manage the selection and inspection of a range of products.
Quality
This guide benefits quality staff who monitor and analyse inspection data to ensure that
acceptable quality standards are achieved and maintained for all products inspected to meet
customer and legislative requirements.
Engineer
This guide benefits engineers and technicians who need to initially install, commission and
integrate the machine into the production line and then carry out routine servicing and
maintenance tasks to assure the high availability and performance of the machine.
Even if you are not involved directly in using the X5 X-Ray Inspection System, this guide provides you
with general information for using X-ray inspection to prevent non-conforming products from being
shipped to customers.
Purpose
This guide has two integrated goals:
Immediate Success
The primary goal is to show users at all levels how to carry out operations and tasks that will
ensure the effective, safe and continued operation of the machine to detect non-conforming
products and remove them from the production line.
Continuing Success
The secondary goal is to provide guidelines that can be used when setting up the machine to
reliably carry out inspection of specific products.
This guide provides technical and operational information that you can integrate into your in-house
documentation, particularly to meet the requirements of legislation and other standards.
2
Introduction
Organisation
This guide is organised into the following chapters:
Introduction
Guidelines provide an introduction to this guide and some general information, including global
contact details for Loma Systems.
About X-ray Inspection

Guidelines provide an introduction to X-ray inspection, including an explanation of the basic
principles and good practice guidelines.
Safety First
Guidelines identify and explain the safety features built into the machine, potential hazards,
warnings labelling and other general and legislative information related to the safe use of the
machine
Technical Specification
Guidelines provide technical information for the machine to generally assist in the site selection
and safe installation processes
Installation
Guidelines explain how to safely install the machine, including the connection of electrical and
pneumatic supplies
About the X-ray Inspection Range

Guidelines provide a summary of the available features and functions of the machine and
descriptions of its component parts.
Getting Started
Guidelines describe the basic controls and how to switch on, log in and prepare the machine for
use.
The User Interface

Guidelines describe how to navigate around the user interface and also provides description of
the screens through which you can setup and manage all parameters required for inspecting
products and for the general operation of the machine.
Using the X-ray Inspection System

Guidelines provide information covering good practice, establishing system performance and
how to get the best results from your machine.
Operating Instructions
Instructions are provided describing how to set up and configure the machine, including adding
new products for inspection.
Reports
Guidelines identify the types of reports that are available and describe how to output them for
analysis.
Diagnostic Functions
Guidelines provide information covering the diagnostic functions available.
3
Introduction
Maintenance
Guidelines provide information covering maintenance of the machine to ensure it continues to
operate efficiently and safely.
Each chapter is organised in a logical operational sequence and includes cross-references where
applicable to related guidelines.
Document Change Control

The information contained in this guide is believed to be accurate at the time of writing but may of
course be subject to changes and additions over time to improve on the information provided and in
line with any changes made to the system and its software.
Users are actively encouraged to suggest changes or additions to the contents of this guide directly to
Loma Systems by sending an email to manuals@loma.com.
All document changes are processed in accordance with the standard Loma Systems document
management system change process.
Document Key
The following special text may be used throughout the document. The icons and colour coding have
the following meanings:
Notes and Warnings

NOTE - Notes as used to provide supplementary information.
WARNING - Warnings are used to identify possible hazards which may cause damage to, or
malfunction of the equipment, loss of life, bodily damage or ill health in any form, either
immediate or latent. Loma Systems cannot be held responsible for injury to anyone,
however caused, where Warnings have been ignored or taken lightly.
Hyperlinks
Safety First Indicates a hyperlink, so tapping on the text will display another page.
manuals@loma.com Indicates an email hyperlink, so tapping on the text will open a new massage
window in your email system.
http://www.loma.com Indicates a web hyperlink, so tapping on the text will open the page in your
default web browser.
4
Introduction
Copyright and Acknowledgements

Copyright 2015 Loma Systems, a division of ITW Ltd. All rights reserved.
Loma Systems
Summit Avenue
Southwood
Farnborough
Hampshire
GU14 0NY
England
Email: sales@loma.co.uk
Web: http://www.loma.com
This document is copyright material. No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language, or computer language in any
form or by any means without the prior written permission of Loma Systems.
X5 X-ray Inspection System is a trademark of Loma Systems. All other product names are trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective owners systems.
The information in this guide is believed to be correct at the date of publication. However, our policy is
one of continuous improvement and so the information in this guide is subject to change without
notice, and does not represent a commitment on the part of Loma Systems.
No liability is accepted for errors and omissions in this document. If users are uncertain about
any aspect of the installation of the equipment they should contact an authorised service
centre. Details of these are provided in the Loma Group of Companies section or can be
obtained from www.loma.com.
5
Introduction
The Loma Group of Companies

UK Canada
Sales Customer and Service Support Sales and Customer Service
Loma Systems Loma Systems
Southwood Unit 11, 333 Wyecroft Road
Farnborough Ontario
Hampshire L6K 2H2
GU14 0NY Canada
United Kingdom
Tel: 01252 893300 Tel: 1-800-387-7987 / 905-842-4581
Fax: 01252 513322 Fax: 905-842-3460
E-mail: sales@loma.co.uk E-mail: sales@loma.com
Web: http://www.loma.com Web: http://www.loma.com
USA and South America Czech Republic
Sales and Customer Service Sales and Customer Service
Loma Systems Loma Systems
550 Kehoe Boulevard U Lomy 1069
Carol Stream 334 41
Illinois 60188 Dobrany
USA Czech Republic
Tel: 1-630-588-0900 / 1-800-USA-Loma Tel: +42 (0) 377 183810
Fax: 1-630-588-1395 Fax: +42 (0) 377 183820
E-mail: sales@loma.com E-mail: cz.sales@loma.com / cz.service@loma.com
Web: http://www.loma.com Web: http://www.loma.com
China Benelux
Loma Systems Shanghai (Asia HQ) Loma Systems / Lock Inspection
Shanghai Daalderweg 17
Loma Systems 4879 AX Etten-Leur
Door 3, No. 15, Lane 1985 Netherlands
Chunsen Road, Shanghai, 200237 PRC
Tel: +86 (0) 21 64102396
Tel: +31 (0) 765 030212
Fax: +86 (0) 21 64102395
Fax: +31 (0) 765 089800
E-mail: cn.sales@loma.com /
E-mail: bnl.sales@loma.com / bnl.service@loma.com
cn.service@loma.com
France Germany
Loma Systems et Lock Inspection
Loma Systems
sont des divisions de ITW Ltd
A division of ITW Test & Measurement GmbH
12, Avenue du Quebec
Magnusstr. 18
Silic 620, Villebon
D-46535 Dinslaken
91945 Courtaboeuf Cx
Deutschland
France
Tel: +33 (0) 155 695778
Tel: +49 (0) 2064 43724-0
Fax: +33 (0) 169 591621
Fax: +49 (0) 2064 43724-49
E-mail: fr.sales@loma.com /
E-mail: de.sales@loma.com / de.service@loma.com
fr.service@loma.com
Poland Brazil
Loma Systems Loma Systems / Brapenta Electronica
Winiowy Business Park Baro do Rio Branco
ul. Iecka 26, Budynek E 753 Santo Amaro
02-135 Warszawa So Paulo, SP Brasil
Poland CEP 04753-001
Tel: +48 22 575 70 25 Tel: +55 (0) 11 3123 2853
Fax: +48 22 575 70 01 Fax: +55 (0) 11 98455 1356
E-mail: pl.sales@loma.com E-mail: comercial@brapenta.com.br
Web: http://www.loma.com Web: http://www.loma.com / www.brapenta.com
For details of other Loma offices and the worldwide distributor , please visit www.loma.com.
6
About X-Ray Inspection
Introduction
X-rays are one of many types of electromagnetic radiation that are produced for a particular use. At
some point most people will have received medical treatment or diagnosis which would have involved
the use of x-rays. Used in the correct manner x-rays can be safely produced and have a number of
uses, one of which is for the inspection of food products.
X-rays are similar to visible light rays but of a much higher energy as shown in the figure above.
Use of X-rays in the Food Industry

X-Ray Inspection Systems for use in the food industry have been evolving for over 20 years. They
originally started as offline, manual inspection systems used for rework situations where a
contaminant may be inside a food product.
X-rays cannot make food products radioactive and as soon as the power source is
disconnected then x-ray generation stops and no residual radiation is present.
Today, systems are used for automatic contaminant detection in various applications, from processing
of bulk and unpacked materials to finished package inspection in various types of metallic packaging
and configurations.
The benefits of using X-rays over other technologies are many. X-ray systems detect numerous
dense and dangerous contaminants within products that are not detectable using other technologies.
Also, X-rays inspect through most metallic packaging materials, including cans and aluminium trays.
As well as contaminant detection, the X-ray image of each pack captured by the system provides data
for the analysis of missing items, defective items, low fill scenarios, low mass products, excess
products, multi-zone mass measurement based on density and area criteria, total area inspection,
zonal area inspection, missing count and even the size and quantity of holes within maturing Swiss
cheese products for quality analysis.
The installation of an X-ray system will also eliminate numerous issues normally associated with metal
detection technology such as electro-magnetis interference, product effect, loop effect, wire effect and
the requirement for a metal free zone.
Simultaneously, the technology can improve upon checkweighing performance in specific applications
by weighing defined zones within the package itself rather than weighing the entire package. All of
this analysis can be accomplished at line speeds in excess of 250/minute.
7
X-Ray Generation
The principle of x-ray generation is shown in the diagram below. An evacuated glass tube is used to
house a cathode (-ve terminal) and an anode (+ve terminal) which is itself then housed inside an oil
filled tank that electrically insulates the tube from the case. In addition, the oil is circulated and cooled
to dissipate the unwanted heat that is generated when x-rays are produced.
A current is passed through the filament inside the tube. When a high voltage is then applied to the
tube, electrons are attracted out of the filament and accelerate towards the target on the anode. In
effect the voltage controls the brightness and the current the contrast of the image produced.
When the electrons hit the target, x-rays are given off and these are guided through a collimator down
onto the product. The collimator only allows the small centre section of the x-ray beam to be emitted
of approximately 1 mm in thickness and in a fan shape positioned at 90 degrees to the product flow.
Detection of X-rays
Once X-ray generation has taken place and we have a collimated 'fan shaped' X-ray beam being
transmitted onto the product, the next step is to collect and process the X-ray energy values that have
passed through the product.
After passing through the product, the X-ray beam is received by a strip of X-ray sensitive material
which glows, based on the amount of X-ray energy present.
The light produced by the X-ray sensitive material then falls onto a detector array, consisting of a row
of photosensitive diodes positioned directly in line with the x-ray beam. Each diode then generates a
signal depending on the amount of light received on a grey scale level from 0 (black) to 255 (white).
Signal values are taken hundreds of times per second so that as the product moves through the X-ray
beam, multiple values from each diode are stored by the system to produce an image of the product.
8
The X-ray energy must be high enough to

penetrate the product.
Thin products are more easily penetrated.
Low density products are more easily penetrated.
When product is not being passed through the x-ray beam
the detector array receives 100% of the x-ray energy over
the entire length of the array.
When product is introduced through the beam it causes less
than 100% of x-ray energy to be received by the detector.
These signal values are processed and shown as a
greyscale image.
Imaging Software
The x-ray system incorporates an Image Capture and Processing Unit (ICPU) unit containing software
that enables the capture, analysis and display of images that directly relate to the x-ray energy that
has passed through the product.
The parameter values used by the software can be set up through the user interface to optimise
system performance for a wide range of products and applications.
Contaminant Detection
A typical analysis is carried out by comparing each image pixel to a threshold value and rejecting
anything below this value, i.e. it is denser and hence darker than the product itself.
This relationship to density means that if the specific gravity (SG) of a contaminant is close to that of
water, meaning that it floats, then it cannot be detected. Examples are insects, wood, hair and paper.
Most food products are water based.
Producing an Image
As they pass through the X-ray beam, products are scanned at a rate of up to 800 scans per second.
The signal data from each individual diode for every scan is then processed by the ICPU to develop a
greyscale image of the product.
The greyscale image produced is a

representation of the different density
levels within the product.
There are 255 levels of grey with darker
greys indicating a more dense area.
A homogenous product will nearly
always be easier to detect contaminants
in than a granular or highly textured
product.
9
Detection of Contaminants
General
A typical product analysis is carried out by comparing each image pixel to a threshold value and
rejecting anything below this value, i.e. it is denser and hence darker than the product itself.
This relationship to density means that if the specific gravity (SG) of a contaminant is close to that of
water, meaning that it floats, then it cannot be detected. Examples are insects, wood, hair and paper.
Most food products are water based.
Source of Contaminants
Contaminants can enter the food production process in hundreds of ways but a few of the more
common ways are listed below.
Glass from beer bottles thrown into a field.
Mud clumps from the harvesting process.
Stones from the harvesting process.
Metal and other contaminants from transportation.
Metal from damaged processing equipment.
Metal, plastic and other manufacturing equipment materials.
Inherent product issues such as bones or flavour clumping.
Detection Capabilities
Detectable Dangerous Contaminants
The following dangerous contaminants are detectable using an X-ray Inspection System:
o Ferrous, non-ferrous and stainless steel metals - Nominally all equal in sensitivity as
their density is very similar.
o Glass - Soda lime is a typical type of glass.
o Stones, ceramic and cement - Vary in density with sandstone and quartz being the
lowest.
o Calcified bones - Poultry requires special precautions as young birds may not have
developed much calcium in their bones making them harder to detect.
o PVC and TFE - Packaging or belting materials are not detectable.
o Salt or sugar clumps
Product Integrity Analysis

The following analysis methods are provided:
o Missing product by count
o Weight measurement by zone
o Broken product
10
Product Absorption
When we refer to the product absorption level we men the amount of x-ray energy that the product will
consume (absorb) when x-rays are passed through it. The higher the density of the product passing
through the beam, the greater the product absorption factor.
A good example of this is to compare the same quantity of water and ice-cream.
From the diagram above, the denser water will absorb more x-ray energy and therefore the greyscale
image displayed by the detector will be lighter than that displayed for the ice-cream. But it is important
to remember that not all products will have an even density / absorption level across its entire volume
and will therefore display varying greyscale levels.
When we talk about the absorption level it is useful to know that the density value is dependant on the
specific gravity of the product and that by multiplying the specific gravity value of the product by the
height, we can calculate the approximate absorption level.
Water has an SG (specific gravity) of 1. So from the example shown above the absorption factor is 75
x 1 = 75.
By introducing a 1mm steel contaminant with an SG of 8, the absorption of the water has been
reduced to 74 x 1 (1mm displacement) but the overall absorption level has increased. (74 x 1) + (1 x
8) = 82, a 9% increase.
11
The system detects the density change. If the above example is changed to 4mm height of water with
a 1mm contaminant then an even larger increase is observed. (4 x 1) + (1 x 8) = 12, a 140% increase.
The position of a contaminant within a product will also have an impact on how easily it is detected. In
the diagram below, contaminant A will be easier to detect than contaminant B as the X-ray beam has
to pass through more of the product and therefore has a higher absorbency level.
Relative Specific Gravity Chart

The chart below provides the SG values for a range of common items and shows that contaminants
with densities greater than 1.5 start to become detectable. The more dense the product the more
difficult it is to detect contaminants.
For example, if a piece of nylon with an SG of 1.15 is embedded within a piece of meat with an SG of
1.2 then the nylon will be invisible. But if the nylon was embedded with a bread product with an SG of
0.5 then it would be visually seen in the image and be possibly detectable.
Food Metals Non Metals
Bread 0.5 Aluminium 2.7 Cork 0.24
Crisps 0.6 Iron 7.1 Wood 0.65
Cereal 0.65 Tin 7.3 Epoxy 1.12
Peanuts 0.65 St/St 7.9 Nylon 1.15
Water 1.0 Brass 8.5 Bone 1.8
Potato 1.05 Bronze 8.8 Brick 2.3
Meat 1.2 Copper 8.9 Concrete 2.4
Lead 11.3 Glass 2.6
Graphite 2.6
PVC 2.6
12
Safety First
The safety of people carrying out any activities associated with the installation and use of the X5 X-ray
Inspection System is of primary importance. This chapter is therefore included to provide you with
general safety guidance.
Safety Awareness
All personnel engaged in activities associated with the installation of the system should read
and comply with the instructions and information contained herein, the statutory requirements
and regulations, including the provisions of the Health and Safety at Work Act (UK), and in line
with other international standards.
EC Declaration of Conformity
Provided it is installed, operated, serviced and maintained in accordance with the guidelines
contained in this User Guide, the X5 X-ray Inspection System complies with the appropriate EU
Directives which are listed in this section. A signed EC Declaration of Conformity is supplied
with each system.
Safety Warnings
A number of general safety warnings appropriate for the use of Loma X-ray Inspection Systems
is provided in this section. It is strongly recommended that personnel who are, or will be,
responsible for installing, maintaining or operating the system described in this guide should
read and understand these warnings.
Safety Labels
Safety labels are attached or etched in appropriate places to highlight areas of the system
where caution should be taken to avoid potential hazards. The labels used are listed and
described in this section.
Safety Guards
For Loma X-ray Inspection Systems the use of guarding, including covers, panels, curtains and
other methods is extremely important in order to restrict operators from accessing areas of the
system that are potentially hazardous when the machine is operating. This section provides
some guidance.
Responsibilities and Disclaimer

The X5 X-ray Inspection System warranty provided by Loma Systems is subject to it being used
and maintained in accordance with a set of guidelines which are included in this section.
Safety Measures
Before attempting to use the system a number of basic checks should be carried out to ensure
that it is in a safe condition and ready to be used. A list of recommended checks is included in
this section.
Intended Use of the Machine

Loma X-ray Inspection Systems are designed to be used in an industrial environment for
detecting contaminants and over and underweight products presented in packaging. Any
improper use could invalidate the EC Declaration of Conformity issued with the system and
also the system warranty. This section provides further details.
Noise Levels
Generally in an industrial environment some background noise is present due to the operation
of electrical equipment and mechanical movements of machinery such as conveyors and
13
Safety First
electrical noise. In general operation, Loma X-ray Inspection Systems do not emit a level of
noise that is hazardous.
End of Life Treatment

The Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment recycling (WEEE) Regulations 2006 and the
CE Directive 2002/96/EC require that electrical and electronic equipment must be recycled at
the end of its useful life. This section provides some guidelines.
Emergency Procedures
This section lists the potential emergencies that may be encountered and the associated
procedures.
Quality Assurance
If your business is operating under an approved Quality Management System, all activities
covering the safe operation and maintenance of the X-ray Inspection System will need to be
incorporated into the system to ensure continued compliance. This section provides some
guidelines on what needs to be considered.
End User Licence Agreement

This section contains details of the End User Licence Agreement for the system software.
Safety Awareness
It is strongly advised that all installation, operation and maintenance personnel read this guide before
working on the X5 X-ray Inspection System and comply with the instructions and information
contained herein.
It is essential that all personnel engaged in activities associated with the installation, operation,
servicing and maintenance of the X5 X-ray Inspection System have been adequately trained and are
appropriately qualified and experienced to do so.
All personnel should comply with the statutory requirements and regulations, including the provisions
of the Health and Safety at Work Act (UK), other EU relevant legislation, relevant OSHA regulations,
and any amendments that may become legal requirements.
EC Declaration of Conformity
Provided it is installed, operated, serviced and maintained in accordance with the guidelines
contained in this document, the X5 X-ray Inspection System addresses the fundamental safety and
health requirements of the following directives:
EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
EC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/108/EC
EU-Directive 1935/2004/EC (Materials for Food Contact)
EU-Directive 2023/2006/EC (Good manufacturing practice for materials and articles intended
to come into contact with food)
EU-Directive 2011/10/EC plus amendments 1282/2011/EC and 1183/2012/EC (Plastic
Materials and Articles intended to come into contact with food).
A signed and dated EC Declaration of Conformity is provided with each system delivered.
Any modifications made to any part of the system without the prior written agreement of Loma
Systems will invalidate the EC Declaration of Conformity and also the product warranty.
14
Safety First
Safety Warnings
Listed below are the safety warnings that are applicable when using a Loma X5 X-ray Inspection
System. It is strongly recommended that personnel who are, or will be, responsible for installing,
maintaining or operating the equipment described in this guide should read and understand these
warnings.
Systems manufactured by Loma are specifically designed for Automatic in-line operation. Operators
are normally only required to work on the machine intermittently and this interaction is usually limited
to either changing product settings via the system control panel or emptying product from the reject
receptacle.
Engineers involved in installation, servicing and maintenance of the X5 X-ray Inspection System may
be exposed to hazards in the execution of particular actions so are advised to be particularly vigilant
and take into account the potential hazards listed.
1. LETHAL HAZARD ELECTRICAL SUPPLIES. A current of 100 milliamps passing through the
body for one second can kill. This can occur at voltages as low as 35V ac or 50V dc The
equipment described in this manual uses electrical power which can be lethal. Unless
absolutely necessary, cleaning, inspection and maintenance must not be carried out without
rst isolating the equipment from all electrical supplies.
2. LETHAL HAZARD - RADIATION. Whilst every precaution has been taken to make sure that all
the necessary guards and safety devices have been fitted to the Loma X-ray Inspection
System, it is recommended that all operatives are trained in the use of X-ray food inspection
machines. Furthermore, it is the responsibility of the employer to create a set of local rules
regarding the safe use of X-ray food inspection systems. In the United Kingdom. this is in
compliance with the Ionising Radiation Regulations 1999. Users outside of the United Kingdom
should consult the relevant health and safety executive.
3. LETHAL HAZARD COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLIES. The equipment described in this manual
may be supplied with a compressed air supply operating at a pressure which may be lethal.
Unless absolutely necessary, cleaning, inspection and maintenance must not be carried out
without rst isolating the equipment from all compressed air supplies
4. WORKING ON EQUIPMENT. If it is essential to work on the equipment with electrical and/or
compressed air power connected, the work must be undertaken only by qualied personnel
who are fully aware of the danger involved and who have taken adequate safety precautions to
avoid contact with dangerous voltages and/or compressed air supplies. Before disconnecting
the system from power, removing the power plug or loosening the power terminals ensure that
signal cables to other machines are disconnected rst. Take care not to trap the earth wire or
ribbon cable when closing the enclosure lid.
5. REJECT DEVICES. At no time, with compressed air and/or electrical power applied to an
automatic reject device, should any part of the body be placed within the operating area of the
reject device.
6. EXCESSIVE NOISE. When an air blast reject device operates, the noise emitted may
constitute a noise hazard. While short exposure to this noise will not cause permanent damage
to hearing, prolonged exposure may cause some damage. Modular belts when run at higher
speeds (typically above 50 m/min) can also generate noise levels in excess of 70dB. It is
recommended that ear defenders are worn by personnel who are regularly exposed to the
noise.
7. HEAVY EQUIPMENT. Loma X-ray Inspection Systems are extremely heavy and considerable
care must be taken when handling them. Sufficient personnel and a suitable fork-lift truck or
pallet truck must be used to ensure safe handling.
8. LIFTING THE MACHINE. Use only the correct slings and lifting tackle to move Loma X-ray
Inspection Systems. Visually inspect all slings and lifting tackle prior to lifting the machine to
ensure that:
a. The safe working load will not be exceeded.
b. There are no frayed or broken strands.
15
Safety First
c. Hooks, rings, etc. are not damaged.

9. MOVING THE MACHINE. The centre of gravity of the system is high. Lower the height
adjustment to its minimum before moving. Care must be taken when moving a system on a
slope to ensure that it does not topple over. This could result in death or severe injury to an
individual and/or severe damage to the equipment.
10. CONTAMINANTS. Oils and greases must always be handled with care. Prolonged bare skin
exposure to certain oils and greases can cause skin problems. Always handle oils and greases
in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
11. TRAPPED FINGERS. Do not place ngers on the underside of the conveyor when the system
is operating. It is possible for ngers to be trapped and subsequently crushed between a
moving and xed component.
12. WARNING LABELS. Loma X-ray Inspection Systems have a number of safety labels attached
to highlight potentially hazardous areas. Particular attention should be paid to the location of
these labels and their significance in operating the system safely. If necessary, labelling is
provided in the local language to meet legislative requirements.
13. GUARDS. No metal detector is to be run without guards fitted unless for maintenance purposes
and only if adequate precautions have been taken. Under no circumstances is any interlock to
be defeated.
14. OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION WARNING. In the USA, the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Acts quite clearly place the burden of
compliance on the user of equipment, and the acts are generalised to the extent that
determination of adequacy of compliance is a judgement decision on the part of the local
inspector. Hence Loma cannot be held responsible for meeting full requirements of OSHA or
OHSA. with regards to any equipment supplied, nor can Loma be held liable for penalty which
may be assessed for failure to meet the requirements of the acts as interpreted by an
authorised inspector.
15. LIABILITY. This machinery contains high voltages of a hazardous and potentially fatal nature.
Loma Systems cannot accept any liability for death or bodily injury resulting from improper work
undertaken by unqualified operatives, or due to deviations from the maintenance instructions
within this manual. This Liability statement is in addition to the terms of sale.
16. DISCONNECTION OF POWER. Before disconnecting the system from power, removing the
power plug or loosening the power terminals ensure that signal cables to other machines are
disconnected first.
Safety Labels
Safety labels are attached or etched in appropriate places to highlight areas of the system where
caution should be taken to avoid potential hazards. The labels used are listed and described below.
Label Message
CE Mark / Machine identification etched on the

machine includes:
Power supply data
Date of Manufacture
Serial Number
Caution: X-ray Hazard

Do not insert any part of the body when the system is
energised.
16
Safety First
Caution: Electric Shocks

Includes voltage and phase details which will vary
dependant on the available supply.
Caution: Hazardous Machinery

All machinery has a potential for being hazardous if
the appropriate level of care is not taken and any
safety warnings not followed.
Caution: Pneumatic Reject Device
Reject devices operate very quickly to remove
contaminated products from a fast moving production
line. Care should be taken to avoid contact with a
reject device when it is operating
Caution: X-Ray Hazard
Do not remove this bin or cover, it forms pasrt of the
radiation shielding.
Caution: Pinch Point

Moving parts of machines, specifically conveyors,
provide opportunities for trapping fingers or even
items of clothing in the mechanism if care is not taken.
Caution: Isolate Machine Before Maintenance

Electrical power should be disconnected before
carrying out maintenance operations that expose staff
to potentially lethal voltages.
Caution: Isolate air supply before maintenance
Compressed air should be disconnected before
carrying out maintenance operations where reject
devices could be activated accidentally.
Safety Guards
Guarding
For Loma X-ray Inspection Systems the use of guarding, including covers, panels, curtains and other
methods is extremely important in order to restrict operators from accessing areas of the machine that
are potentially hazardous whilst the machine is operating.
Interlock switches
On some machines, access hatches are incorporated into the guards to provide access to some
areas of the machine to, for example, clear obstructions and remove products when required. These
hatches are fitted with an interlock switch so that when a hatch is opened, the machine will switch off
and a fault condition is generated.
Safety Relay and Circuits

As safety is paramount, at least one fail safe relay is fitted to ensure that if a contact of the interlocks
were to fail the safety relay will automatically detect the fault and therefore switch off the system and
generate a fault condition.
17
Safety First
Responsibilities and Disclaimer

Unless agreed otherwise in writing by Loma Systems, any warranty claims are subject to the
following:
No unapproved changes or additions to the electrical wiring system have been carried out.
No unapproved mechanical changes or additions to the system have been carried out.
No unapproved electronic changes or additions to the system have been carried out.
No unapproved changes or additions to the system software have been carried out.
Cleaning of the system has been carried out in accordance with the Inspection and
Cleaning guidance included in this User Guide.
The system has not been subjected to operation, or an environment, that is outside of the
parameters included in the machine's Technical Specification.
The system has only been used for the purpose for which it has been sold, as specified in the
contract.
Maintenance tasks have been carried out in accordance with the guidance included in this
User Guide.
Any spare parts required may be obtained from Loma Systems by sending an email to
sales@loma.com.
Safety Measures
Before attempting to use the system, carry out the following basic checks to ensure that it is in a safe
condition and ready to be used:
Check that the electrical power and air supply, if being used, are connected correctly and are
working normally.
Check that the conveyors are clean and clear of any products or other items.
Check that all panels, inspection hatches and the Electrical Cabinet are closed and locked.
Check the area in front of the system to ensure that it is clean and clear of any potential trip or
slip hazards.
Check the control panel to ensure that the system is working correctly and no warning or error
messages are being displayed.
In addition, the following points should be observed for safe operation of the system:
Installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance of the system should only be carried
out by trained personnel, following the applicable safety measures.
Any attempts at servicing and repair of the system by unqualified personnel may result in
damage which could result in the introduction of a safety hazard and the loss of warranty
cover.
Care should be taken when carrying out tasks in areas of the system that are potentially
hazardous; as identified with an appropriate safety label.
Removal of any guards, covers and other protective devices must only be carried out by
authorized or qualified personnel after first switching off and removing any power from the
system.
For the protection of operating personnel, safety switches are installed in easily accessible
places on the system, all of which trigger an EMERGENCY STOP.
All safety devices must be functional at all times! Damaged protective devices or covers must
be repaired or replaced immediately! When safety components are replaced, the protective
devices are to be properly attached and tested by the operator.
18
Safety First
If you require spares or service / repair of your machine, please send an email to
enquiries@loma.com.
Intended Use of the Machine
Permitted Use
The Loma X5 X-ray Inspection System is widely used in the food industry to inspect products for the
inclusion of contaminants, non-conformance to set product integrity parameters, weigh packaged
products and automatically remove contaminated and under or overweight products from the
production line, stop the line, alert the operator or a combination of these.
The system is automated so generally does not need an operator present. Operator intervention is
generally required to change the product or the system settings which is performed standing in front
of the system using the touchscreen.
Improper Use
Loma X-ray Inspection Systems are not domestic appliances and should only be used in an
industrial environment.
Loma X-ray Inspection Systems are not suitable for installation or use in explosive or
potentially explosive atmospheres.
X-ray Inspection System must only be installed, operated, serviced and maintained in
accordance with the instructions included in this User Guide.
Electric arc welding must not be carried out on any part of the X-ray Inspection System unless
authorised by Loma Systems.
All mechanical and electrical protection devices must not be removed or reduced.
The X-ray Inspection System is not designed for use in hazardous environments where there
is a risk to the health and safety of the operator.
The X-ray Inspection System must not be operated in very dry environments which can
generate electrostatic charges.
Noise Levels
Generally in an industrial environment some background noise is present due to the operation of
electrical equipment and mechanical movements of machinery such as conveyors and motors.
In general operation, Loma X-ray Inspection Systems do not emit a level of noise that is hazardous.
However, if an air blast reject device is fitted, the noise emitted when it operates may constitute a
noise hazard.
Whilst short exposure to this noise will not normally cause permanent damage to hearing, prolonged
exposure may cause some damage. It is therefore recommended that ear defenders are worn by
personnel who are regularly exposed to the noise.
End of Life Treatment

In accordance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment recycling (WEEE) Regulations
2012/19/EU and CE Directive 2002/96/EC, electrical and electronic equipment must be recycled at
the end of its useful life.
The X5 X-ray Inspection System is considered to be a Large-scale Stationary Industrial Tool (LSIT) as
defined in Article 2 of the WEEE Regulations. Consequently it is the responsibility of the user of the
equipment to ensure the safe disposal of the machine at the end of its useful life.
19
Safety First
Emergency Procedures
1. EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN. This system is tted with an emergency Stop button. This is
mounted on the front panel and is coloured red. In the event of an emergency, which requires
the System to be immediately stopped, press the Stop button. See Starting and Stopping for
further details.
2. DEALING WITH FIRE. In the unlikely event of re occurring in an item of equipment
manufactured by Loma Systems, it is important that a re extinguisher containing the correct
type of extinguishing material is used. Fire on electrical equipment must be extinguished using
a dry powder extinguisher (Blue label).
3. AUDIBLE WARNINGS. A conveyor may be tted with an alarm which operates when a non-
conforming product is detected. The maximum volume of the alarm is type dependent and lies
in the range of 110 dB(A) to 125 dB(A) at 1 metre.
4. VISUAL INDICATIONS. The system may optionally be fitted with indicator lamps which operate
to show a particular status or in the event of a fault condition. The X-ray Inspection Systems
must not be operated unless all such indicators are fully operational. There are also more
detailed fault listings displayed on the operator screen.
5. RADIATION LEVELS. Each Loma x-ray inspection system has a radiation survey to ensure
that the radiation levels emitted from the system are within the specified allowable limits. The
legislative figure in the United Kingdom is 1Sv/h, but a typical Loma system achieves 0.3Sv/h
on average. In addition, when a system is commissioned on a customer's premises, a critical
examination / radiation survey is carried out and the results stored on record at Loma. A copy is
also provided to the customer.
Quality Assurance
By your selection of a Loma X5 X-ray Inspection System you have demonstrated your intention to
assure the quality of your products, and thereby protect your customers.
The following points are recommended:
Once your Loma X-ray Inspection System is installed you should contact your local Loma
Service Department to have it commissioned.
Regularly test the operation of the X-ray Inspection System to monitor its performance. Keep
accurate records of those tests and any samples being used along with the product details.
If the X-ray Inspection System fails a test, quarantine the products passed through the system
from the last successful test and re-introduce them through the system once the system is fit
for use.
Have the X-ray Inspection System supported by a Planned Preventative Maintenance
Contract. Details can be obtained from your local Loma Service Department.
If you have or intend to have BS EN 9000 accreditation, write a section into your Operating
Procedures Manual covering the operation and maintenance of the X-ray Inspection System
and carry out regular calibration of the machine to ensure its accuracy.
Finally, at least on a yearly basis and when any changes or additions have been made, have
your operators, QA and maintenance personnel trained in the use of the X-ray Inspection
System. Details of available training can be obtained from your local Loma Service
Department. Details of available training can be obtained from your local Loma Service
Department or by sending an email to enquiries@loma.com.
20
Safety First
ISO9000
Work Instructions, Training and Record Keeping

It is recommended that in line X-ray Inspection System performance testing is covered by written
instructions, thus ensuring a clear and consistent approach by operators at all times and providing the
means to substantiate your methods to any assessment body who may ask.
It is recommended that all personnel who may conduct testing are suitably trained to do so and
records are kept to substantiate that training.
Accurate, easily retrievable records should be kept in a safe place for a defined period.
End User Licence Agreement

The software used within the X5 X-ray Inspection System is protected by copyright laws and
international copyright treaties. The software in the X5 X-ray Inspection System is licensed not sold.
1. Grant of Licence:
Loma Systems shall at all times have and retain title and full ownership of all software, firmware
programming routines, documentation supplied for use with the equipment and of all copies
thereof made by Buyer (collectively software).
Loma Systems grants the Buyer a non-exclusive and non-transferable license to use such
software solely for use with the equipment.
The Buyer shall take all reasonable steps to protect Loma Systems proprietary interest in the
software and shall not transfer or otherwise provide or sub-licence the software to any third
party.
2. Rights and Limitations:

The software is licensed as a component within the X5 X-ray Inspection System only, and may
not be separated for use elsewhere.
The software is licensed with the X5 X-ray Inspection System as a single integrated product.
The software may only be used with the X5 X-ray Inspection System.
You may not rent of lease the software.
You may permanently transfer all of your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the X5 X-ray Inspection System, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the
software and the recipient agrees to the EULA.
21
Safety First
22
Technical Specifications
X5 Standard X-ray Inspection System
The technical specifications for the X5 Standard X-ray Inspection System is provided in the table
below.
General
Case Material 304L stainless steel
Case Finish Brushed Finish
PC Processor 2.8 GHz i5
User Interface 12.1" Touch Screen
Detector Array 0.4mm AAT
Line Height Typically 900mm + 50mm
System Length 2000mm
Belt Width 300mm/500mm/600mm
Maximum Pack Weight 25Kg
Mounting On adjustable feet (optionally wheels)
Weight Approximately 550Kg
Signal Only, Stop on Detect, Air Blast (single and twin), Pusher and
Reject Options
Plough (diverter).
Power Requirements
230V, 1-phase, 50Hz. neutral and earth

Supply Voltages
230V / 6A
Load Current (typical)
110V / 11A
Air Supply (Pusher Reject)
Optimum Pressure 80 psi (5.5 bar)
Minimum Pressure 65 psi (4.5 bar)
Maximum Pressure 90 psi (6.2 bar)
Capacity 10 litres/second at 100 psi (6.9 bar)
23
Air Supply (Air Blast Reject per nozzle)
Environment
Environmental Protection Dust and waterproof to IP66 level
Operating Temperature 0C to +25C
Relative Humidity 0 - 90% non-condensing (maximum)
IP Rating IP66 compliant
X-ray System
Maximum X-ray Power 150W
Eco Mode X-ray Power 18W
X5 SpaceSaver X-ray Inspection System

The technical specifications for the X5 SpaceSaver X-ray Inspection System is provided in the table
below.
General
PC Processor 2.8 GHz i5
User Interface 12.1" Touch Screen
Detector Array 0.4mm AAT
Belt Width 300mm/500mm
24
Signal Only, Stop on Detect, Air Blast (single and twin), Pusher and
Reject Options
Plough (diverter).
Power Requirements

Supply Voltages
230V / 6A
110V / 11A
Environment
X-ray System
Eco Mode X-ray Power 18W
X5c X-ray Inspection System

The technical specifications for the X5c X-ray Inspection System is provided in the table below.
General
PC Processor Intel Atom 1.6GHz
User Interface 8" Touch Screen
Detector Array 0.8mm diode pitch
Product Width Up to 300mm
Product Height Up to 100mm
25
Reject Options Signal Only
Power Requirements

Supply Voltages
230V / 6A
110V / 11A
Air Supply (Pusher Reject)
Air Supply (Air Blast Reject per nozzle)
Environment
X-ray System
26
Installation
This chapter provides generic information covering the installation of a Loma X5 X-ray Inspection
System in a logical sequence.
The following sub-sections provide more information:
Warnings
A list of applicable safety warnings to be observed when installing the system is provided.
Receiving and Unpacking

Some basic checks should be carried out on receipt of the system to ensure that it has not
been damaged in transit.
Moving the Machine

Depending on the size and weight of the system, either a crane or a fork-lift truck will be
required to lift and move it into the final location. This section provides some guidance for
moving the system safely.
Adjusting / Levelling the Machine

The system operating height may need to be adjusted so that it can be integrated into your
production line. This section provides some guidance for levelling the system.
Clearance Requirements
From safety and operational viewpoints, it is important that sufficient free space is left around
the system, This section provides some guidance.
Unlocking the X-ray Tank Breather

Before switching on the machine the tank breather screw, located on the top of the X-ray tank
filler plug, MUST be unlocked. This section provides further details.
Connecting the Electrical Supplies

The system should have its own dedicated electrical supply, unless the line supply is known to
be clean. The earth should be robust, of low impedance and noise free. This section provides
some guidance on connecting an electrical supply.
Checking Belt Tracking

The system infeed, powered weight table and outfeed conveyor belts all need to be tracking
correctly. This section provides some guidance.
27
Installation
Warnings
The following safety warnings apply when installing a X5 X-ray Inspection System:
1. LETHAL HAZARD ELECTRICAL SUPPLIES
2. LETHAL HAZARD RADIATION
3. WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
4. HEAVY EQUIPMENT
5. LIFTING THE MACHINE
6. MOVING THE MACHINE
7. CONTAMINANTS
For details see the Safety Warnings section.
The following emergency procedures apply to these procedures:
1. EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN
2. DEALING WITH FIRE.
For details see the Emergency Procedures section.
Receiving and Unpacking
Receiving the machine

On receipt of your Loma X-ray Inspection System, we recommend that you check the external
packing for any signs of damage.
If the external packaging is damaged do not refuse the shipment but make a notation on the
carriers delivery receipt and take pictures of the packaging damage.
When moving the machine, please follow the guidance included in the Moving the Machine
section.
Unpacking the machine

Remove all packing and retain in case the machine has to be repacked for return.
If on unpacking the machine it is subsequently found to be damaged, take further pictures of
the damage and send them to Loma Systems. Loma Systems will then carry out an
investigation, including a review of the applicable carriage terms / Incoterms, to decide what
action is to be taken.
Wheels (if fitted) are screwed fully in and are locked (UK only), or supplied in a polythene bag
which is placed inside the reject bin (Europe). Remove them from the reject bin and remove
the packing material. Then fit the wheels to the out rigged legs of the machine frame. You may
need to raise the machine to fit the wheels so please follow the guidance included in the
Moving the Machine section.
Feet may have been fitted for transit purposes or 20 mm bolts may be used to secure the
machine to a pallet. Remove these bolts if fitted. You may need to raise the machine to
remove the transit bolts and fit the feet so please follow the guidance included in the Moving
the Machine section.
Removing Bolts and Fitting Wheels

Wheels (if fitted) are screwed fully in and are locked (UK only), or supplied in a polythene bag
which is placed inside the reject bin (Europe). Remove them from the reject bin and remove
the packing material. Then fit the wheels to the out rigged legs of the machine frame. You may
need to raise the machine to fit the wheels so please follow the guidance included in the
Moving the Machine section.
28
Installation
Feet may have been fitted for transit purposes or 20 mm bolts may be used to secure the
machine to a pallet. Remove these bolts if fitted. You may need to raise the machine to
remove the transit bolts and fit the feet so please follow the guidance included in the Moving
the Machine section.
Moving the Machine

Depending on the size and weight of the machine, either a crane or a fork-lift truck will be required to
lift and move it into the final location.
When a machine fitted with wheels is to be pushed on the wheels, it is important that it is moved
carefully. Avoid hitting obstacles with the wheels as this can damage the plastic wheel inserts inside
the legs.
Using a Crane
Position the straps under the frame and around the machine so that it will not tilt when lifted.
Then attach the straps to the crane.
Lift the machine carefully and move it to the required location.
Lower the machine and remove the straps.
Do not attempt to lift or move a machine by a reject cover as they are easily damaged.
Using a Fork Lift Truck

A machine tends to be top heavy so may topple forwards when lifted. For this reason it is
advised that the machine is positioned on the forks with the front of the machine facing
backwards.
Raise the forks sufficiently to lift the machine clear of the ground and any obstacles.
Carefully move the machine to the required location.
Lower the forks and withdraw them from the machine.
Adjusting / Levelling the Machine

The operating height of the machine may need to be adjusted so that it can be integrated into your
production line.
Level the machine by adjusting the foot studs. The stud flats are 17mm A/F. make sure that all
feet are firmly on the ground and are evenly supporting the machine so that it does not rock. If
necessary, anchor the machine to the ground using bolts screwed through the feet.
Due to the fact that each X-ray machine has an oil filled tank in which the x-ray tube is
immersed, it is necessary to level the machine to ensure that 100% of the x-ray tube is
immersed. To this end use a spirit level across the top of the cabinet, in the direction of flow,
adjusting the feet until a level condition is achieved.
When the height and level are correct, lock the foot stud half nuts. The lock nut hexagon is
30mm A/F. Failure to do so can have an adverse effect on the components of the system.
You are recommended to apply silicone sealant around the feet and floor.
Clearance Requirements
From safety and operational viewpoints, it is important that sufficient free space is left around the
machine, specifically the front and back, to enable commissioning and for maintenance personnel to
easily gain access to components.
It is recommended that wherever possible a minimum of 1 metre free space is available at the front of
the machine and 1 metre at the rear.
29
Installation
Unlocking the X-ray Tank Breather

Each Loma X5 X-ray Inspection System is delivered with the x-ray tank breather screw locked. This
screw needs to be unlocked before powering up the machine.
To do this, open the cabinet lid by removing and retaining the fastenings. The breather screw is easily
located on the top of the x-ray tank filler plug. Loosen the screw by two or three turns anti-clockwise
and then refit the cabinet lid.
Connecting the Air Supply
Do not start the machine and initiate the use of any compressed air before the Loma
commissioning engineer has approved the installation.
Loma X-ray Inspection Systems require a clean and dry compressed air supply to operate the
optional automatic reject system if fitted.
It is therefore essential that the air supply is robust enough for correct operation of the system when
the reject operates.
Pneumatic Assembly The pneumatic system consists of the following components:
o Isolator Switch The external air supply is connected to the switch which is used to turn
the supply to the system on and off. The air supply is then fed into the Air Regulator.
The Isolator Switch can be locked in the OFF position using a padlock to prevent accidental
operation whilst carrying out servicing and maintenance activities.
o Air Regulator The air regulator is used to set the air pressure being supplied to the
system. A drain trap is provided to remove any water that collects in the system. See the
Maintenance section for further details. The air supply is then fed into the Dump Valve.
o Dump Valve The dump valve is a safety device that dumps air pressure from the system
in an emergency to protect the operator. It also includes a soft start feature which allows
air pressure to build slowly following an air pressure dump to prevent damage or injury.
The air supply is fed from the valve to the input connection on the Reject Valve.
30
Installation
Reject Valve The Reject Valve is attached to the pneumatic assembly and contains five
ports as follows:
o Air Supply Input Port The air supply from the Dump valve is connected to the input.
o Air Supply Output Port 1 The air supply is fed to one side of a reject device. For
example when fitted to one side of a double acting air cylinder, the air drives a rod
attached to a nylon blade to push product off a conveyor into a reject bin.
o Air Supply Output Port 2 - The air supply is fed to the other side of a reject device. For
example when fitted to the other side of a double acting air cylinder, the air drives a rod
attached to a nylon blade back to its start position.
o Air Supply Dump Output Port 1 When an emergency stop is activated, the air pressure
captured in one side of the reject device is dumped through this port. A suppressor is fitted
to the port to reduce any noise generated.
o Air Supply Dump Output Port 2 When an emergency stop is activated, the air pressure
captured in the other side of the reject device is dumped through this port. A suppressor is
fitted to the port to reduce any noise generated
In addition for fail-safe reasons an air pressure switch is fitted in order to alert the operator that the air
supply is low (below 40psi / 2.8 bar) and to shut down the system; generating a fault condition.
The system will be supplied with the pneumatic system already fitted and connected to the applicable
reject device.
Therefore the only actions required are to connect the air supply to the input side of the air regulator
using 10mm O/D tubing and set the air pressure using the regulator.
The air pressure should be set to 80psi (5.5 bar) except when being used to supply an air-blast reject
device when the pressure should be set to 100psi (6.9 bar). The minimum air pressure must not fall
below 65psi (4.5 bar) when the reject operates.
Care should be taken when cutting the compressed air supply tube to length before fitting to
ensure that no particles enter the tube as this may cause damage to or prevent the high
precision air nozzles from operating correctly.
31
Installation
Connecting the Electrical Supplies
ATTENTION
IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT THE MACHINE IS CORRECTLY EARTHED.
POWER SHOULD NOT BE SUPPLIED VIA AN EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER
(RCD).
PLEASE CHECK THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE BEFORE SWITCHING ON.
ERRORS WILL AFFECT LOMA WARRANTY.
Connection of the machine to an electrical supply and any diagnostic work must only be
carried out by suitably trained and qualified personnel.
The supply voltage for the machine is indicated on the identification/rating plate that is mounted on
the frame. An electrical diagram is supplied with each machine to provide connection details.
The machine should have its own dedicated supply, unless the line supply is known to be clean. The
earth should be robust, of low impedance and noise free.
Any dedicated supply line should be run in its own conduit / trunking away from other noisy supplies.
The input voltage should not be subject to voltage fluctuations outside the limits (NWML0320):
Minus 15% to plus 10% of the nominal supply voltage (230V or 110V).
Zero voltage for more than 20mS.
50% of nominal voltage for more than 40mS.
80% of nominal voltage for more than 100mS.
Operation outside these limits may cause loss of function until the supply condition recovers to within
limits.
The system is fitted with an isolator switch and a 24V ac control circuit. The supply voltage for the
system is indicated on the identification plate that is mounted on the frame.
The following illustration shows the isolator switch connection.
32
Installation
The internal cabinet areas of the machine contain electrical devices that may be at 230V
1PH or 110V 1PH potential depending on the supply voltage. These voltages may cause
injury or death on contact. Work in this area should only be carried out by a qualified
Technician with the Isolator Switch OFF. The Isoltaor Switch is located on the right-hand
side of the X-ray cabinet when viewed from the rear.
Where there are signals with voltages generated outside of the X-ray system, these are not
isolated by the X-ray system Isolator Switch. Equipment generating these external signals
should also be isolated before working in the internal cabinet areas. Due care must be taken
by service personnel when connecting these external signals to the appropriate terminals.
To connect an electrical supply, proceed as follows:
1. Unlock and open the main cabinet door to access the electrical services area.
The back of the Isolator Switch is located on the right hand side of the cabinet when viewed
2. from the rear. Beneath it on the bottom of the cabinet is the cable gland access for the
power cable.
3. Push the supply cable up into the cabinet through the cable gland.
Split the cable inside the cabinet and cut the wires to suitable lengths. An armoured/braided
4. cable is recommended when cable conduit is not used. A suitable earth conductor is also to
be fitted.
5. Make the connections to the Isolator Switch as specified in the table below.
The supply to the system must be either 5-core cable (3-core cable is suitable for single
phase machines) fed through a flexible conduit or 5-core armoured cable. Insert the cable
through the gland.
Do not use rigid conduit of any type. Rigid conduit can lead to vibration being transmitted to
other system components.
Cable Connections
European Colour North American Colour Terminal
LIVE Brown or Black HOT Black 1/3/5
NEUTRAL Blue NEUTRAL White N
EARTH Green/Yellow GROUND Green E
SCREEN - SCREEN - E
Do not start the machine and initiate the use of any electrical circuitry before the Loma
commissioning engineer has approved the installation.
33
Installation
Checking Belt Tracking

The belt must be checked for correct tracking before running the conveyor for any length of time. The
tracking adjusters are found adjacent to the end rollers of the machine. See Conveyor Belt
Maintenance for further details.
Radiation Surveys
Introduction
As for all x-ray machines, the Loma system produces ionising radiation when x-rays are being
generated. However, legislation governs the allowable emission levels and safe working practices
when using an x-ray machine.
With this in mind the X5 X-ray Inspection System has been designed to provide adequate shielding
throughout the system, with safety interlocks preventing the guards or access panels from being lifted
or removed without x-ray generation being stopped.
It is recommended, and may be a requirement for some countries, to complete a radiation survey of
the machine on the following occasions to ensure that there is no deterioration of the safety system:
Daily
After any maintenance has been performed
After the machine has been moved for any reason
After any damage to the system has occurred
As per any country or local regulations
A documented survey program assures that the system is operating safely and correctly, has not
been damaged and provides evidence that the system meets all applicable radiation guidelines.
When your x-ray system is commissioned your Loma service engineer will carry out an initial
survey report and provide you with a copy. The United Kingdom regulations also require that
radiological information is provided. This information is included in the 'Cautionary Advice'
section under 'Local Rules'.
Radiation Dose Rates

Most countries where x-ray machines are used have set a maximum allowable emitted dose rate per
hour. Using a suitable radiation monitoring device, which itself is regularly tested and calibrated at
least once a year, the emissions at a set distance from the x-ray machine surface and around the
machine at any aperture or discharge conveyor point are recorded.
The values are then checked against the allowable radiation dose rates to ensure that the machine is
operating safely.
Please contact your local Loma Service Centre for advice on suitable radiation monitoring devices.
Routine Operational Testing

After the x-ray inspection system has been installed, as part of the commissioning process the Loma
service engineer will carry out a full radiation and safety survey of the x-ray system.
For assurance that the system remains safe both the emergency shutdown system and measurement
of the surface dose rates need to be included in a regular test schedule.
The Emergency Stop buttons provide the means for the operational staff to shut down the system
rapidly. Although the stop provided is of proven reliability, it is important that it is tested on a regular
basis.
The test consists of actuating the stop whilst the system is operating to ensure that the system
immediately shuts down. It is also a requirement that when the stop has been manually reset, the
system does not automatically start up.
34
Installation
On the conveyor machine, the covers need to be opened to clear blockages, etc. on the conveyor belt
and it is important that the safety interlocks immediately shut down the system.
Opening each lid in turn and noting that the system immediately shuts down tests the interlocks. As
noted above the system needs to be re-started before x-rays can be generated again.
External Radiation
Changes in radiation dose rate, either at the surface of the machine or at the infeed and outfeed ports,
is most likely to be noted following any material alterations to the system such as a change in the
arrangement of the conveyor or covers. In addition, if the x-ray tubes operating voltage is raised or
lowered, this will affect the reading measured. It is therefore important that a full radiation survey
should be carried out following servicing or repair work to verify the integrity of the system
If changes are observed it will most likely be at either the infeed or the outfeed ports because it is
here that product enters and leaves the inspection chamber, allowing some x-rays to scatter along the
conveyor belt. In view of this the ports are the most important places for routine operational
monitoring, but all surfaces should be checked as well.
Frequency of Monitoring
As noted above the most sensitive area for changes in the dose rate are the ports and as a
consequence these should be monitored most frequently. To measure the dose rate at the two ports
will take only a few minutes and should be carried out either once per day or once per shift as
appropriate.
It is recommended that the dose rate at the ports be measured at the start of each shift or workday so
that each operating team can feel confident that all is well when they start. The results should be
noted in some form of record so that any longer term trends can be observed.
Where lead curtains are fitted, over time these will wear and potentially tear. Visual inspection of
these on a daily basis is recommended so that signs of wear are picked up before the curtains
become damaged and so prevent the potential of the external dose rate rising above an acceptable
level.
Summary of Test Procedures for Radiation Leakage

It is strongly recommended that persons appointed to carry out radiation surveys have received the
necessary radiation awareness training qualification. In some countries this may be mandatory and it
is recommended that the user seeks advice from the local health and safety executive.
Daily or Shift Checks

Measure and record the radiation dose rate at the positions indicated on the Radiation Survey
Sheet using the radiation monitor. If it is greater than the maximum allowable shut down the
system and report it immediately to the supervisor
Check the condition of the lead curtains, ensuring there are no splits or broken segments.
Weekly Checks
Check the operation of the two Emergency Stop buttons and report any failures to your
supervisor.
Check the conveyor doors to ensure that when a door is opened the interlock switches operate
and the system immediately shuts down. Report any failures to your supervisor.
Monthly Checks
Carry out a full Radiation Survey over the accessible surfaces of the machine using the
radiation monitoring device.
35
Installation
After a Major Service

Carry out a full Radiation Survey over the accessible surfaces of the machine and at the
openings of the infeed and outfeed ports using the radiation monitoring device. Check that the
Emergency Stop buttons and interlock switches are operational.
After a machine has been moved

Carry out a full Radiation Survey over the accessible surfaces of the machine and at the
openings of the infeed and outfeed ports using the radiation monitoring device. Check that the
Emergency Stop buttons and interlock switches are operational.
When using the radiation monitoring device it must be moved slowly over the surface that
you are measuring. The suggested rate is less than 150mm (6") per second. Please refer to
the instructions supplied with your monitoring device.
It is strongly recommended that persons appointed to carry out radiation surveys have
receieved the necessary radiation awareness training qualification. In some countries this
may be mandatory and it is recommended that the user seeks advice from the local health
and safety executive.
36
About the X-Ray Inspection System Range
Introduction
Loma X-ray Inspection Systems are packed with some incredible innovations, which are all designed
to make them compliant with current legislation and best in class.
The highly innovative design combines a multitude of conveyor configurations and integrated features
to reduce set up time, allowing for height adjustment and reversible transport direction. Each system
is built with a stainless steel frame, combined with a suite of controls to suit your plant integration
protocols.
Even more robust and reliable, the latest products continue to lead the way in tackling key industry
challenges and standards, notably food inspection Codes of Practice and user traceability.
To provide solutions for a wide range of applications, a number of X5 X-ray Inspection System models
are available which are listed and described below.
X5 Standard X-ray Inspection System

The X5 Standard X-ray Inspection System offers best in class detection for the food and
packaging industry.
The items numbered in the figures above are listed and described below.
Engineered for use in tough environments and designed for lower maintenance and a great
lifetime cost of ownership, the X5 incorporates a range of innovative features, some of which
are listed below.
o AAT (Adaptive Array Technology) tailors resolution, depth and scaling to give the best
detection performance for any product requiring inspection.
37
o Operating System - Industrial grade PC with embedded WES 2009 operating system and
including a modem, Ethernet and front access USB port.
o Digitally controlled WASC (Wide Angle, Self Cooled) high performance X-ray tank. Tube
life estimated at 7 to 10 years.
o Computer vision system utilising image processing and morphological techniques.
o Pass key protected set-up.
o USB report and image archiving.
o Full diagnostic and system health monitoring with date and time stamp archiving, including
remote support tools.
o Usage monitoring with planned maintenance prompts.
o Modular system with digital communications between major sub systems.
X5 SpaceSaver X-ray Inspection System

The X5 SpaceSaver X-ray Inspection System provides all of the features and functions of it's
bigger brother the X5 Standard but in a more compact format which enables it to handle
products up to a maximum weight of 6Kg and at belt speeds of up to 75 m/min.
38
X5c X-ray Inspection System

The X5c X-ray Inspection System is a compact machine which may be smaller in stature than
other x-ray inspection systems in the range, but still includes a wide range of features and
functions as standard; handling products up to a maximum of 6Kg in weight and providing
Signal Only reject functionality.
1. - Conveyor Belt
The conveyor belt transports product packs through the system and can set to run at 3 different
speeds to suit the product application. It can also be configured to run from right to left or left to
right to suit the existing production line. See Conveyor Belts for further details.
2 - Touch Screen
To give full access to all of the available features and functionality provided by the X-ray
Inspection System a full colour touch screen is provided. See The User Interface for further
details.
3 - Indicator Lamp
A dome lamp is mounted at the top of the machine which provides visual signalling as follows:
o Red Lamp - X-rays are being generated by the system.
o Green Lamp - Power is being supplied to the machine but x-rays are not currently being
generated.
39
o Orange Lamp - Indicates a system fault.
4 - USB Connector
A USB connector is provided for exporting reports and also for software upgrades.
5 - Control Panel
The Control Panel provides a number of switches and buttons for controlling operation of the
system. See User Interface for further information.
6. - Conveyor Cover (Guard)

A lockable cover is provided at the front of the machine to provide easy access to the conveyor
belt for cleaning and maintenance purposes. See Guards for further details.
7 - Adjustable Feet / Wheels

Whether provided with feet or wheels, the operating height of the system may be adjusted to
compensate for flooring that is not level and to integrate the system into the existing production
line.
8 - Reject Device / Reject Bin

The X5 Standard is provided with a reject device, pusher or air blast, and a reject bin. These
are optional for the X5 SpaceSaver and X5c models which are supplied as standard with the
signal only reject option. See Reject Devices for further details.
See also the Optional Equipment section.
Reject Devices
Loma Systems offer a range of reject devices for removing contaminated and non-conforming
products from your production line, based on a number of factors including the product type, its
general dimensions, the general set up of your production line and of course how you wish to handle
rejected products.
The following reject devices are available and may optionally be fitted to your X-ray Inspection
System:
Signal Only
This is the standard option fitted to X5 SpaceSaver and X5c X-ray Inspection Systems and is of
course available on the standard X5 if required.
On detection of a nonconforming pack, the control unit provides an output signal only which is
then utilised in conjunction with the customers choice of equipment for removing the reject
from the production line.
Stop On Detect (SOD)

Stop On Detect is the simplest type of reject device available which is most suitable for
removing heavy, awkward shaped rejected products from your production line.
On detection of a non-conforming pack the system will stop and an alarm will sound, allowing
you to remove the product from the conveyor belt and dispose of it in accordance with your
local procedures.
After removal of the pack, you must then manually restart the system.
This device is suitable for use with packs such as sacks, crates and bulk boxes at slow
conveyor speeds.
40
Air Blast
The air blast reject device uses a high pressure blast of compressed air to push a
nonconforming pack off of the outfeed conveyor belt and into the reject bin.
Generally a single nozzle is specified but a second nozzle can be fitted when required to
provide more control for heavier products.
This device is suitable for use with wrapped food products weighing up to 0.8Kg and at
conveyor speeds up to 250 ppm.
Pusher
The Pusher reject device is suitable for removing non-conforming products in rigid packaging
from your production line.
An acetyl blade, driven by a blast of high pressure compressed air, pushes the product off of
the Outfeed conveyor belt and into a reject bin.
This device is suitable for use with wrapped food products in rigid packaging weighing up to
0.8Kg and at conveyor speeds up to 250 ppm.
Plough
The Plough reject device, sometimes referred to as the diverter, is suitable for removing non-
conforming packs being presented at a low rate from your production line.
An acetyl blade, driven by a blast of high pressure compressed air, moves across the conveyor
belt to divert the contaminated product off of the conveyor belt and into a reject bin.
This device is suitable for use with packs such as cakes and open packs at slow conveyor
speeds.
Reject Bins
Two sizes of reject bin are available for collecting rejected products removed from the conveyor
belt using a pneumatic reject device. The size of the bin required is determined by the conveyor
length and the size and weight of the product to be rejected.
Reject bins are fitted with a lockable door as standard and optionally with an electronically
operated door lock mechanism that may be opened and locked by operators with a specific
user level access account through the user interface.
In addition the bin can optionally be fitted with a 'Bin Full' photo-eye which generates a warning
when the bin needs to be emptied. A 'test' paddle can also be fitted to manually check that the
Bin Full photo-eye is working correctly.
Conveyor Belts
As standard Loma X-ray systems are fitted with flat belts. However, plastic modular belts, which are
suitable for use with heavier products in a harsh environment, are available as a special requirement
for the Infeed and Outfeed conveyors.
Flat Belts
Flat belts are constructed from polyurethane and have a smooth surface. They are supplied as
standard in blue but white coloured belts are available if required.
41
Plastic Modular Belts

The plastic modular belt conveyors use a belt constructed from injected-moulded plastic modules,
assembled into an interlocked unit and joined by plastic hinge rods.
The following table gives details of the three different plastic modular belt types supplied by Loma:
Belt Type Design Applications
Flat top Smooth closed surface Wrapped or loose products
Flush grid Open grid pattern with a smooth surface Boxed or wrapped products
Lightweight flush grid Open grid pattern with a smooth surface Boxed or wrapped products
42
Guards
For Loma X-ray Inspection Systems the use of guarding, including covers, access panels, curtains
and other methods is extremely important in order to restrict operators from accessing areas of the
system that are potentially hazardous.
Optional Equipment
The following options are available, depending on the system and type of reject mechanism fitted:
Reject Devices - Air Blast (single or twin), pusher or bespoke - X5 Standard / X5

SpaceSaver
See Reject Devices for further details.
Reject Confirmation and Bin Full Sensors - X5 Standard / X5 SpaceSaver

Supplied as a combined option, this feature utilises additional photo-eyes to confirm that a
nonconforming product has been rejected and also to provide a warning when the reject bin is
full and needs emptying.
Survey Meter - X5 Standard / X5 SpaceSaver / X5c

Two types of radiation rate meters can be supplied for general determination of any radiation
leaks and for accurately measuring radiation levels when carrying out periodic radiation
surveys.
Remote Diagnostics - X5 Standard / X5 SpaceSaver / X5c

Full diagnostic and system health monitoring with date and time stamp archiving, including
remote support tools.
Lockable Wheels - X5 Standard / X5 SpaceSaver / X5c

A quick locking / release mechanism is fitted to each wheel.
LomaEnet - X5 Standard / X5 SpaceSaver / X5c

The LomaEnet application enables statistical reports to be transferred from the system onto a
remote PC. This feature requires connection to a PC on a local network via a serial link or
Ethernet connection.
43
44
Getting Started
This chapter provides some basic guidelines for initially using the X5 X-ray Inspection System.
User Interface
This section provides brief a description of the machines user interface so that you may
navigate around the system to make the right selections.
User Access
There are 5 levels of access that can be applied to a user account which are described in this
section.
Logging In and Out

Once a user account has been provided for you this section describes how to log in and out of
your account.
Starting and Stopping

Guidance is provided for each inspection machine type, describing how to start and stop the
machine; including stopping the machine in an emergency.
User Interface
The X5 X-ray Inspection System provides a touch screen user interface located on the front of the
machine control panel.
Through the user interface you can set up and manage all parameters required for inspecting
products and for the general operation of the machine.
To select an option on the touch screen you must tap the screen in the appropriate place.
For consistency, we have used the term Select throughout this guide to mean tapping
the screen to make a selection.
X5 and X5 SpaceSaver Models
45
Getting Started
Control Panel
The Control Pane, located under the touch screen and shown above, provides the following:
The Interlock Key is used to prevent accidental generation of X-rays. It has 3

positions as follows:
ON - When the key is in this position X-rays can be generated.
INTERLOCK
KEY OFF - When the key is in this position X-rays cannot be generated.
CLEAN DOWN - When the key is in this position x-rays cannot be
generated but the conveyor can be run with the front, infeed and outfeed
covers open to allow for cleaning.
X-RAYS ON This red light is illuminated when x-rays are being generated.
This switch consists of three parts as follows

Green - Located at the top of the switch, this button starts the conveyor
when it is pushed in.
CONVEYOR White light - Located in the centre of the switch, this light is illuminated
when the conveyor is running.
Red - Located at the bottom of the switch, this button stops the conveyor
when it is pushed in.
The Setup Key is provided to protect your system against tampering.

Generally keys are only issued to Supervisor level users and above. It has 2
OFF - When the key is in this position, no access is available to system
SETUP KEY
settings and parameters to any level of user.
ENABLE - When the key is in this position, Supervisor level users and
above have access to system settings and parameters to make any
changes required.
In an emergency, pushing in this button will immediately stop the generation of

x-rays and the conveyor.
EMERGENCY Following clearance of any fault, the button is reset by twisting it a quarter turn
STOP in a clockwise direction and then releasing it.
An additional emergency stop button is provided on the rear panel of the
machine.
46
Getting Started
X5c Model
The user interface has been carefully designed to be as intuitive as possible, using common actions
and symbols that you will see and use for operating other machines and computers.
You may not have access to a computer or printed copy of the User Guide when operating the
machine, so the user guide is accessible within the user interface.
Control Panel
A number of controls, located under the touch screen and shown above, provide the following:
The Interlock Key is used to prevent accidental generation of X-rays. It has 3

RESET - Turning the key to this position resets the interlocks on the
INTERLOCK machine to clear any faults. The key cannot be left in the Reset position.
KEY It automatically returns to the OFF position when released.
OFF - When the key is in this position X-rays cannot be generated.
XRAY ON - When the key is in this position X-rays can be generated.
In an emergency, pushing in this button will immediately stop the generation of

x-rays and the conveyor.
EMERGENCY Following clearance of any fault, the button is reset by twisting it a quarter turn
STOP in a clockwise direction and then releasing it.
An additional emergency stop button is provided on the rear panel of the
machine.
This button is used to start and stop the conveyor as follows:
CONVEYOR Green - When the button is green this indicates that the conveyor is
running. Press the button to stop the conveyor.
STOP / START
Red - When the button is red, this indicates that the conveyor is not
running. Press the button to start the conveyor.
47
Getting Started
Isolator Switch (All Models)

In addition to the controls described above, an Isolator Switch is also provided to control the supply of
electrical power to the system.
The Isolator Switch is located on the left hand side of the machine and is shown
here in the ON position. Power is being supplied to the system.
The Isolator Switch is shown here in the OFF position. Power is NOT being
supplied to the system.
User Access
User access to the features and functionality of the X5 X-ray Inspection System is managed through a
general access level and five password protected levels, listed and described below, with each level
providing access based on the user function.
During installation and commissioning, the Loma Engineer will set and provide you with passwords for
accessing all user levels which you can then provide to staff as required.
Named accounts may then be set up for each user, selecting a specific access level for them, with a
unique password for each user to log in to the system.
If you attempt to access a screen that is only available to user levels above your current logged in
level, you will be prompted to enter a valid password for the required user level.
None - (Level 0)
This is the general access level used for selection when the system is not being used but is left
powered up. It provides no access to any features or functions.
Operator - (Level 1)
This level of access is aimed at operators who need to use the machine functionality and
features to carry out routine product inspections to remove any contaminated products from the
production line.
Supervisor - (Level 2)
This level of access is aimed at supervisors who need to use the machine functionality and
features to manage the selection and inspection of a range of products. It also includes access
to features and functionality available to the Operator user.
Quality - (Level 3)
This level of access benefits quality staff who need to monitor and analyse inspection data to
ensure that acceptable quality standards are achieved and maintained for all products
inspected to meet customer and legislative requirements. It also includes access to features
and functionality available to the Operator and Supervisor users.
Engineer - (Level 4)
This level of access is aimed at engineers and technicians who need to carry out routine
servicing and maintenance tasks to assure the high availability and performance of the
machine. It also includes access to features and functionality available to the Operator,
Supervisor and Quality users.
48
Getting Started
Loma - (Level 5)
This level of access requires that you enter a special password. It is generally for Loma
Engineer use only as it provides access to all features and functionality of the machine and
additional screens, requiring detailed knowledge and experience to make changes to the
configuration and set up. This access level may be used during initial installation and
commissioning of the system, routine servicing and maintenance or to rectify any problems.
When this access level is selected you will be able to access some screens that cause
inspection to stop until you navigate away from the screen.
It is recommended that you set the access level back to None once you have completed
your activities to prevent unauthorised access to features and functionality.
Logging In and Out

This section provides guidance for logging in and out of the X5 X-ray Inspection System.
The following procedures assume that the system is switched on and working normally.
Logging In
When the machine is initially started it will be logged in by default at the None access level. To log in
to the machine using your account details, proceed as follows:
1. In the Main Run screen, tap on the GoTo button to display the GoTo screen.
49
Getting Started
2. Then tap on the Access Level button to display the Access Level Access Level (Users)
screen.
3. Tap on your user account name. The Password screen will be displayed. Enter your
password and tap on the OK button.
The Main Run screen will be displayed and you are now logged in using your user account
4.
details.
50
Getting Started
Logging Out
It is recommended that you change the User level to None once you have finished using the machine
to preclude misuse of the system by untrained / unauthorised staff.
After around 10 minutes, the machine will automatically reset the User level to None, but to change it
manually proceed as follows:
1. In the Main Run screen, tap on the GoTo button to display the GoTo screen.
2. Then tap on the Access Level button to display the Access Level (Users) screen.
3. Tap on the Log off button. The Main Run screen will be displayed and you are now logged
off.
51
Getting Started
Starting and Stopping

This section provides guidance for starting and stopping the X5 X-ray Inspection System, including
stopping the machine in an emergency.
The machine should normally be left switched ON at all times. This is to allow it to remain fully
'warmed-up' and achieve maximum detection stability. When not inspecting product, simply exit the
inspection procedure and leave the system idle.
If the system has not been used for a period of a month or more than it is critical that the x-
ray set is re-seasoned. Failing to do so could cause the x-ray set to be stressed and this
may result in premature failure. This may invalidate your warranty. If in doubt, please
contact your local Loma Service Centre.
Before powering up any x-ray machine for the first time, a suitably qualified and authorised
person should be present to carry out a critical examination / radiation survey. For advice
please contact your local Loma Service Centre.
If the machine has been specified for a low ambient temperature site, it will be fitted with an internal
thermostatically controlled heater, which requires the electrical power to be ON at all times.
The only time power should he removed from the machine is when it is not being used for several
days. In the unlikely event of needing to remove power from the machine via the isolator switch,
please allow 10-20 seconds before switching back on.
The following procedures should only be carried out once all installation and commissioning
activities have been completed and operators trained in the use of the machine.
Starting the Machine

To start the machine, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that the machine is connected to a suitable power supply and, if a pneumatic reject
device is fitted, a suitable air supply.
2. Turn the Isolator Switch, located on the left hand side of the machine, in a clockwise
direction. This will switch on the electrical supply to the machine. The machine will then
start to load its software.
3. By default the Service / Maintenance screen is displayed, providing information on the

operating status of the machine. Ensure that all levels are within specification before
continuing.
52
Getting Started
4. Click on the OK button to close the Service / Maintenance screen and display the Main
Run screen.
5. Insert the key into the INTERLOCK KEY lock and turn it anti-clockwise to the ON position.
The key must be in place and turned to the 'ON' position for X-rays to be generated.
6. Insert the key into the SETUP KEY lock and turn it clockwise to the ENABLED position.
7. For the X5 Standard and SpaceSaver systems, push the green section of the Start/Stop
button, located on the front of the machine, to start the conveyor. The white lamp on the
button is lit, indicating that the conveyor is running.
8 For the X5c system, push the green Start/Stop button located on the front of the machine
to start the conveyor. The button will change to red, indicating that the conveyor is running
and that pushing the button will stop it.
9.
Select the Start button in the Main Run screen.
10. A calibration process is now started and the Calibration Required screen is displayed.
Select the Yes button to start the calibration.
53
Getting Started
11. The Starting Inspection screen is displayed. Select the Calibrate button. The progress of
the calibration process is then shown.
12. Once the calibration has been completed, the Starting Inspection screen closes and the
Main Run screen is displayed.
13. The red X-RAYS ON lamp will be lit, indicating that X-rays are being generated. The
machine is now ready to start inspecting the selected product.
Stopping the Machine

To stop the machine, proceed as follows:
Select the Stop button at the bottom left of the screen. After a few seconds the red X-
1.
RAYS ON lamp will be extinguished, indicating that X-rays are no longer being generated.
For the X5 Standard and SpaceSaver systems, push the red section of the Start/Stop
2. button, located on the front of the machine, to stop the conveyor. The white lamp on the
button is not lit, indicating that the conveyor is no longer running.
For the X5c system, push the Start/Stop button located on the front of the machine to stop
3. the conveyor. The button will change to green, indicating that the conveyor is not running
and that pushing the button will start it.
The machine should normally be left switched ON at all times, but if you are not going to
4. use the machine for several days, turn the Isolator Switch in an anti-clockwise direction.
This will switch off the electrical supply to the machine.
54
Getting Started
Emergency Stop
To stop the machine in an emergency, proceed as follows:
1. Press either the red Emergency Stop button, located on the front of the machine or the
button located at the back of the machine. The System Fault screen will be displayed, the
machine will stop generating x-rays and the conveyor will automatically stop.
2. Select the OK button to close the screen.
Using an emergency stop as a means of stopping the system will generate a system fault
which cause false rejects to occur. It also puts unnecessary stress on the X-ray components
and motor inverter.
The emergency stop must therefore only be used as a safety device in case of
emergencies.
Starting the Machine after an Emergency Stop

To start the machine after an emergency stop, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that any issue that caused you to stop the machine has been cleared.
Turn the activated red Emergency Stop button clockwise a quarter turn and then release
2.
the button which will then pop out to its original position.
For the X5 Standard and SpaceSaver systems, push the green section of the Start/Stop
3. button, located on the front of the machine, to start the conveyor. The white lamp on the
button is lit, indicating that the conveyor is running.
For the X5c system, push the green Start/Stop button located on the front of the machine
4. to start the conveyor. The button will change to red, indicating that the conveyor is running
and that pushing the button will stop it.
5. Select the Start button in the Startup screen.
After a few seconds the red X-RAYS ON lamp will be lit, indicating that X-rays are being
6.
generated and the machine is now ready to start inspecting the selected product.
55
Getting Started
56
The User Interface
The user interface, located on the front of the machine control panel, enables you to access all of the
features and functionality provided by the X5 X-ray Inspection System.
Through the user interface you can setup and manage all parameters required for inspecting products
and for the general operation of the machine.
General Navigation
The user interface has been carefully designed to be as intuitive as possible, using common
actions and symbols that you will see and use when operating other equipment and computers.
For further assistance, this section is included to describe how to find your way around the user
interface, highlighting some common functionality that makes things simple to do.
Screens
The user interface provides a hierarchy of screens that are presented in a logical sequence for
setting up the machine for inspecting products and accessing system and inspection
information. Although you will quickly learn how to navigate through the screens to access the
ones you want, this section provides some assistance for you to get started. A full description
for each of the screens is available and where applicable additional information is included to
explain the principles behind some of the more complex settings available.
General Navigation
The user interface provides a number of screens which are accessed through menu buttons
displaying relevant icons and text. Most screens also contain a series of tabbed panes and in some
cases a tabbed pane also provides a number of sub-tabs to organise information and settings into a
logical hierarchy.
There are two main screens, the Main Run screen and the Mimic screen, through which all other
screens may be accessed.
Screen Access
Access to screens is managed through 4 Access Levels, based on user type, and the system has
default screen access configured for each level. However, through the Advanced Access Level
screen additional access can be configured for each of the 4 levels.
In addition, Loma Engineers have access to Service Machine screens via an Access Level 5
password. These screen are described in this user guide for completeness to show options that can
changed or activated by the Loma Engineer that were not required when the system was initially
installed and commissioned.
Title Bar
In all screens except the Main Run and Mimic screens, the title bar at the top of the screen displays
the name of the screen but also provides additional information:
Product Settings - You are viewing the Product Settings screen.
[Cereal] - The product currently selected for inspection is Cereal. Products are selected in the
Product Menus screen.
[Bounded] - The 'Bounded' Flow Mode has been selected in the Advanced Product Settings
screen.
[Remote Product Change] - Remote Support via TeamViewer has been started in the
Comms tab of the Diagnostics screen.
57
The User Interface
[Access Level: 4 (Engineer)] - You are currently logged in at Access Level 4. You can select
another level to log in at in the Access Level screen but you will need to enter a relevant
password.
Selection Options
Controls used throughout the system for selecting options are included in the table below.
Options List - Tapping on the field or arrow presents a drop down list of
options for selection. Tap on an option in the list to select it or tap on the
field or arrow again to close the list.
Option Check Box - Tapping in the box enables the associated option
and puts a tick in the box. Enabling an option often provides additional
settings in a screen which then need to be configured.
Option Radio Button - Radio buttons are generally used where more
than one option is available. Tapping on the button selects the associated
option.
Field - You can tap into a field to enter a value. Depending on the value
to be entered either a numeric keypad or keyboard will be displayed so
that you can enter the required value. See Entering Data below for more
details.
Entering Data
To enable you to enter values into fields the following controls are provided:
Numeric Keypad
When you tap into a field that requires a number to be entered a numeric keypad will be
displayed in a pop-up screen.
You can enter a number by tapping on the number buttons. Then tap on the tick button to close
the screen and save the number into the selected field.
To assist in selecting an appropriate value, generally the range of numbers that can be entered
is displayed.
58
The User Interface
Keyboard
When you tap into a field in which you can enter characters and numbers a keyboard will be
displayed in a pop-up screen.
Buttons are provided on the keyboard to select either characters or numbers to be displayed for
selection and you can switch between them to enter a mixture of characters and numbers as
required by tapping on the keyboard buttons. Then tap on the tick button to close the screen
and save the entry into the selected field.
To assist in entering an appropriate value, generally the maximum number of characters that
can be entered for the field is displayed.
Tap on the ?123 button to display numbers Tap on the ABC button to display characters
Saving Changes
Changes in any screen are made by tapping on either of the following buttons:
The Apply button is generally displayed in a screen where changes to values and
settings can be made. Tapping on the button saves any changes made and closes the
screen.
The OK button is displayed in screens where changes to values and settings can be
made and also where non-editable information is displayed. Tapping on the button
saves any changes made where applicable and closes the screen.
Screens
The user interface provides a hierarchy of screens that are presented in a logical sequence for setting
up the machine for inspecting products and accessing system and inspection information.
Although you will quickly learn how to navigate through the screens to access the ones you want, this
section provides some assistance for you to get started.
There are two main screens provided from which all other screens are accessed. These are the Main
Run screen and the Mimic screen. Charts are provided below to show the hierarchy of screens that
are accessible from these two screens.
The screens that you are able to access and edit are subject to the access level currently
selected.
59
The User Interface
Main Run Screen

The chart below displays the screens that can be accessed from the Main Run screen and the order
in which they are available.
Main Run
Product Menus Access Level Mimic
Product Advanced Image System Contaminant

Access Level Totals Reports X-ray Set Detector
Settings Sys. Settings Manager Information Detection Test
Service
Events System Log PLC Comms
Machine
General Scan Settings Inspection I/O Rejects
Advanced Advanced Image Product

Contaminants
Prod. Settings Scan Settings Processing Integrity
Learn Product Image Contaminant Object

Mask Fill Level
Settings Optimisation Detection Checking
Blanking
Set Product
Box Remover Masking Basic Explorer Object Loose Objects Histogram
Parameters
Image Analysis
Advanced Box Advanced Object Object

Histogram Histogram Checkweigh
Remover Masking Information Information
Advanced Advanced
Profile Profile
Object Loose Objects
Weight Mode
Advanced Selection
Advanced Basic Explorer
Advanced
Checkweigh
Mimic Screen
The chart below displays the screens that can be accessed from the Mimic screen by tapping on the
hotspots shown.
Mimic Screen
Product Settings System Product Settings Product Statistics

Main Run Access Level Access Level Manual (PDF)
(Inspection Tab) Settings (I/O (Rejects) Tab) Menus (Totals Tab)
Main Run
Purpose
The Main Run screen is displayed by default when the system starts up and whilst it is in inspection
mode.
Prior to starting inspection the screen displays the Loma Systems company logo, including the system
model type. In the top right hand corner of the screen a small graphic of the system is displayed.
Tapping on the graphic then displays the Mimic screen.
When inspecting products the screen displays and provides instant access to a comprehensive set of
real-time information, depending on the X-ray inspection System model and also the currently logged
in user access level.
60
The User Interface
Screen Contents
The Main Run screen displays current product inspection information and provides navigation to other
screens for setting up inspection parameters.
The image window displays an image of the current pack generated by the system from the x-ray
energy values collected as the pack passed through the x-ray beam. Tapping anywhere on the screen
displays the Image Style screen which provides a number of options to select how the image of the
current pack is displayed.
The left hand side of the screen displays product inspection information, provides a start / stop button
and also provides navigation to other screens, depending on your access level. These are listed and
described below.
This image is only displayed if a PVS Test is required. Tapping on the image will
display the X-ray Set tab of the Diagnostics screen.
This image is displayed when x-rays are being generated. Tapping on the image
will display the X-ray Set tab of the Diagnostics screen.
This image is displayed when x-rays are NOT being generated. Tapping on the
image will display the X-ray Set tab of the Diagnostics screen.
This image is displayed when the conveyor is running and the direction of travel
selected is RIGHT TO LEFT. Tapping on the image will display the X-ray Set tab
of the Diagnostics screen.
This image is displayed when the conveyor is NOT running and the direction of
travel selected is RIGHT TO LEFT. Tapping on the image will display the X-ray
Set tab of the Diagnostics screen.
This image is displayed when the conveyor is running and the direction of travel
selected is LEFT TO RIGHT. Tapping on the image will display the X-ray Set tab
of the Diagnostics screen.
This image is displayed when the conveyor is NOT running and the direction of
travel selected is LEFT TO RIGHT. Tapping on the image will display the X-ray
Set tab of the Diagnostics screen.
61
The User Interface
This image is displayed if a pack passes inspection. Tapping on this image will
display the Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen.
This image is displayed if a pack fails inspection. Tapping on this image will also
display the Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen so that you may check
which of the enabled inspection tools the pack failed against. You can then
investigate further to establish exactly why the failure occurred.
In this area, the green number indicates the number of packs that have passed
inspection, the red number indicates the number of packs that have failed and
been rejected and the black number indicates the total number of packs
inspected.
Tapping anywhere in the area will display the Totals tab of the Statistics screen
so that you may review these figures in more detail, particularly to see why packs
have been rejected.
This area displays the name and access level for the currently logged in user.
Tapping anywhere in the area will display the Access Level screen through which
you can either log off or select another user to log in as.
Tapping on this button displays the Product Menus screen through which you can
select a product to run, add a new product, edit an existing products settings,
delete a product and export or import a products set-up information.
This button is displayed if the system has not been started. Tapping on the button
starts the inspection process, provided the conveyor is operating. If the conveyor
is not operating then a screen prompt is displayed to start the conveyor. A
progress bar is then displayed until the conveyor has reached operating speed, at
which point x-rays will start to be generated.
This button is displayed if the system has been started. Tapping on the button
stops the inspection process and the generation of x-rays.
Tapping on this button displays the GoTo screen which displays a number of
option buttons which provide access to all product and system settings.
The current system time is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
62
The User Interface
GoTo
Purpose
The GoTo screen is displayed by tapping on the 'GoTo' button in the Main Run or Mimic screen.
It displays a number of option buttons, depending on your access level, that enable you to navigate to
other screens for configuring all system and product settings.
Screen Contents
The screen contains the following items:
Tapping on this option button displays the Access Level screen which
enables you to log in as another user / access level. You will be
prompted to enter a valid password in a pop-up screen.
Tapping on this option button displays the Product Settings screen

through which you may set up and configure the currently running
product parameters.
Tapping on this option button displays the System Settings screen

through which a number of advanced system settings may be
configured. It is therefore recommended that these settings are not
modified except by an authorised person.
Tapping on this option button displays the Statistics screen which

provides a comprehensive set of statistical inspection data for the
currently running product.
Tapping on this option button displays the Diagnostics screen which

provides access to a number of tools to aid inspection troubleshooting.
This option button is displayed if the system is fitted with a reject

device and specifically a reject bin which is locked and unlocked
through the system software. The button legend toggles between
'Unlock Bin' and 'Lock Bin'. Tapping on the button therefore either
locks or unlocks the bin.
Tapping on this button will perform a controlled shut down of the

system.
63
The User Interface
This option button is displayed when a PV Test is due. Tapping on the

button whilst inspecting a product will manually initiate a PV Test and
display the Contaminant Detection Test screen. Ensure that you have
sample test packs containing the types and sizes of contaminants to
be used, ready and available before starting the test.
Tapping on this button enables the reject device during a PV Test so

that the sample pack containing the contaminant that is being used for
the test will be rejected.
Tapping on this button disables the reject device during a PV Test so

that the sample pack containing the contaminant that is being used for
the test will not be rejected.
This button is displayed if the Batch Reports and Trace Codes options
have been enabled in the I/O Rejects tab of the Product Settings
screen. Tapping on the screen displays the pop-up keyboard so that
you can enter a trace code for the batch.
Access Level
Purpose
The Access Level screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Access Level' option button in the GoTo
screen.
The screen provides options for logging into the system at a different level so that you may access
features and functions that are not available to you at your current access level and also for logging
out of the system.
Screen Contents
The Access Level screen provides the following options for selecting a new access level:
Current User (area) - This area displays the name and access level for the user selected in
the User table below.
User (table) - This table contains a list of users, including their access level. The current user
will be selected.
To select another user , tap on its row in the table. A pop-up password screen will be displayed
for you to enter the password for the selected user / access level.
64
The User Interface
To enter a password, tap on the applicable number buttons and then tap on the OK button.
OK (button) - Once you have selected the required access level and entered the appropriate
password, tapping on the OK button in the password screen will save the changes and close
the Access Level screen. You will now be logged into the system at the new level.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button in the password screen closes the Access Level
screen without saving any changes.
Log Off (button) - Tapping on this button logs you out of the system. The system access level
will be set to None - (Level 0).
Product Settings
Purpose
The Product Settings screen is displayed by tapping on the Product Settings button in the GoTo
screen.
Before a product can be inspected a number of basic details and parameters for the product must be
entered into the Product Settings screen which are then used by the system software to control how
the product is inspected.
Great care should therefore be taken to ensure that the correct details are entered and selections
made as they will directly affect how the system will inspect the product.
Screen Contents
The Product Settings screen contains the four tabbed panes listed below, which together enable all
settings for a product to be configured.
General
Scan Settings
Inspection
I/O (Rejects)
In addition, the following buttons are displayed, regardless of which tabbed pane is selected:
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Product Settings screen without saving
any changes.
Apply (button) - Tapping on this button saves and applies any changes made in the Product
Settings screen and then closes it.
65
The User Interface
General
The General tab of the Product Settings screen displays basic details for the currently running product
which may then be edited if required. A product learn process may also be initiated through this tab.
The General tab provides the following items:

Identification (area) - This area displays the following basic information for the currently
running product:
o Name (field) - Displays the product name.
Edit (button) - Tapping on this button displays a pop-up keyboard through which you
may then edit the product name if required.
o Number (field) - Displays the unique number for the product. You can edit the number by
tapping in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then entering the required
number. Note that you cannot enter a number that already exists.
o Barcode (field) - Displays the product barcode if applicable. You can edit the barcode by
tapping in the field to display a pop-up keyboard and then entering the required code. The
barcode must be 8 characters long and unique.
Size (area) - This area displays the following pack size information for the currently running
product:
o Pack Length (mm) (field) - Displays the product pack length. You can edit the value by
tapping in the field to display a numeric keypad and then entering the required length.
o Pack Threshold (field) - This is the minimum image greyscale value used to determine
when a new pack enters the x-ray beam. This should usually be set to 220 which is
sufficient for most products but the value can be adjusted up or down as necessary by
tapping in the field to display the pop-up numeric keypad and setting a value between a
minimum of 80 and a maximum of 254.
For example, if the screen is constantly capturing a white image then the threshold may be
set too high or the conveyor belt may need to be cleaned.
Alternatively if the system is not grabbing images of the pack then the threshold may be
set too low or the product / system may need to be re-calibrated.
66
The User Interface
o easure (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Measure screen which contains a
ruler that may be used to roughly measure the pack length. You should increase the length
entered in the Pack Length field by around 10% to allow for pack skew/presentation
problems.
Advanced (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Advanced Product Settings screen
through which you can select the flow mode and inspection options that you wish to use and
also set up lane widths when using dual lanes for inspecting two products in parallel.
Bounded Flow mode is used where products are presented individually for inspection in
packaging, whereas Mass Flow mode is used where products are randomly presented for
inspection across the conveyor belt.
Learn Product (button) - Tapping on this button displays a pop-up dialog to confirm that you
wish to initiate a new product learn process, overwriting the existing product parameters.
Tapping on the 'Yes' option displays the Learn Product Settings screen.
Set Defaults (button) - Tapping on this button displays the pop-up Set Defaults dialog which
you may use to quickly set the current product parameters back to their default values if
required.
67
The User Interface
Advanced Product Settings
Purpose
The Advanced Product Settings screen is displayed by tapping on the Advanced button in the
General tab of the Product Settings screen.
The screen is used to select the inspection options for the product and also set up the lanes where
required.
Screen Contents
The screen consists of the following two tabbed panes through which inspection options and lanes
may be selected and setup:
Inspection Options
The Inspection Options pane provides the following items:

Flow Mode (area) - The Flow Mode sets the way in which a product passes through the
system. This area provides the following:
o Flow Mode (drop down list) - Tap on the field to display the available options for selection.
Bounded - This is the default option which should be selected for products that are
presented to the system and pass through it in a regular and ordered way. All
inspection options are available for selection with this option.
Mass Flow - This option should be selected for loose products are presented to and
pass through the system in a random way. The 'Fill Level' and 'Checkweigh' options are
not selectable for this option and also 'Object Checking' is limited to the 'Loose Objects'
option.
Inspection Options (area) - This area provides the following:
o Contaminants (area) - In this area a check box is provided for selecting / deselecting the
Contaminant Detection inspection option. The option is then provided in the Inspection tab
of the Product Settings screen for further configuration.
Contaminant Detection (option check box) - When this option is selected, all of the
Contaminants options will be available for selection and configuration in the Inspection
tab of the Product Settings screen for selection and configuration. The system will then
detect contaminants in products passing through the system.
o Product Integrity (area) In this area check boxes are provided for selecting the product
integrity inspection option. The selected options, which are listed below, are then provided
68
The User Interface
in the Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen so that they may be enabled and
configured for use.
Object Checking (option check box) - Select this option if you wish to detect objects
within the product such as individual stock cubes in a multi-pack.
Fill Level (option check box) - This inspection method is used to detect underfill or
overfill conditions for products such as packs of yoghurts where the pots should all be
filled to the same level.
Checkweigh (option check box) - This inspection method is used to check the weight
of each pack as it passes through the system with the objective of removing packs that
are over or underweight. Selecting this option and then enabling it in the Inspection tab
of the Product Settings screen then provides an additional 'Checkweigh' tab in the
Statistics screen.
Lanes
In general systems are supplied configured to use one lane that utilises the full width of the belt and
this is the default setting. But for applications where you wish to inspect multiple products at the same
time, the belt width can be shared between up to four lanes and inspection options set up individually
for each lane.
By default when multiple lanes are selected they share the belt width, but selecting the 'Custom'
options allows the width of up to three lanes to be adjusted. The fourth lane then takes up the
remaining belt width which must be a minimum width of 72mm.
Generally for multiple lane systems, product guides will be used on the infeed conveyor to ensure that
the products are separated adequately before passing through the x-ray cabinet.
It is important to note that when using multiple lanes, the belt speed and power settings
used by the system will be the same for all products.
The Lanes pane provides the following items for setting up a single or multiple lanes:
Settings [Bounded / Mass Flow] (area) - This area contains the items listed below. Note that
either the 'Bounded' or 'Mass Flow' will be displayed depending on the Flow Mode selected in
the Inspection Options pane.
o Lanes (drop down list) - Provides a list containing options of 1, 2, 3 or 4 for selection,
depending on the conveyor settings set up when the system was built.
o Lane Width (area) - This area is only enabled if multiple lanes have been selected from
the drop down list. It contains the following items for setting up the lane widths:
69
The User Interface
Default (option radio button) - When this option is selected the lanes share the belt
width equally and no further configuration is possible.
Custom (option radio button) - When this option is selected each of the lane widths can
be configured through a number of fields. the field.
For two lane systems a field is displayed for lane 1 which is set initially to half of the
available belt width. The width of lane 1 can then be adjusted if necessary by tapping in
the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and entering the required value. The width
of lane 2 then automatically adjusts to the remaining belt width.
For three lane systems fields are provided for adjusting the width of lanes 1 and 2.
For four lane systems fields are provided for adjusting the width of lanes 1, 2 and 3.
Lane 4 must have a minimum width of 72mm.
Learn Product Settings
Purpose
The Learn Product Settings screen is displayed by tapping on the Learn Product button in the General
tab of the Product Settings screen.
The screen is used to guide you through learning a product, providing on-screen prompts to pass
known good packs through the system so that it may automatically optimise the system settings for
inspecting the product.
Screen Contents
The screen displays instructions and status information which updates depending on the stage of the
learn process that has been reached.
Initial Stage
When the learn process is first started the screen displays the following:
Instructions (area) - This area advises you not to pass any product packs through the
system. An egg timer image is displayed to the left of the area.
Status (area) - This area provides various status messages as the system initializes.
After completing the initialization process the Set Product Parameters screen is displayed in which
you may enter basic product information and select some system options. tapping on the OK button
then closes the screen and resumes the learn process.
70
The User Interface
Learning Stage
Once the default product settings have been made in the Set Product Parameters screen, the values
and options selected are then used by the system to perform calibrations and set the required system
power levels. Once completed, the screen then displays the following:
Instructions (area) - This area advises you to pass sample packs now. The number of packs
that you will need to pass is set in the Set product Parameters screen. An arrow image is
displayed to the right of the area.
Status (area) - This area provides the status message 'Setting Calibration Power Levels'.
Add Time (button) - This button is displayed to the right of the Status area and the time in
seconds remaining for you to pass the first pack through the system is displayed next to it. The
default time provided is 20 seconds.
Tapping on the Add Time button increases the time remaining by 10 seconds each time, up to
a maximum of 99 seconds. This provides you with additional time to prepare and pass the
product pack through the system. The timer resets and starts counting down again from 20
seconds after each pack has been detected by the system.
Final Stage
Once the learn is complete this message is displayed in the Instructions area. Tap on the Exit button
to close the screen and display the main Run screen.
71
The User Interface
Set Product Parameters
Purpose
The Set Product Parameters screen is displayed automatically once the learn process has reached
the initialize stage in the Learn Product Settings screen.
The screen provides a number of options to be used by the system when learning the product.
Screen Contents
The screen contains the following options
Packs (field) - This field displays the number of packs to be used for the learn process. The
default number is 5. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which
you may set a number between a minimum of 3 and a maximum of 50.
Auto-Blanking (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided for you to select
whether you wish the system to automatically apply blanking around the product pack to
reduce the area to be inspected by the system. This may be manually set or updated after the
learn process through the Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen by selecting the Image
Processing > Blanking options.
Pack Length Manual (option radio button) - This option is selected by default and is used
when you wish to manually set the pack length. When the option is selected the Pack Length
field and the Measure button are both active.
Pack Length (mm) (field) - This field is active when the Manual option radio button option
selected. It displays the pack length in millimetres set for the product in the General tab of the
Product Settings screen. Tapping in the filed displays the pop-up numeric keypad through
which a new value may be set between a minimum of 20 and a maximum of 2400.
Measure (button) - This button is active when the Manual option radio button is selected.
Tapping on the button displays the Measure screen which contains a ruler that may be used to
roughly measure the pack length. You should increase the length entered in the Pack Length
field by around 10% to allow for pack skew/presentation problems.
Auto Set (option radio button) - Selecting this option means that the system will determine and
set the pack length from the product packs passed during the learn process. Note that this is
restricted to a maximum pack length of 750mm.
Pack Threshold (field) - This field displays the value set for the product in the General tab of
the Product Settings screen. The pack Threshold is the minimum image greyscale value used
to determine when a new pack enters the x-ray beam. This should usually be set to 220 which
is sufficient for most products but the value can be adjusted up or down as necessary by
72
The User Interface
tapping in the field to display the pop-up numeric keypad and setting a value between a
minimum of 80 and a maximum of 254.
Conveyor Speed (drop down list) - The conveyor speed selected for the product in the Scan
Settings tab of the Product Settings screen is initially displayed but the low, medium and high
conveyor speeds available in the system are displayed for selection in the drop down list.
Eco mode (drop down list) - Options of No (default) and Yes are provided for you to select
what power levels to be used by the system for calibration and inspection processes. This may
also be set in the Scan Settings tab of the Product Settings screen.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes and closes the screen. The Learn
Product Settings screen is displayed as the learn process continues through to completion.
Scan Settings
The Scan Settings tab of the Product Settings screen is used to set up the conveyor speed, the x-ray
power and the scan ratio to be used for inspecting the currently selected product.
The Scan Settings tab provides the following options:

Conveyor Speed (area) - This area contains the following items for setting the conveyor
speed and scan ratio:
o Conveyor Speed (drop down list) - Tapping in this field displays a list of conveyor speeds
for selection with options of three pre-set Low, Medium and High speeds in metres per
minute available.
Note that the X5c conveyor speed is fixed at a value between 10 and 50 m/min to meet
customer requirements during build. But the value may be adjusted by a Loma Engineer if
required.
o Advanced (button) - Tapping on this button pops up the Advanced Scan Settings screen
through which you can set the scan ratio and also use a calculator to display the speed
(m/min), pack pitch (mm) and rate (ppm) depending on values entered.
Profile (area) - This area displays a graph showing the x-ray beam energy values received by
the diodes and then processed in the form of greyscales, from 0 (black) to 255 (white). The
minimum and maximum values are displayed below the graph. The minimum value should be
in the range of 15 - 100. If it is too low then the X-ray power level should be raised and vice
versa.
Power (Area) - In this area you may select the X-ray power settings to be used by the system
for both product calibrations and inspection. For all options except the User option, the system
automatically selects default values based on the selected power option.
73
The User Interface
o Power (drop down list) - This list provides options of High, Medium, Low, Eco mode and
User for selection. The power is determined by the applied voltage and current.
Note that for the X5c only the Low and High options are provided for selection.
If the User option is selected, all values may be manually set by tapping in each field and
entering the required value in the pop-up numeric keypad.
If any other option is selected, default values are automatically set by the system and the
fields are not editable.
o Calibration kV (field) - This field displays the voltage applied to the X-ray tube during
product calibration.
o Inspection kV (field) - This field displays the voltage applied to the X-ray tube during
product inspection.
o Calibration mA (field) - This field displays the current passed through the filament inside
the X-ray tube during product calibration.
o Inspection mA (field) - This field displays the current passed through the filament inside
the X-ray tube during product inspection.
o Calibration Gain (drop down list) - This list provides options of Min, Low, Med, High and
Max for selection.
o Inspection Gain (drop down list) - This list provides options of Min, Low, Med, High and
Max for selection.
o Sensitivity (drop down list) - Sensitivity equates to the number of greyscale image values
per second captured as the product passes across the diode array. This is based on the
diode pitch used by the software. For the X5 and X5 SpaceSaver models this is 1.6mm for
low sensitivity and 0.4mm for high sensitivity. For the X5c model it is set to 0.8mm. The
actual number of greyscale image values captured is dependant on the conveyor belt
speed and the scan ratio selected at that speed.
Eco Mode Default Settings Low Power Default Settings
74
The User Interface
Medium Power Default Settings High Power Default Settings
Advanced Scan Settings
Purpose
The Advanced Scan Settings screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Advanced' button in the Scan
Settings tab of the Product Settings screen.
As a fixed conveyor speed is used on the X5c the screen contains different options to those provided
for the X5 Standard and SpaceSaver models so are described separately below.
X5 Standard / SpaceSaver Models
The screen provides options for setting the scan ratio to be used for the product, based on the speed
of the conveyor belt. A calculator tool is also provided to determine the rate (packs per minute), speed
(metres per minute) and pack pitch (millimetres), based on the current pack length and conveyor belt
speed.
Screen Contents
The screen contains two tabbed panes and two buttons which are described below.
Scan Ratio
This pane contains fields for setting the scan ratio percentage values for the Low, Medium and
High conveyor speeds. The conveyor speeds are set up during the product build to suit the
users application where known. Please contact your local Loma Service Centre if you need to
change them.
75
The User Interface
The percentage values are set to 100% by default but may be set within the following ranges:
o Low speed - Values from 5 to 250 may be entered.
o Medium speed - Values from 5 to 166 may be entered.
o High speed - Values from 5 to 124 may be entered.

Tapping in each field displays a pop-up numeric keypad for you to enter the required
percentage value.
As the values are changed, the number of diodes per second that will capture image density
values at each conveyor speed is displayed in an area below the Reset button.
A Reset button is also provided to set the percentages back to their default values if required.
Calculator
This pane provides the following items for calculating the optimum conveyor speed, pack pitch
and packs per minute rate based on the pack length and current conveyor speed:
Note that this is a CALCULATOR ONLY so any parameter values entered will not be set in the
system. They just display the affect of changing one parameter value on the other parameters.
o Product Settings (area) - This area displays the current pack length and conveyor speed
values. Minimum - Displays the minimum image density value captured.
o Calculator (area) - This area contains the following:
Setup (drop down list) - This list provides options of 'Rate', 'Speed' and 'Pack Pitch' for
selection. The available field for the option selected is automatically disabled as the
value is calculated by entering values into the enabled fields so cannot be manually
changed.
Speed (m/min) (field) - The conveyor speed selected in the Scan Settings pane is
displayed.
If the field is enabled the value may be manually updated by tapping in the field to
display a pop-up numeric keypad and entering the required value.
If the 'Speed' option has been selected in the 'Setup' drop down list the field will be
disabled. To calculate the value, tap in the 'Pack Pitch' and 'Rate' fields in turn to
display a pop-up numeric keypad and enter the required values. The Speed value will
then be updated.
76
The User Interface
Pack Pitch (mm) (field) - The currently selected pack pitch is displayed.
If the 'Pack Pitch' option has been selected in the 'Setup' drop down list the field will be
disabled. To calculate the value, tap in the 'Speed' and 'Rate' fields in turn to display a
pop-up numeric keypad and enter the required values. The Pack Pitch value will then
be updated.
Rate (ppm) (field) - The currently selected pack per minute rate is displayed.
If the 'Rate' option has been selected in the 'Setup' drop down list the field will be
disabled. To calculate the value, tap in the 'Speed' and 'Pack Pitch' fields in turn to
display a pop-up numeric keypad and enter the required values. The Rate value will
then be updated.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the screen without saving any changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes and closes the screen.
5c
X Model
For the X5c model the screen only provides the calculator tool to determine the rate (packs per
minute), speed (metres per minute) and pack pitch (millimetres), based on the current pack length
and conveyor belt speed.
Screen Contents
The screen displays the current pack length and conveyor speed and provides the following items for
calculating the optimum conveyor speed, pack pitch and packs per minute rate based on the pack
length and current conveyor speed:
Note that this is a CALCULATOR ONLY so any parameter values entered will not be set in the
system. They just display the affect of changing one parameter value on the other parameters.
Product Settings (area) - This area displays the current pack length and conveyor speed
values.
Calculator (area) - This area contains the following:
o Setup (drop down list) - This list provides options of 'Rate', 'Speed' and 'Pack Pitch' for
selection. The available field for the option selected is automatically disabled as the value
is calculated by entering values into the enabled fields so cannot be manually changed.
77
The User Interface
o Speed (m/min) (field) - The conveyor speed selected in the Scan Settings pane is
displayed.
If the field is enabled the value may be manually updated by tapping in the field to display
a pop-up numeric keypad and entering the required value.
If the 'Speed' option has been selected in the 'Setup' drop down list the field will be
disabled. To calculate the value, tap in the 'Pack Pitch' and 'Rate' fields in turn to display a
pop-up numeric keypad and enter the required values. The Speed value will then be
updated.
o Pack Pitch (mm) (field) - The currently selected pack pitch is displayed.
If the 'Pack Pitch' option has been selected in the 'Setup' drop down list the field will be
disabled. To calculate the value, tap in the 'Speed' and 'Rate' fields in turn to display a
pop-up numeric keypad and enter the required values. The Pack Pitch value will then be
updated.
o Rate (ppm) (field) - The currently selected pack per minute rate is displayed.
If the 'Rate' option has been selected in the 'Setup' drop down list the field will be disabled.
To calculate the value, tap in the 'Speed' and 'Pack Pitch' fields in turn to display a pop-up
numeric keypad and enter the required values. The Rate value will then be updated.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes and closes the screen.
Inspection
The Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen is used to set up the inspection methods to be
used, either individually or in combination, to identify nonconforming products so that they may be
removed from the production line. Selecting a method changes the options available in the screen
and these are described in the sections listed below.
Image Processing
Image processing is not an inspection method itself but, through the use of a number of tools,
helps you to set up the pack image captured by the system so that the inspection methods
used are focused on the product pack itself. This section includes information covering the
available image processing tools provided.
Contaminants
Detection of contaminants in an X-ray inspection system is basically achieved through
comparing each image pixel against a preset range of greyscale values. But the Loma X5 X-
Ray Inspection System offers a wide range of detection modes and tools that enable you to fine
tune this process by setting up multiple layers of inspection each focused on specific
contaminant attributes. This section provides descriptions of the available modes and tools.
Product Integrity
Product integrity inspection is used to check that the attributes of each product pack conform to
a standard and a number of tools are provided to specify the standard requirements. For
example, a product may need to be a certain width and length, within specified upper and lower
limits. A pack may need to contain a certain volume of product or the product itself may need to
contain a certain number of holes. As for contaminant inspection, you can set up multiple layers
78
The User Interface
of product integrity inspections that focus on specific product attributes. This section includes
descriptions of all available tools and options.
Image Processing
When the Image Processing option is selected in the Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen a
number of image processing tools are made available through selections displayed in the screen.
Generally Image Processing tools are used to ensure that the product image is being captured
correctly and that any inspection is concentrated on the product itself rather than areas around the
product.
The screen displays the following items:

Optimisation 'Edit' (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Image Optimisation screen
through which you may set the optimum image density thresholds to ensure that the full
product area is inspected.
Blanking 'Edit' (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Blanking screen which provides
controls for blanking out areas of the image that do not contain the product and do not
therefore need to be included in the inspection.
Analysis 'Threshold' (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Image Analysis screen
which provides controls for setting the minimum and maximum image density values to be
used by the system when inspecting the product.
Show Last Reject (option check box) - Tapping on this option to select it displays an image of
the last pack rejected by the system.
Image Optimisation
The Image Optimisation screen is displayed by tapping on the Optimisation 'Edit' button in the
Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen.
79
The User Interface
The Image Optimisation screen provides the following options:

Image (area) - This area displays the last product image captured by the system. It is
important that this image is representative of an acceptable product pack in all aspects so that
any image processing introduced to refine the inspection is valid.
Tapping anywhere in the image area displays the Image Style pop-up dialog shown above
which contains the following controls:
o Fit To Window (button) - This is the default selection. Tapping on the button automatically
sizes the image to fit within the image area.
o Zoom (button) - Tapping on this button initially doubles the size of the image as indicated
by the Zoom x X red text in the bottom left corner of the screen. As the image may no
longer be positioned centrally in the screen or even only partially displayed, you can move
the image up or down by tapping the bottom or top of the screen and left or right by
tapping the right or left of the screen.
80
The User Interface
(button) - Tapping on this button returns the image to its normal size.
(button) - Tapping on this button increases the zoom from the initial x 2 up to a
maximum of x 12, in steps of x 2.
(button) - This button is displayed once the zoom has been set to a minimum value
of x 4.Tapping on the button decreases the zoom by x 2 steps.
o Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Image Style dialog.
Optimisation (area) - This area contains the following:
o Gamma (field) Gamma is related to the way the detector data is transformed into the
image data:
Gamma equals 100 - This is the default setting, providing a linear transformation from
detector to image which means that both dark and light pixels receive the same priority.
Gamma greater than 100 (termed positive) Darker pixels are given greater priority
over lighter pixels. This is a very powerful way of zooming into the darker part of the
image without increasing x-ray power levels. This is very useful with dense products
such as a slab of meat.
Gamma less than 100 (termed negative) Lighter pixels are given greater priority over
darker pixels. Whilst this option is not often used, this can be very helpful with small
products such as a blister pack of pharmaceutical pills.
The gamma value therefore effectively controls the image 'brightness'. In most cases you
should tap on the Auto Set button to allow the machine to select the appropriate Gamma
value for a product. To change the value manually, tap in the field to display a number of
controls, including a slider and buttons, for setting the gamma value from a range of 60 up
to 500.
81
The User Interface
o Lower Range % (field) Range also relates to the way the detector data is transformed
into the image data. Unlike Gamma which changes the priority of lighter / darker pixels,
Range actually removes lighter pixels from the image to achieve greater sensitivity in the
darker porton of the pproduct
In most cases you should tap on the Auto Set button to allow the machine to select the
appropriate Lower and Higher Range values for a product. To change the value manually,
tap in the field to display a number of controls, including a slider and buttons, for setting
the Lower range percentage value from a range of 0 up to 50.
o Upper Range % (field) - Tapping in the field displays a number of controls, including a
slider and buttons, for setting the Upper range percentage value from a range of 20 up to
120.
82
The User Interface
o Target (non-editable field) Displays the target value.
o Auto Set (button) - Tapping on this button allows the system to automatically set the
optimum Gamma, Lower Range % and Upper Range % values for the image.
o Reset (button) - Tapping on this button resets the Gamma, Lower Range % and Upper
Range % values to their default values.
Advanced (area) - This area contains the following:
o Histogram (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Histogram screen which shows a
histogram of the current image.
o Profile (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Profile screen which shows the
current image overlaid with x and y axis scan lines. Image density values in horizontal and
vertical modes where the scan line intersect are displayed graphically at the bottom of the
screen. Controls are also provided to move the scan lines intersection point to a desired
position on the image to review the image density details at that position.
Results (area) - This area displays the processing time taken to analyse the displayed image
using the tool and some tool specific statistics such as the number of contaminants found.
Green / Red boxes show whether the current image has passed or failed the isnpection tool.
Grab New (button) - This button is enabled when the system is running and generating X-rays.
Tapping on the button captures an image as the next pack passes through the system so that
this can be used to check that the image optimisation has been set up correctly or to replace
the current image if it is not representative of a standard good pack.
Live Test (button) - This button is enabled when the system is running and generating X-rays.
Tapping on the button displays live inspection data as packs are passed through the system.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Image Optimisation screen without saving
any changes made in the screen. The Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen is
displayed.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Image Optimisation
screen and then closes the screen. The Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen is
displayed.
83
The User Interface
Histogram
Purpose
The Histogram screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Histogram' button in the Image Optimisation
screen. The screen provides a visual representation of the image values, including statistical data, so
that you can make informed changes to the image optimisation and preview them before saving.
Screen Contents
The Histogram screen provides the following options:
Histogram (area) - This area displays a histogram of the captured image displayed in the
Image Optimisation screen. The x-axis displays the image density / pixel greyscale value
ranging from 0 to 255. The y-axis displays a pixel count at each image density and auto scales
to fit the display. The screen updates as products pass through the system.
A blue vertical line on the histogram shows the image density value / largest pixel count.
A yellow vertical line shows the pack threshold value.
Statistics (area) - This area displays the following statistics for the captured image:
o Minimum - Displays the minimum image density value captured.
o Maximum - Displays the maximum image density value captured.
o Mean - Displays the Mean or average image density value captured.
o Standard Deviation - Displays the calculated image density standard deviation.
o Median - Displays the middle image density value from the number of values captured.
o Mode - Displays the image density value repeated most often.
o Area - Displays the image area calculated using the captured width and length data.
o Volume - Displays the image volume calculated from the captured width, length and
height data.
Display (area) - This area contains a number of options which change the histogram and
statistical data displayed:
84
The User Interface
o Identification (option check box) - Selecting this option includes an additional green
vertical line on the histogram, indicating the Median image density value. The Logarithm
and either the Count or Average options may also be selected with this option.
o Logarithm (option check box) - Selecting this option changes the histogram to display the
logarithmic values of the data. The Identification and either the Count or Average options
may also be selected with this option.
o Count (option check box) - Selecting this option displays the pixel count in brackets
against the Minimum, Maximum, Mean, Median and Mode image density values in the
'Statistics' area. The Identification and Logarithm options may also be selected with this
option.
85
The User Interface
o Average (option check box) - Selecting this option displays average values in brackets
against each of the image density values included in the 'Statistics' area. The identification
and Logarithm options may also be selected with this option.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Histogram screen. The Image Optimisation
screen is then displayed. Note that any selections made are lost when the screen closes.
Profile
Purpose
The Profile screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Profile' button in the Image Optimisation screen.
The screen provides an image of the current product overlaid with x and y axis scan lines. Image
density values in horizontal and vertical modes where the scan lines intersect are displayed
graphically at the bottom of the screen.
Controls are also provided to move the scan lines intersection point to a desired position on the image
to review the image density details at that position.
The screen may be used to inspect the image in detail to review the density levels captured across
the product to ensure that the optimisation settings are correct.
86
The User Interface
Screen Contents
The Profile screen provides the following options:
Profile (area) - This area provides an image of the current product overlaid with x and y axis
scan lines. Image density values in horizontal and vertical modes where the scan line intersect
are displayed graphically at the bottom of the screen and their values are displayed in the
'Scan Line' and 'Information' areas on the right hand side of the screen.
You can also change the position of the scan lines intersect point by tapping on the image. The
intersect point will automatically move to that position.
Graphs (area) - This area displays graphs of the image density values in both horizontal and
vertical modes. Tapping on either graph displays it in full, closing the other graph. Tapping on
the graph again resets the screen to display both graphs again.
Scan Line (area) - This area contains the following controls which allow you to move the scan
lines intersect point to another position on the image.
o Directional Arrow (buttons) - Tapping on the buttons moves the scan lines intersect point
in the appropriate direction on the image. The X and Y image density and 8-bit values at
the intersect point are displayed and will update as it changes.
o Max (button) - When the screen is first displayed the scan lines intersect point will be
positioned where the image density is at its darkest (lowest) value in both planes. This
would generally indicate the position of a contaminant within the product.
Tapping on the Max button will automatically move the scan lines intersect point to where
the image density is at its next darkest (lowest) value in both planes. Each time you then
tap on the button the intersect point will move it to the next lowest value.
Information (area) - This area displays the following information:
o Product Max - Displays the maximum image density value captured.
o Horizontal Max - Displays the maximum image density value captured along the current
position of the horizontal scan line on the image.
o Vertical Max - Displays the maximum image density value captured along the current
position of the vertical scan line on the image.
OK (button) tapping on this button closes the Profile screen. The Image Optimisation screen is
then displayed. Note that any selections made are lost when the screen closes.
87
The User Interface
Blanking
Purpose
The Blanking screen is displayed by tapping on the Blanking 'Edit' button in the Inspection tab of the
Product Settings screen.
The screen provides controls for blanking out areas of the image that do not contain the product and
do not therefore need to be included in the inspection.
Screen Contents
The Blanking screen provides the following options:
Blanking Image (area) - This area displays an image of the current product. Areas of the
image can be blanked out, effectively removing them from the inspection, by using a number
of controls provided in the 'Blanking' area. The 'blanked' areas are shown in blue and would
generally be set to fill any blank areas of the image around the product.
Care however should be taken to allow for pack skew when positioning the blanking to ensure
that part of the product is not blanked if it is poorly presented.
88
The User Interface
Blanking (area) - This area contains the following controls for creating blanked areas of the
product image to remove them from inspection:
o Left (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider to the right along the scale. A blue blanking
area will appear on the left side of the image which will increase as the slider is moved
further to the right and decrease as the slider is moved back to the left.
89
The User Interface
The value displayed in the 'Left' field will be updated automatically to correspond to the
slider position on the scale.
o Left (field) - Tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then enter a value for
the area to be blanked, shown in blue, on the left side of the image.
The slider control position will be updated automatically to correspond to the value entered
in the field.
o Right (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider to the left along the scale. A blue
blanking area will appear on the right side of the image which will increase as the slider is
moved further to the left and decrease as the slider is moved back to the right.
The value displayed in the 'Right' field will be updated automatically to correspond to the
o Right (field) - Tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then enter a value
for the area to be blanked, shown in blue, on the right side of the image.
in the field.
o Top (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider down the scale. A blue blanking area will
appear at the top of the image which will increase as the slider is moved further down and
decrease as the slider is moved back up.
The value displayed in the 'Top' field will be updated automatically to correspond to the
o Top (field) - Tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then enter a value for
the area to be blanked, shown in blue, at the top of the image.
n the field.
o Bottom (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up the scale. A blue blanking area will
appear at the bottom of the image which will increase as the slider is moved further up and
decrease as the slider is moved back down.
The value displayed in the 'Bottom' field will be updated automatically to correspond to the
o Bottom (field) - Tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then enter a value
for the area to be blanked, shown in blue, at the bottom of the image.
in the field.
Reset (button) - Tapping on this button resets the Blanking control values back to their default
values.
using the tool and some tool specific statistics. Green / Red boxes show whether the current
image has passed or failed the isnpection tool.
Live Test / Stop Test (button) - This button is enabled when the system is running and
generating X-rays.
90
The User Interface
Tapping on the button when it is displaying 'Live Test' will allow you to carry out a test
inspection against any packs passed through the system to confirm that 'good' packs are
passed and 'bad' packs rejected. The button legend will toggle to Stop Test'.
Tapping on the button when it is displaying 'Stop Test' will stop the test. The button legend will
toggle to Live Test'.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Blanking screen without saving any
changes made in the screen. The Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen is displayed.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Blanking screen and
then closes the screen. The Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen is displayed.
Image Analysis
Purpose
The Image Analysis screen is displayed by tapping on the Analysis 'Threshold' button in the
The screen provides controls for setting the minimum and maximum image density values to be used
by the system when inspecting the product. Effectively, image pixels whose values fall outside of
these limits are ignored and not included in the image or image data.
PIC REQ'D
Screen Contents
The Image Analysis screen provides the following options:
Image (area) - This area displays an image of the current product. Through a number of
controls provided in the 'Threshold' area, the maximum and minimum image density values
can be updated which affects the displayed image by blanking out pixels that fall outside of
these upper and lower limits. The 'blanked' pixels are shown in blue.
91
The User Interface
92
The User Interface
Threshold (area) - This area contains the following controls for setting the image density
threshold values:
o Lower (field) - This field displays the current lower threshold value which defaults to 30.
Tapping in the field provides a set of controls for editing the threshold value.
The following controls are provided:
Threshold (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to increase
or reduce the lower threshold value. The slider is initially set to the default value of 30
but this can be reduced down to zero or up to a maximum of 254.
As you increase the lower threshold some pixel image density values will fall below the
threshold and turn purple in colour, indicating that they will no longer be included in the
image and image data. Reducing the lower threshold value may include additional
pixels as their density values fall above the threshold.
Threshold (field) - This field displays the current lower threshold value which may be
edited in the two ways described below.
Tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then enter a new threshold
value.
Tap on the + and - buttons provided to increase or decrease the threshold value as
required.
For both of the above methods, the slider control position will be updated automatically
to correspond to the value entered in the field.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button returns the Image Analysis screen to its
normal status without saving any lower threshold value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the lower threshold
value and returns the Image Analysis screen to its normal status.
The image will be updated, with any pixels whose image density values now fall below
the lower threshold will not be displayed.
o Upper (field) - This field displays the current upper threshold value which defaults to 255.
93
The User Interface
or reduce the upper threshold value. The slider is initially set to the default maximum
value of 255 but this can be reduced down to zero.
As you reduce the upper threshold some pixel image density values will fall above the
threshold and turn green in colour, indicating that they will no longer be included in the
image and image data.
Threshold (field) - This field displays the current upper threshold value which may be
value.
required.
normal status without saving any upper threshold value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the upper threshold
The image will be updated and any pixels whose image density values are now above
the upper threshold will not be displayed.
o Erosion (%) (field) - Once the upper and lower threshold values have been set and the
product image updated to preclude any pixels that fall outside of these limits, you can use
this control to adjust the upper and lower threshold values at the same time to restore
some of the pixels to the image.
94
The User Interface
Erosion (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to increase or
reduce the upper threshold value. The slider is initially set to the default maximum
value of 100 where no pixels have been restored, but this can be reduced down to
zero.
As you reduce the erosion value some pixels will start to be restored in the image
density values will fall above the threshold and turn green in colour, indicating that they
will no longer be included in the image and image data.
Threshold (field) - This field displays the current upper threshold value which may be
value.
required.
normal status without saving any upper threshold value changes.
generating X-rays.
95
The User Interface
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Blanking screen without saving any
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Blanking screen and
Contaminants
This inspection method is selected by default, provided the 'Contaminant Detection' option is selected
in the Inspection Options tab of the Advanced Product Settings screen.
A number of tools are provided for detecting contaminants in products which are described in the
sections listed below. The tools may be used individually or in multiples to provide a comprehensive
inspection across a range of product parameters and attributes.
Masking
Masking provides a set of tools for blanking areas of the product which need to be ignored by
the system as they may cause false triggering and interfere with the detection of contaminants
within the product itself. Tools are provided for blanking the edges of products such as a boxes,
jars and cans and also for blanking specific areas within the product pack and these are
described in this section.
Two tools are provided for detecting contaminants and these are described in this section. The
'Basic' tool provides several inspection modes that can use fixed image density thresholds or
automatically follow the product profile to detect contaminants. The 'Explorer' tool studies the
texture of the product to look for sudden changes in image density to identify contaminants.
The Contaminants area within the Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen contains the
following:
Masking (area) - This area contains the following:
96
The User Interface
o Box Remover (option check box) - Tapping on this option enables the Box Remover
feature and the button to access the Box Remover screen.
o Box Remover (button) - This button has the following four states:
OFF - When in this state the button is coloured grey, indicating that the Box Remover
option has not been selected.
PASS - When in this state the button is coloured green, indicating that the Box
Remover option is selected and that the last product passed through the system
passed inspection against the settings made in the Box Remover screen. Tap on the
button to display this screen to configure the Box Remover settings.
FAIL - When in this state the button is coloured red, indication that the Box Remover
option is selected and that the last product passed through the system failed inspection
against the settings made in the Box Remover screen. Tap on the button to display this
screen to review where the product pack failed inspection and adjust the settings as
required.
o Mask (option check box) - Tapping on this option enables the Masking feature and the
button to access the Masking screen.
o Mask (button) - This button has the following three states:
OFF - When in this state the button is coloured grey, indicating that the Masking option
has not been selected.
PASS - When in this state the button is coloured green, indicating that the Masking
option is selected and that the last product passed through the system passed
inspection against the settings made in the Masking screen. Tap on the button to
display this screen to configure the Masking settings.
FAIL - When in this state the button is coloured red, indication that the Masking option
is selected and that the last product passed through the system failed inspection
against the settings made in the Masking screen. Tap on the button to display this
required.
Contaminant Detection (area) - This area contains the following:
o Show Margin (option check box) - Tapping on this option updates the legends displayed
on the Basic 1, Basic 2, Explorer 1 and Explorer 2 button to display the image density
threshold value captured from the last pack inspected.
o Basic 1 (option check box) - Tapping on this option enables the Basic 1 feature and the
button to access the Basic 1 screen. For most contaminant applications you should always
enable this tool.
o Basic 1 (button) - This button has the following three states:
OFF - When in this state the button is coloured grey, indicating that the Basic 1 option
PASS - When in this state the button is coloured green, indicating that the Basic 1
inspection against the settings made in the Basic 1 screen. Tap on the button to display
this screen to configure the Basic 1 settings.
When the 'Show Margin' option is selected the button displays the image density
threshold value captured from the last pack inspected rather than displaying 'PASS'.
97
The User Interface
FAIL - When in this state the button is coloured red, indication that the Basic 1 option is
selected and that the last product passed through the system failed inspection against
the settings made in the Basic 1 screen. Tap on the button to display this screen to
review where the product pack failed inspection and adjust the settings as required.
threshold value captured from the last pack inspected rather than displaying 'FAIL'.
o Basic 2 (option check box) - Tapping on this option enables the Basic 2 feature and the
button to access the Basic 2 screen.
o Basic 2 (button) - This button has the following three states:
OFF - When in this state the button is coloured grey, indicating that the Basic 2 option
PASS - When in this state the button is coloured green, indicating that the Basic 2
inspection against the settings made in the Basic 2 screen. Tap on the button to display
this screen to configure the Basic 2 settings.
FAIL - When in this state the button is coloured red, indication that the Basic 2 option is
selected and that the last product passed through the system failed inspection against
the settings made in the Basic 2 screen. Tap on the button to display this screen to
review where the product pack failed inspection and adjust the settings as required.
o Explorer 1 (option check box) - Tapping on this option enables the Explorer 1 feature and
the button to access the Explorer 1 screen.
o Explorer 1 (button) - This button has the following three states:
OFF - When in this state the button is coloured grey, indicating that the Explorer 1
PASS - When in this state the button is coloured green, indicating that the Explorer 1
inspection against the settings made in the Explorer 1 screen. Tap on the button to
display this screen to configure the Explorer 1 settings.
FAIL - When in this state the button is coloured red, indication that the Explorer 1
against the settings made in the Explorer 1 screen. Tap on the button to display this
required.
o Explorer 2 (option check box) - Tapping on this option enables the Explorer 2 feature and
the button to access the Explorer 2 screen.
o Explorer 2 (button) - This button has the following three states:
98
The User Interface
OFF - When in this state the button is coloured grey, indicating that the Explorer 2
PASS - When in this state the button is coloured green, indicating that the Explorer 2
inspection against the settings made in the Explorer 2 screen. Tap on the button to
display this screen to configure the Explorer 2 settings.
FAIL - When in this state the button is coloured red, indication that the Explorer 2
against the settings made in the Explorer 2 screen. Tap on the button to display this
required.
the last pack rejected by the system.
Mask
Masking is a blanking tool which may be used to aid the other contaminant inspection methods by
applying a mask to an area of the product which effectively tells the system to ignore detection in that
area.
This is useful for removing heavy visible product edges or dense objects contained in the product
without having to reduce the overall system detection sensitivity.
Two excellent examples of using masking are to firstly to remove the 'scavenger' which is placed in
fresh meat packs to absorb oxygen within the packs and keep the contents fresh and secondly to
mask a 'give-away' toy inserted into food products at Christmas time.
Another example is a product packed in a container that has a dense edge. As the edge appears
denser than the product, you would have to reduce the detection sensitivity to ignore the edge which
could result in a contaminant in the actual product not being detected. The Box Remover tool is
provided to specifically address this common issue.
The two masking tools listed and described below are provided.
Box Remover
Mask
Box Remover
Purpose
The Box Remover screen is displayed by tapping on the Box Remover button in the Inspection tab of
the Product Settings screen.
The screen provides controls for blanking out the edges of a packing box or container around the
image that does not need to be included in the inspection. It is more suited to this purpose than the
Masking or Blanking tools.
Screen Contents
The Box Remover screen provides the following options:
Box Remover Image (area) - This area displays an image of the last pack inspected. Areas of
the image can be blanked out, effectively removing them from the inspection, by using a
number of controls provided in the 'Box Settings' area. The 'blanked' areas are shown in blue
and would generally be set to fill any blank areas of the image around the product.
99
The User Interface
100
The User Interface
o 3D (button) - Tapping on this button displays the image in 3D. You can rotate the image
using the scroll bars to display the image from different perspectives.
(button) - Tapping on this button returns the image to the 'Fit To Window' option.
Box Settings (area) - This area contains a number of controls based on whether the 'Product'
or 'Linear' coverage option is selected in the Advanced Box Remover screen. The controls
available for both options are described below.
Product
When the Product coverage option is selected in the Advanced Box Remover screen the
following controls are provided for creating the box blanking area on the product image to
remove it from inspection:
101
The User Interface
o Pack Threshold (field) - Tapping in this field provides the following controls for adjusting
the pack image density threshold, which is set in conjunction with the Box Threshold to
ensure that there is sufficient difference to identify the box from the product but still identify
any contaminants in the product.
Pack Threshold (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the pack threshold value.
As you reduce the threshold, some pixel image density values will be above the
threshold and turn blue in colour, indicating that they will no longer be included in the
Pack Threshold (field) - This field displays the current pack threshold value which may
be edited in the two ways described below.
value.
required.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button returns the Box Remover screen to its normal
status without saving any pack threshold value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the pack threshold
value and returns the Box Remover screen to its normal status.
the pack threshold will not be displayed.
o Box Threshold (field) - Tapping in this field provides the following controls for adjusting
the box image density threshold, which is set in conjunction with the Pack Threshold to
Box Threshold (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the box threshold value.
As you reduce the threshold, some pixels will change from blue to their normal colour,
indicating that they will be included in the image and image data.
Box Threshold (field) - This field displays the current pack threshold value which may
value.
required.
status without saving any box threshold value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the box threshold
the box threshold will not be displayed.
102
The User Interface
o Box Width (field) - Tapping in this field provides the following controls for adjusting the
width thickness of the box blanking around the perimeter of the image:
Box Width (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to increase
or reduce the width thickness of the box blanking area around the image. The pixels
that will be blanked are coloured blue.
Box Width (field) - This field displays the box width thickness value which may be
Tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then enter a new width
thickness value.
Tap on the + and - buttons provided to increase or decrease the width thickness value
as required.
status without saving any box width thickness value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the box width
thickness value and returns the Box Remover screen to its normal status.
o Box Length (field) - Tapping in this field provides the following controls for adjusting the
length thickness of the box blanking around the perimeter of the image:
Box Length (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the length thickness of the box blanking area around the image. The
pixels that will be blanked are coloured blue.
Box Length (field) - This field displays the box length thickness value which may be
Tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then enter a new length
thickness value.
Tap on the + and - buttons provided to increase or decrease the length thickness value
as required.
status without saving any box length thickness value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the box length
o Erosion (%) (field) - Tapping in this field provides the following controls for adjusting the
image density of the pixels included in the box blanking area to ensure that the box is
removed from inspection but any contaminants in the product will be detected.
Erosion (%) (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the erosion % applied to the box blanking area around the image.
The pixels that will be blanked are coloured blue.
Erosion (%) (field) - This field displays the box erosion % value which may be edited in
the two ways described below.
Tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then enter a new erosion %
value.
103
The User Interface
Tap on the + and - buttons provided to increase or decrease the erosion % value as
required.
status without saving any erosion % value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the erosion % value
and returns the Box Remover screen to its normal status.
Linear
When the Linear coverage option is selected in the Advanced Box Remover screen the
following controls are provided for creating the box blanking area on the product image to
remove it from inspection:
o Pack Threshold (field) - Tapping in this field provides the following controls for adjusting
the pack image density threshold, which is set in conjunction with the Box Threshold to
Pack Threshold (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the pack threshold value.
Pack Threshold (field) - This field displays the current pack threshold value which may
value.
required.
104
The User Interface
the pack threshold will not be displayed.
o Box Width (fields) - Tapping in either the 'Left' or 'Right' field provides the following
controls for adjusting the width thickness of the box blanking area on the 'Left' or 'Right'
side of the image:
Box Width (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to increase
or reduce the width thickness of the box blanking area on the 'Left' or 'Right' side of the
image. The pixels that will be blanked are coloured blue.
Box Width (field) - This field displays the box width thickness value which may be
Tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then enter a new width
thickness value.
Tap on the + and - buttons provided to increase or decrease the width thickness value
as required.
status without saving any box width thickness value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the box width
o Box Length (fields) - Tapping in either the 'Top' or 'Bottom' field provides the following
controls for adjusting the length thickness of the box blanking at the 'Top' or 'Bottom' of the
image:
Box Length (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the length thickness of the box blanking area at the 'Top' or 'Bottom'
of the image. The pixels that will be blanked are coloured blue.
Box Length (field) - This field displays the box length thickness value which may be
Tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then enter a new length
thickness value.
Tap on the + and - buttons provided to increase or decrease the length thickness value
as required.
status without saving any box length thickness value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the box length
o Linear Settings (option check boxes) - Option check boxes are provided for enabling the
controls for adjusting the thickness of the box blanking area at the Top and Bottom and on
the Left and Right hand sides of the image.
Advanced (area) - This area contains the following controls for configuring the Box Remover
settings:
105
The User Interface
o Settings (button) - Tapping in this button displays the Advanced Box Remover screen
which provides options for creating the box blanking area around the product image.
this can be used to check that the box blanking area has been set up correctly or to replace
generating X-rays.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Box Remover screen without saving any
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Box Remover screen
and then closes the screen. The Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen is displayed.
Advanced Box Remover

Purpose
The Advanced Box Remover screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Settings' button in the Box
Remover screen.
The screen provides two options for setting how the box blanking area is created in the product
image, based on the product type and packaging used.
The first method is 'Product' which enables you to set image density thresholds for the box and pack
and define the box width and length values.
The second method is 'Linear' which overlays a rectangular box over the product image. Controls are
provided to enable you to adjust the thickness of the box length and width. This method suits
inspection of products that are presented for inspection in a uniform way and which are not subject to
skewing.
The 'Linear' method also enables you to set up a grid of rows and columns over the product image
and then adjust their widths to suit the product. So for example you could set up two rows and five
columns for a pack containing ten chocolates to blank out the box and also any internal packaging
between each chocolate.
Screen Contents
The screen contains the controls, tabbed panes and buttons described below.
Current Coverage (field) - This non-editable field displays the coverage option currently
selected, either 'Product' or 'Linear'.
Overlay (Inspection) (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the reject image
displayed in the Main Run screen will show the box remover overlay on the image.
Product (tabbed pane)
106
The User Interface
This tabbed pane contains the following items for setting how the box blanking area is set up:
o Product Coverage (area) - This area displays 'Active' if the 'Product Coverage' option has
been enabled or includes an 'Enabled' button if the 'Linear Coverage' option is currently
enabled. Tap on the button to enable the 'Product Coverage' option.
o Product Settings (area) - This area contains the following:
Mode (drop down list) - provides option of Perimeter and Object for selection.
The 'Perimeter' option is used for removing the box single objects.
The 'Object' option is used for removing the box around multiple objects.
Minimum Area (field) - This field is enabled for editing if the 'Object' option is selected
from the 'Mode' drop down list. Tapping in the field displays a pop-up numeric keypad
to enter a new value if required.
Linear (tabbed pane)
This tabbed pane contains the following items for setting how the box blanking area is set up:
o Linear Coverage (area) - This area displays 'Active' if the 'Linear Coverage' option has
been enabled or includes an 'Enabled' button if the 'Product Coverage' option is currently
enabled. Tap on the button to enable the 'Linear Coverage' option.
107
The User Interface
o Linear Settings (area) - This area contains the following:
Rows (fields) - Fields are provided for setting the number of rows to be included in the
box blanking placed over the product image and the width of the blanking between
each row.
Columns (fields) - Fields are provided for setting the number of columns to be included
in the box blanking placed over the product image and the width of the blanking
between each column.
The two sets of field above can be used to create a blanking 'grid' / multiple boxes over the
product image if required. leaving the field default values at 1 just places the one box
around the product image perimeter.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Box Remover screen without
saving any changes made in the screen. The Box Remover screen is displayed.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Advanced Box Remover
screen and then closes the screen. The Box Remover screen is displayed and the controls
provided in the screen will depend on the options selected in the Advanced Box Remover
screen.
Masking
Purpose
The Masking screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Mask' button in the Inspection tab of the Product
Settings screen.
The screen provides controls for masking areas of the image that do not need to be included in the
inspection and also for counting and checking the sizes of objects within a pack to ensure that they
are correct.
Screen Contents
The Masking screen provides the following options:
Masking Image (area) - This area displays an image of the last pack inspected. Areas of the
image can be blanked out, effectively removing them from the inspection, by using a number
of controls provided in the 'Mask Settings' and 'Objects' areas of this screen and through the
'Advanced Masking' screen. The 'masked' areas are shown in blue.
108
The User Interface
109
The User Interface
Mask Settings (area) - This area contains a number of controls for setting the areas of the
image to be masked which are described below.
o Lower (field) - Tapping in this field provides the following controls for adjusting the
masking image density threshold to ensure that there is sufficient difference to identify
mask specific areas of the product image but still identify any contaminants in the product.
Mask Threshold (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the mask threshold value.
Mask Threshold (field) - This field displays the current mask threshold value which
may be edited in the two ways described below.
value.
required.
the mask threshold will not be displayed.
Objects (area) - Where a pack contains a number of objects, such as chocolates in a box, the
system can be set up to count that the required number of chocolates are contained in the
box. Any boxes containing less than the required amount of chocolates is therefore rejected.
This area contains the following controls for counting the number of objects in a pack:
o Minimum Count (field) - Tapping in this field provides the following controls for setting the
minimum number of objects that need to be included in the pack:
Minimum Count (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the minimum number of objects required.
Minimum Count (field) - This field displays the current minimum objects value which
Tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then enter a new number.
Tap on the + and - buttons provided to increase or decrease the number as required.
to correspond to the number entered in the field.
110
The User Interface
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button returns the Masking screen to its normal
status without saving any object number value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the minimum and
maximum object values and returns the Masking screen to its normal status.
o Maximum Count (field) - Tapping in this field provides the following controls for setting the
maximum number of objects that need to be included in the pack:
Maximum Count (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the maximum number of objects required.
Maximum Count (field) - This field displays the current maximum objects value which
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button returns the Masking screen to its normal
status without saving any object number value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the minimum and
maximum object values and returns the Masking screen to its normal status.
Object Size (area) - This area displays the following read only size information for the
object(s) contained in a pack from values entered in the Advanced Masking screen:
o Width - Displays the object width range. for example if a minimum range of 4 and a
maximum range of 5 was entered in the Advanced Masking screen then '4 - 5' would be
displayed.
o Length - Displays the object length range. for example if a minimum range of 10 and a
maximum range of 11 was entered in the Advanced Masking screen then '10 - 11' would
be displayed.
o Area - Displays the object area range. for example if a minimum range of 50 and a
maximum range of 55 was entered in the Advanced Masking screen then '50 - 55' would
be displayed.
Advanced (area) - This area contains the following controls for configuring the Masking:
o Settings (button) - Tapping in this button displays the Advanced Masking screen which
provides options for creating the masked product area and set up the number and size of
objects contained in a pack.
this can be used to check that the masking area and object data has been set up correctly or
to replace the current image if it is not representative of a standard good pack.
generating X-rays.
111
The User Interface
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Masking screen without saving any
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Masking screen and then
closes the screen. The Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen is displayed.
Advanced Masking
The Advanced Masking screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Settings' button in the Masking screen.
The screen provides options for setting the parameters for the masking area(s) and if they are
displayed on the product image.
Screen Contents
The screen contains the controls and buttons described below.

Mask Settings (area) - This area contains the following:
o Noise Area (field) - Noise is any background image clutter, caused by debris on the belt
for example, that can impact on the settings chosen by the system for inspecting the
product. You can therefore set a value that represents the number of pixel shades that can
be ignored by the system when inspecting the product that are caused by 'noise'. Tapping
in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new value may be
entered.
o Fill holes? (option check box) - Where a product contains holes, such as a loaf of bread,
the system can be set up to automatically fill them in so that they are not falsely detected
as rejects.
Inspection Options (area) - This area contains the following:
o Overlay (Inspection) (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the inspection
overlays, such as masking and box remover, will be displayed to the operator in the
inspection screen as each product image is captured. In some cases this is not required as
it could potentially cause some confusion.
Mask Object Size (area) - This area contains the following:
o Minimum Count (field) - Displays the minimum number of objects that the pack must
contain. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which you can
enter a new number if required.
112
The User Interface
o Maximum Count (field) - Displays the maximum number of objects that the pack must
contain. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which you can
enter a new number if required.
o Minimum Width (field) - Displays the minimum width for each of the objects contained in
the pack. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which you can
enter a new minimum width if required.
o Maximum Width (field) - Displays the maximum width for each of the objects contained in
enter a new maximum width if required.
o Minimum Length (field) - Displays the minimum length for each of the objects contained
in the pack. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which you
can enter a new minimum length if required.
o Maximum Length (field) - Displays the maximum length for each of the objects contained
in the pack. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which you
can enter a new maximum length if required.
o Minimum Area (field) - Displays the minimum area for each of the objects contained in the
pack. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which you can
enter a new minimum area if required.
o Maximum Area (field) - Displays the maximum area for each of the objects contained in
enter a new maximum area if required.
Reset (button) - Tapping on this button resets all of the field and options to their default
values.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Masking screen without saving
any changes made in the screen. The Masking screen is displayed.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Advanced Masking
screen and then closes the screen. The Masking screen is displayed and the controls provided
in the screen will depend on the options selected in the Advanced Box Remover screen.
Two tools are provided to assist in the detection of contaminants within products. As each of these
tools can be set up in a variety of ways, two instances of each tool are also provided so that multiple
inspection methods may be used concurrently to ensure that any contaminants are detected.
Basic
Basic inspection provides a number of options for detecting contaminants in products.
Firstly you can set the image density threshold at a level where the product is ignored but any
contaminants within the product will fall below the threshold, being denser, and therefore be
detected.
You can set the expected contaminant minimum and maximum size values which the system
then uses to identify contaminants in the product.
You can include the Box Remover and Mask tools in conjunction with the above.
Two instances of the Basic inspection tool, being Basic 1 and Basic 2, are provided so that you
may utilise two configurations of the tool to be used concurrently. For most contaminant
applications you should always enable one of the Basic inspection tools.
113
The User Interface
Note that for the X5c only the Basic 1 tool is provided.
Explorer
The Explorer inspection tool is patented imaging technology that provides advanced
contaminant detection using the concept of a 'Filter' to scan through the image, calculating the
average texture of the product. Six filter types are available which may be selected individually
to operate concurrently.
As for the Basic inspection tool, two instances of the Explorer inspection tool, being Explorer 1
and Explorer 2, are provided so that you may utilise two configurations of the tool to be used
concurrently. For products with a high degree of variability you should always enable one of the
Explorer inspection tools.
Note that for the X5c only the Explorer 1 tool is provided.
Basic
Purpose
The Basic inspection screen is displayed by tapping on either the Basic 1 or Basic 2 option in the
Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen to select it and then tapping on the Basic 1 or Basic 2
button.
Basic inspection is used to inspect the density of a product and the screen provides options for setting
up the threshold values to ensure that any contaminants are detected. The second instance of the
tool, Basic 2, is generally used to inspect under any product masking to ensure that any contaminants
are detected.
Screen Contents
The Basic screen provides the following options:
114
The User Interface
115
The User Interface
Settings (area) - This area contains the following:
o Mode (drop down list) - Basic 1 can be configured to work in a number of different modes
that affect how closely the inspection follows the image density values as the pack passes
through the system. The following modes are provided for selection:
Basic - This is the default option.
Offset - Used to set the number of pixel shades allowed that are darker than the
product which will not trigger a reject.
Smooth
Medium
Rough
Linear
o Threshold (field) - This field is displayed in the Settings area if the Basic, Smooth,
Medium or Rough mode is selected. Tapping in the field displays a number of controls,
including a slider and buttons, for setting the threshold value from a range of 1 up to 254.
or reduce the threshold value.
As you increase the threshold, some pixel image density values will be below the
threshold and turn orange in colour, indicating that they will be included in the image
and image data.
Threshold (field) - This field displays the current threshold value which may be edited
in the two ways described below.
value.
required.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button returns the Basic 1 screen to its normal status
without saving any threshold value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the threshold value
and returns the Basic 1 screen to its normal status.
The image will be updated and any pixels whose image density values are now below
the threshold will be displayed in orange.
o Offset (field) - This field is displayed in the Settings area if either the Offset or Linear mode
is selected, replacing the 'Threshold' field. Tapping in the field displays a number of
116
The User Interface
controls, including a slider and buttons, for setting the offset threshold value from a range
of -254 up to +126.
Offset (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to increase or
reduce the offset threshold value.
As you increase the threshold, some pixel image density values will be above the
threshold and turn orange in colour, indicating that they will be included in the image
and image data.
Offset (field) - This field displays the current offset threshold value which may be edited
in the two ways described below.
value.
required.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button returns the Basic 1 screen to its normal status
without saving any offset threshold value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the offset threshold
value and returns the Basic 1 screen to its normal status.
the offset threshold will be displayed.
o Reduce Noise (drop down list) - This control is displayed if the 'Reduce Noise' option is
selected in the Advanced Basic screen and provides options of Medium and High for
selection. The option effectively provides a process to reduce any background noise being
picked up by the system and included in the product image.
o Learn (button) - Tapping on this button initiates a live test for the current product and
displays the screen shown below.
The screen provides the following information and controls as products are passed
through the system:
Products - The total number of products passed through the system during the learn is
displayed.
Reject Objects (Total) - The number of products rejected during the learn cycle is
displayed.
117
The User Interface
Margin - The Current, Minimum, Maximum and Mean pack image density values are
displayed.
Reset (button) - Tapping on this button resets all of the current learn cycle results to
zero so a fresh set of values can be captured.
Auto Set - Tapping on this button uses the values captured from the learn cycle to
automatically adjust the product settings.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button stops the live test and closes the Live Test
Basic 1 screen.
histogram of the current image. If the Live Test option has been selected, the histogram
screen will update as product passes through the system.
position on the image to review the image density details at that position. If the Live Test
option has been selected, the profile screen will update as product passes through the
system.
and the inspection margin.The green / red box shows whether the currently displayed image
has passed the inspection or not.
this can be used to check that the inspection has been set up correctly or to replace the
current image if it is not representative of a standard good pack.
Tapping on the button initiates a live test, displaying the Live Test Basic 1 screen.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Basic 1 screen without saving any
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Basic 1 screen and then
Histogram
Purpose
The Histogram screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Histogram' button in the Basic screen.
The screen provides a visual representation of the image values, including statistical data, so that you
can make informed changes to the tool settings and preview them against the current image before
saving.
118
The User Interface
Screen Contents
Histogram (area) - This area displays a histogram of the captured image displayed in the
Basic 1 screen. The x-axis displays the image density / pixel greyscale value ranging from 0 to
255. The y-axis displays a pixel count at each image density and auto scales to fit the display.
A red vertical line on the histogram shows the reject threshold value.
height data.
119
The User Interface
o Logarithm (option check box) - Selecting this option changes the histogram to display
logarithmic values rather than actual values to reduce the range of values shown. The
Identification and either the Count or Average options may also be selected with this
option.
o Count (option check box) - Selecting this option displays the total number of readings
captured at the Minimum, Maximum, Mean, Median and Mode image density values
displayed in the 'Statistics' area. The Identification and Logarithm options may also be
selected with this option.
120
The User Interface
OK (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Histogram screen. The Basic screen is then
displayed. Note that any selections made are lost when the screen closes.
Profile
Purpose
The Profile screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Profile' button in the Basic screen.
density values in horizontal and vertical modes where the scan lines intersect are displayed
graphically at the bottom of the screen.
121
The User Interface
Screen Contents
scan lines. Image density values in horizontal and vertical modes where the scan line intersect
are displayed graphically at the bottom of the screen and their values are displayed in the
'Scan Line' and 'Information' areas on the right hand side of the screen. When the screen first
opens the intersect point will be where the Mean density value is located on the image.
intersect point will automatically move to that position and display the density value at that point
on the image.
positioned on the image where the first Mean image density value was captured.
o Product Max - Displays the maximum image density value captured.
o Horizontal Max - Displays the maximum image density value captured along the current
position of the horizontal scan line on the image.
o Vertical Max - Displays the maximum image density value captured along the current
position of the vertical scan line on the image.
OK (button) tapping on this button closes the Profile screen. The Basic screen is then
122
The User Interface
Advanced Basic
Purpose
The Advanced Basic screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Settings' button in the Basic screen.
The screen provides options for setting the contaminant size to be detected and a number of other
options as described below.
Screen Contents
The screen contains the controls and buttons described below.

Contaminant Size (area) - This area contains 'Minimum' and 'Maximum' fields for setting the
following size parameters for a contaminant:
o Width - The minimum and maximum width values for a contaminant may be entered.
o Length - The minimum and maximum length values for a contaminant may be entered.
o Area - The minimum and maximum area values for a contaminant may be entered.
o Volume - The minimum and maximum volume values for a contaminant may be entered.
o Perimeter - The minimum and maximum perimeter values for a contaminant may be
entered.
o Compactness (%) - The minimum and maximum percentage compactness values for a
contaminant may be entered.
o Reset (button) - Tapping on this button resets all of the contaminant size values back to
zero.
Tapping in any of the contaminant size fields displays the pop-up numeric keypad through
which new values may be entered.
Threshold Settings (area) - This area contains the following:
o Offset (Learn) (field) - Displays the current image density value offset to be used. This is
normally set to 15 but may be reduced if the product variability is low. Tapping in the field
displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new value may be entered.
o Reduce Noise (option check box) - Selecting this option applies filtering to smooth out
minor variances in product image densities.
123
The User Interface
o Use Box Remover (option check box) - Selecting this option includes the Box Remover
tool settings in the Basic inspection. Note that the Box Remover option must be enabled in
the 'Masking' area of the Inspection tab.
o Use Mask (option check box) - Selecting this option includes the Mask tool settings in the
Basic inspection. Note that the Mask option must be enabled in the 'Masking' area of the
Inspection tab.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Basic screen without saving any
changes made in the screen. The Basic screen is displayed.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Advanced Basic screen
and then closes the screen. The Basic screen is then displayed.
Explorer
Purpose
The Explorer inspection screen is displayed by tapping on either the Explorer 1 or Explorer 2 option in
the Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen to select it and then tapping on the Explorer 1 or
Explorer 2 button.
The Explorer inspection tool is patented imaging technology that provides advanced contaminant
detection using the concept of 'Filters' to scan through the image, calculating the average texture of
the product through changes between pixel shades. Six filter types are available which may be
selected individually to operate concurrently.
Filter 1 (F1) compares each pixel shade in turn (1 against 2, 2 against 3, 3 against 4 etc.)
across the product in both horizontal and vertical directions.
Filter 2 (F2) compares alternate pixel shades (1 against 3, 2 against 4, 3 against 5 etc.) across
the product in both horizontal and vertical directions.
Filter 4 (F4) compares alternate pixel shades (1 against 5, 2 against 6, 3 against 7 etc.) across
the product in both horizontal and vertical directions.
Filter 8 (F8) compares alternate pixel shades (1 against 9, 2 against 10, 3 against 11 etc.)
The number of shades of difference between one pixel and the next one it is comparing itself with is
know as the 'Slope' which is set automatically for each Filter based on the value set for Filter 1.
However, Slope values may also be set manually in the Advanced Explorer screen.
As for the Basic inspection tool, two instances of the Explorer inspection tool, being Explorer 1 and
Explorer 2, are provided so that you may utilise two configurations of the tool to be used concurrently.
For products with a high degree of variability you should always enable one of the Explorer inspection
tools. The second instance of the tool, Explorer 2, is generally used to inspect under any product
masking to ensure that any contaminants are detected.
124
The User Interface
Screen Contents
The Explorer screen provides the following options:
any settings applied to refine the inspection are valid.
125
The User Interface
o Upper (field) - This field displays a number representing the lightest pixel shade captured
across the area inspected for the current product pack. Tapping in the field displays a
number of controls, including a slider and buttons, for changing the value.
Upper (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to increase or
reduce the value.
As you increase the value, some pixel image density values will be below the upper
limit and turn orange in colour, indicating that they will be included in the image and
image data.
Threshold (field) - This field displays the current upper value which may be edited in
the two ways described below.
Tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then enter a new value.
Tap on the + and - buttons provided to increase or decrease the value as required.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button returns the Explorer screen to its normal
status without saving any value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the threshold value
and returns the Basic 1 screen to its normal status.
The image will be updated and any pixels whose image density values are now below
the upper threshold will be displayed in orange.
126
The User Interface
o Slope Change (field) - This field displays the current Slope Change value set for Filter 1
(F1). Tapping in the field displays a number of controls, including a slider and buttons, for
changing the slope change value which then automatically updated the other filter values.
Slope Change (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the value.
Slope Change (field) - This field displays the current value which may be edited in the
two ways described below.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button returns the Explorer screen to its normal
status without saving any Slope Change value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the Slope Change
value and returns the Explorer screen to its normal status.
The image will be updated and any pixels whose image density values fall outside of
the Slope Change range for any of the filters currently selected will be highlighted in
orange, indicating that they would cause the Explorer inspection to fail for that pack.
Note that by carrying out a Learn on a known good product, you can allow the system
to automatically calculate the correct setting values required which may then be
selected for use by the system using the Auto Set button.
o Filter (read-only information) - The Filter numbers currently being used are displayed.
o Learn (button) - Tapping on this button initiates a live test for the current product and
displays the screen shown below. This provides a powerful method for setting the Explorer
values by passing 10+ good products through the system to get a good distribution and
then tapping on the Auto Set button to instate the values captured.
through the system:
displayed.
Reject Objects (Total) - The number of products rejected during the learn cycle is
displayed.
127
The User Interface
Margin - A row is displayed for each Filter type currently in use. Using the difference in
pixel shades for the Filter type, the Current, Minimum , Maximum and Mean values are
displayed.
automatically adjust the product settings.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button stops the live test and closes the Live Test
Explorer screen.
The values are displayed in green where they are within the set range or red where they
are not, indicating that the pack would fail the Explorer inspection. This enables you to
cancel the test, change the Slope Change value for the Filters affected and then repeat the
Learn process.
position on the image to review the image density details at that position. If the Live Test
option has been selected, the profile screen will update as product passes through the
system.
o Settings (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Advanced Explorer screen through
which the Explorer filters and other options may be set up.
and the inspection margin. The green / red box shows whether the currently displayed image
image has passed or failed the isnpection tool
this can be used to check that the inspection has been set up correctly or to replace the
current image if it is not representative of a standard good pack.
Tapping on the button initiates a live test, displaying the Live Test Basic 1 screen.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Basic 1 screen without saving any
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Basic 1 screen and then
Profile
Purpose
The Profile screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Profile' button in the Explorer screen.
density values in horizontal and vertical modes where the scan line intersect are displayed graphically
at the bottom of the screen.
128
The User Interface
Screen Contents
scan lines. Image density values in horizontal and vertical modes where the scan lines
intersect are displayed graphically at the bottom of the screen and their values are displayed in
the 'Scan Line' and 'Information' areas on the right hand side of the screen. When the screen
first opens the intersect point will be where the Mean density value is located on the image.
intersect point will automatically move to that position and display the density value at that point
on the image.
positioned on the image where the first Mean image density value was captured.
o Slope Change - Displays the current slope change value for the first active Filter where
the x and y axis currently intersect.
o Minimum - Displays the minimum difference in pixel shade value captured for the first
active Filter where the x and y axis currently intersect.
o Horizontal Max - Displays the maximum difference in pixel shade value captured for the
first active Filter in the horizontal plane where the x and y axis currently intersect.
129
The User Interface
o Vertical Max - Displays the maximum difference in pixel shade value captured for the first
active Filter in the horizontal plane where the x and y axis currently intersect.
o Filter Values - A list of Filters is provided and for the active filters, coloured green, the
Slope Change vales for each one where the x and y axis currently intersect are displayed.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Profile screen. The Explorer screen is then
Advanced Explorer
Purpose
The Advanced Explorer screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Settings' button in the Explorer screen.
The screen provides options for setting up the Filters to be used and a number of other options as
described below.
Screen Contents
Settings
The Settings tab contains the following items for configuring Explorer inspection:
o Filter (area) - This area contains option check boxes for selecting / deselecting each of the
six available filters. In addition a field displaying the current Slope Change value is
provided for each filter. If a filter is not selected then the field displays 'OFF' on a blue
background.
o Inspection (area) - This area contains the following:
Offset (Learn) (field) - Displays the current number of pixel shades above the average
reading for each filter that is acceptable.
Average (option check box) - Selecting this option enables the Offset field.
Reduce False Rejects - Tapping on this option to select it means that if only one filter
detects a reject then it is ignored by the system. The reject must be detected by at least
two of the active filters.
o Box Remover / Mask (area) - This area contains the following:
Use Box Remover (option check box) - Selecting this option includes the Box
Remover tool in the Explorer inspection. Note that the Box Remover option must be
enabled in the 'Masking' area of the Inspection tab.
130
The User Interface
Use Mask (option check box) - Selecting this option includes the Mask tool in the
Explorer inspection. Note that the Mask option must be enabled in the 'Masking' area of
the Inspection tab.
Smooth (option check box) - With the Use Mask option selected, this option is
selectable which applies a smoothing process, effectively cleaning up the edges of the
mask.
o Edge Width (area) - This area contains the following controls for enhancing the current
box remover settings by applying a width in pixels to the box edge, effectively making it
thicker so that it is blanks off a larger area. If Box Remover threshold was adjusted on its
own it would potentially include some product in the masking so increasing the edge width
ensure that all of the product is inspected.
Edge Width (field) - Displays the current edge width in pixels. If the value is zero then
the Edge Width feature is disabled. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric
keypad through which a new value may be entered.
Offset (Edge Width) (field) - Displays the maximum value of pixel shade that will be
blanked out using the Edge Width feature. This defaults to the maximum 255.
Box Remover (option check box) - Selecting this option includes the Box Remover
setting with the Edge Width.
Advanced
The Advanced tab contains the following items for configuring Explorer inspection:
o Active (option check box) - If there are really dark areas within an image that are part of
the image, as opposed to a dark packing edge around the perimeter, by selecting the
Active option you can erode the density of the dark edges so that they match the product
density and thereby do not cause a reject to be detected in the Explorer inspection. This is
a useful feature when inspection food products such as paella that contain shellfish. The
following controls are available in the Histogram area of the screen:
Minimum (read-only field) - Displays the minimum image density detected and defaults
to -0.
Offset (field) - Displays how many pixel shades away from the product that are
acceptable.
Tapping in the field displays a pop-up numeric keypad through which a new value may
be entered.
131
The User Interface
Erosion (%) (field) - Displays the percentage of erosion being applied to the pixels that
make up the dark areas within the product image. Tapping in the field displays a pop-up
numeric keypad through which a new value may be entered.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Basic screen without saving any
changes made in the screen. The Explorer screen is displayed.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Advanced Basic screen
and then closes the screen. The Explorer screen is then displayed.
Product Integrity
Product integrity inspects products using a range of tools to ensure that they are complete and meet
minimum and maximum parameter values configured through the available tools.
This inspection method covers everything from individual packaged products through packs
containing multiple items to individual products being passed randomly through the system.
The Product Integrity tools are individually enabled by selecting them in the Inspection Options tab of
the Advanced Product Settings screen.
A number of tools are provided for checking product integrity which are described in the sections
listed below. The tools may be used individually or in multiples to provide a comprehensive inspection
across a range of product parameters and attributes.
Object Checking
Object checking identifies single or multiple objects contained within a product pack and then
provides a set of tools for defining acceptable minimum and maximum values for a range of
object parameters that must be met for the object to pass inspection. This section provides a
full description of the tools available.
Fill Level
The Fill Level tool can be used to quickly measure the fill level of a varying product. Two good
examples where this might be used are in measuring the fill level of each pot of yoghurt in a
pack or measuring the amount of fruit in a box of cereal. This section provides a full description
of the Fill Level tool.
Checkweigh
The Checkweigh tool can be used to identify and then weigh single products or multiple objects
contained within a product pack.
Product samples of known weights are passed through the system and their actual weights are
entered. Generally at least three acceptable product samples of different weights are used,
132
The User Interface
being high, nominal and low. The system then calculates a calibration curve, using the image
density values captured for each product sample against its actual weight, which is then used
to calculate the weight of all products as they are inspected. This section provides a full
description of the Checkweigh tool.
The Product Integrity area within the Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen contains the
following:
Object Checking (area) - This area contains the following:
o Object (option check box) - The system provides four Object tools which provide the same
features and functionality but may each be set up separately to set inspection parameters
for different objects contained within a product pack. For example a yoghurt pot may
contain two sections, one containing the yoghurt and one containing chocolate pieces
which can be added to the yoghurt. Two object tools would be used to inspect the yoghurt
and chocolate pieces separately.
An option check box and button is provided for each of the four Object tools. Selecting an
option and tapping on the button will display the Object screen.
o Loose (option check box) - The system provides two Loose Object tools which provide the
same features and functionality as the Object tools except that they may be used in Mass
Flow mode when products are being passed randomly through the system. A checkweigh
feature is also available with this tool to weigh single or multiple objects as they are
inspected.
An option check box and button is provided for each of the two Loose Object tools.
Selecting an option and tapping on the button will display the Loose Objects screen.
Fill Level (area) - The Fill Level tool is used to measure the fill level of a varying product, such
as yoghurt in a pot. This area contains an option check box for enabling the tool and a button.
Selecting the option and tapping on the button will display the Fill Level screen.
Checkweigh (area) - The Checkweigh tool is used to weigh single or multiple objects as they
are inspected. This area contains an option check box for enabling the tool and a button.
Selecting the option and tapping on the button will display the Checkweigh screen.
the last pack rejected by the system against any of the Product Integrity tools being used.
Object Checking
Object checking has two modes of operation. Count mode is used to find a specific number of objects
within an image and Verify mode is used to inspect each object against its specified physical
parameters, such as length and width to identify any damaged or malformed objects.
For example Count mode can be used to count that there are exactly six apple pies in a box and
Verify mode then used to confirm that all of the pies are the same size, within specified minimum and
maximum values.
Object tool
Four Object tools are provided which are identical in operation but are distinguished by using
different colours. The number of Object tools you will need to use depends on the nature of the
inspection being performed.
Note that for the X5c only two Object tools are provided.
133
The User Interface
Loose Object tool

Two Loose Object tools are also provided which operate in exactly the same way as the Object
tools in Verify Mode except that they can be for Bounded and Mass flow applications and can
also be used to weigh single or multiple objects as they are inspected and reject any that are
over or underweight.
Note that thie Loose Object tool is not provided for the X5c model.
Object
Purpose
The Object screen is displayed by selecting any of the 'Object' option check boxes to activate its
button and then tapping on the button in the Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen.
The screen provides controls for setting up object counting and verification settings to be used in the
product integrity inspection of the product.
Note that four Object tools are available and each one can be configured to inspect a specific
parameters of a product. They all operate in exactly the same way and provide the same features so
to avoid duplication the following descriptions apply to all of the Object tools.
Screen Contents
The Object screen provides the following options:

Image (area) - This area displays an image of the last pack inspected. Tapping on an object in
the image displays the Object Information screen which provides options for setting object size
parameters to be used when inspecting the product.
o Mode (drop down list) - Provides options of Basic, Offset and Linear for managing the
threshold settings.
o Offset (field) - This field is only shown when the 'Linear' option has been selected. It
displays the current offset threshold value. Tapping in the field provides a set of controls
for editing the value.
134
The User Interface
Offset Threshold (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the offset threshold value. The slider is initially set to the default
value of 0 but this can be increased up to a maximum of 254.
As you increase the offset threshold some pixel image density values will fall below the
image and image data. Reducing the offset threshold value may include additional
Offset Threshold (field) - This field displays the current offset threshold value which
value.
required.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button returns the Object screen to its normal status
without saving any offset threshold value changes.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the offset threshold
value and returns the Object screen to its normal status.
Lower Threshold (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the lower threshold value. The slider is initially set to the default
As you increase the lower threshold some pixel image density values will fall below the
image and image data. Reducing the lower threshold value may include additional
135
The User Interface
Lower Threshold (field) - This field displays the current lower threshold value which
value.
required.
without saving any lower threshold value changes.
o Upper (field) - This field displays the current upper threshold value. Tapping in the field
provides a set of controls for editing the threshold value.
Upper Threshold (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the upper threshold value. The slider is initially set to the default
maximum value of 254 but this can be reduced down to zero.
As you reduce the upper threshold some pixel image density values will fall above the
threshold and turn green in colour, indicating that they will no longer be included in the
Upper Threshold (field) - This field displays the current upper threshold value which
value.
required.
136
The User Interface
without saving any upper threshold value changes.
in the field.
Objects (area) - This area provides controls for setting the number of objects that should be
included in a pack:
o Minimum Count (field) - This field displays the current minimum number of objects that
should be included in a pack. Tapping in the field provides a set of controls for editing the
number.
Minimum Count (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the object number.
As you change the number, if it is lower or higher than the number of discrete objects
displayed in the image then the Results area will turn red. With the correct number of
objects selected the Results area turns green.
Minimum Count (field) - This field displays the currently set minimum number of
objects which may be edited in the two ways described below.
without saving any lower threshold value changes.
137
The User Interface
o Maximum Count (field) - This field displays the current maximum number of objects that
should be included in a pack. Tapping in the field provides a set of controls for editing the
number.
Maximum Count (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the object number.
As you change the number, if it is lower or higher than the number of discrete objects
displayed in the image then the Results area will turn red. With the correct number of
objects selected the Results area turns green.
Maximum Count (field) - This field displays the currently set maximum number of
objects which may be edited in the two ways described below.
without saving any number change.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made to the maximum objects
number and returns the Object screen to its normal status.
Advanced (area) - This area contains the following controls for configuring the Object settings:
o Settings (button) - Tapping in this button displays the Advanced Object screen which
provides further object settings.
using the tool and some tool specific statistics such as the number of objects found. Green /
Red boxes show whether the current image has passed or failed the isnpection tool.
this can be used to check that the Object has been set up correctly or to replace the current
image if it is not representative of a standard good pack.
138
The User Interface
generating X-rays.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Object screen without saving any changes
made in the screen. The Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen is displayed.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Object screen and then
Object Information
Purpose
The Object Information screen is displayed by tapping on an object in the currently displayed image in
the Object screen.
The screen provides a comprehensive set of information for the object which may then be used
selected to use for all objects contained in the image.
Screen Contents
The screen includes a drop down list of display options and each option when selected will display a
different set of object information as described below.
Size (Basic)
When the Size (Basic) display option is selected the screen includes the following:
o Object Size (Basic) (area) - This area provides option check boxes for selecting the
Width, Length, Area, Volume and Perimeter values captured by the system for the
selected object and using them as a template against which all objects are inspected.
The exact value captured for each parameter is displayed and a drop down list of + and -
percentage values to be applied against each value is provided.
o Settings (Min / Max) (area) - This area contains minimum and maximum values for each
of the parameters selected in the Object Size (Basic) area and based on the percentage
values selected.
139
The User Interface
Size (Advanced)
When the Size (Advanced) display option is selected the screen includes the following:
o Object Size (Advanced) (area) - This area provides option check boxes for selecting the
Compactness, Width / Length, Volume / Area, Area / Perimeter values captured by the
system for the selected object and using them as a template against which all objects are
inspected.
o [Histogram] (area) - This area provides option check boxes for selecting the Mean and/or
Standard Deviation values captured by the system for the selected object to be applied to
the histogram when displayed.
values selected.
Holes (Basic)
When the Holes (Basic) display option is selected the screen includes the following:
o Holes (Basic) (area) - This area provides option check boxes for selecting the Holes
(Count), Coverage, Minimum Size, Maximum Size, Average Size and Standard Deviation
140
The User Interface
values captured by the system for the selected object and using them as a template
against which all objects are inspected.
percentage values to be applied against each value is provided. The total object area is
also displayed.
values selected.
All Objects
When the All Objects display option is selected the screen includes the following:
o Information (X Objects) (area) - Where X is the number of individual objects contained in

the captured image, this area provides the average minimum and maximum values for the
all of the parameters included in the other displays screens. These include Width, Length,
Area, Volume, Perimeter, Compactness, Width / Length, Volume / Area, Area / Perimeter,
Histogram Mean, Histogram Standard Deviation, Holes (count), Hole Coverage, Hole
Average Area and Hole Average Standard Deviation.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Object Information screen without saving
any changes made in the screen. The Object screen is displayed.
Transfer (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Object Information
screen and 'transfers' them over into the settings for all objects included in the image. Saving
the settings in the Object screen and then Applying them in the Inspection tab of the Product
Settings screen will then utilise the saved Object inspection settings for the current product.
Advanced Object
Purpose
The Advanced Object screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Settings' button in the Object screen.
The screen provides advanced options for setting object parameters that are then used to identify
conforming objects within a product pack image, including the number of objects, so that and non-
conforming packs may be rejected.
Screen Contents
Name (area) - This area contains a field which displays the Object name. The name defaults
to Object 1 up to Object 4 depending on which Object tool you are configuring, but the name
141
The User Interface
can be changed to something meaningful to assist in identifying the reason for any rejects.
Tap in the field to display the pop-up keyboard through which you may enter a new name.
Object Process (area) - This area contains a drop down list with options of Count Mode and
Verify Mode which are described below.
o Count Mode - In the Object screen the threshold settings were adjusted to define the
individual objects in the product image. You may then have tapped on an object and used
the Object Information screen to set the selected object parameters, such as length and
width, and then fix them for all objects using the 'Transfer' button. But if you did not then
they may be configured and set through this advanced screen.
With Count Mode selected any Objects that match the fixed parameters will be counted
and those that do not match all the parameters are ignored. A reject will occur if the
number of objects that match all the parameters is outside of the Minimum / Maximum
object count value.
o Verify Mode - This mode is used purely to check that all objects match the Object size
and other advanced parameters. There can be any number of objects found but a reject
will only occur if an object fails to match all the parameters. With the exception of objects
that have an area smaller than the Noise Area setting, all objects are tested and none can
be ignored. Therefore this mode should not be used to count objects. Use the Count Mode
instead.
Object Size (tab) - This tab contains a number of object size and count options for selection
and configuration. See Object Size for further details.
Object Holes (tab) - This tab contains a number of options for defining the parameters for any
holes that should be present in an object. See Object Holes for further details.
Miscellaneous Settings (tab) - This tab contains a number of miscellaneous object settings
for selection. See Miscellaneous Settings for further information.
Reset (All) (button) - Tapping on this button resets all of the available settings in all tabs of the
screen to their default values.
Information (panel) - Located at the bottom of the screen, the panel contains an indicator for
the Size (Basic), Size (Advanced), Holes (Basic) and Holes (Advanced) areas contained within
the screens tabs. If the indicator is coloured green, this indicates that some default settings
within that area have been changed. If the indicator is coloured grey, this indicates that the
default settings in that area have not been changed.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Object screen without saving
any changes made in the screen. The Object screen is displayed.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Advanced Object screen
and then closes the screen. The Object screen is displayed.
Object Size
Purpose
The Object Size tab of the Advanced Object screen provides a number of advanced object size and
count options for selection and configuration. This enables you to fine tune the object characteristics
so that any which do not meet them are rejected.
Screen Contents
142
The User Interface
The screen contains the controls and buttons described below in an area called Object Size (Basic).
Minimum / Maximum Count (fields) - These fields displays the number of objects detected in
the product image that meet any parameters set and transferred in the Object Information
screen for the object selected in the Object screen.
If rejected, embed failed object parameter into result image (option check box) - Selecting
this option will include information for the object parameter that failed inspection on the product
image displayed to the operator.
Minimum / Maximum (fields) - These fields are provided for the object Width, Length, Area,
Volume and Perimeter parameters. When both fields show a zero value, this indicates that
they were not set in the Object Information screen for the selected object and then transferred
for all objects. If a value is shown then it was set and transferred in the Object Information
screen.
Tap on either of the fields to display the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new value
may be entered. If you select the 'Statistics' button the minimum and maximum parameter
values captured across all of the available objects are displayed which you can then use as a
guide for selecting suitable values.
Image / Statistics (button) - This button toggles between Image and Statistics, depending on
what information is currently being displayed.
o Image - When this option is selected the area under the button displays the product
image, showing all of the objects.
143
The User Interface
o Statistics - When this option is selected the area under the button displays a small
product image and the minimum / maximum values captured for the object parameters
detected in the current product image.
The values shown are the maximum and minimum values captured from all the objects
detected in the product image.
The green boxes indicate that these object parameters were selected for transfer in the
Object Information screen. Note that the parameter values displayed on the left of the
screen will probably be different as they are minimum and maximum values for the single
object selected in the Object screen and not across all objects.
The grey boxes indicate that none of these object characteristics was selected for transfer
in the Object Information screen.
Advanced (option check box) - Selecting this option enables the Settings button. Tapping on
the button then displays the Advanced Object Size screen which provides further object
parameters for configuration.
Advanced Object Size
Purpose
The Advanced Object Size screen provides a number of advanced object size and count options for
selection and configuration. This enables you to fine tune the object parameters so that any which do
not meet them are rejected.
Screen Contents
144
The User Interface
The screen contains the controls and buttons described below in an area called Object Size
(Advanced).
Minimum / Maximum (fields) - These fields are provided for the object Compactness (%),
Width / Length, Volume / Area, Area / Perimeter, Histogram Mean and Histogram Standard
Deviation parameters. When both fields show a zero value, this indicates that they were not
set in the Object Information screen for the selected object and then transferred for all objects.
If a value is shown then it was set and transferred in the Object Information screen.
145
The User Interface
Reset (button) - Tapping on this button resets all the parameter values in the screen back to
their default values of zero.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Object Size screen without
saving any changes made in the screen. The Object Size screen is displayed.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Advanced Object Size
screen and then closes the screen. The Object Size screen is displayed.
Object Holes
Purpose
The Object Holes tab of the Advanced Object screen provides a number of advanced object hole size
and count options for selection and configuration. This enables you to fine tune the object parameters
so that any which do not meet them are rejected.
Screen Contents
The screen contains the controls and buttons described below in an area called Object Holes (Basic).
Holes (option check box) - Selecting the option enables all of the controls in the tab.
Holes Noise Area (field) - This field displays a pixel value to be used to allow for any
background noise around the holes in the object. Tap in the field to display the pop-up numeric
keypad through which a new value may be entered.
Minimum / Maximum (fields) - These fields are provided for the object Holes (Count) and
Coverage (%) parameters. When both fields show a zero value, this indicates that they were
not set in the Object Information screen for the selected object and then transferred for all
objects. If a value is shown then it was set and transferred in the Object Information screen.
146
The User Interface
Advanced (option check box) - Selecting this option enables the Settings button. Tapping on
the button then displays the Advanced Object Holes screen which provides further object
parameters for configuration.
Advanced Object Holes
Purpose
The Advanced Object Holes screen provides a number of advanced object hole size and count
options for selection and configuration. This enables you to fine tune the object parameters so that
any which do not meet them are rejected.
147
The User Interface
Screen Contents
The screen contains the tabs, controls and buttons described below.
Size
The Size tab contains the following options for configuring object hole parameters:
o Minimum / Maximum (fields) - These fields are provided for the object Hole Size, Average
Size and Standard Deviation parameters. When both fields show a zero value, this
indicates that they were not set in the Object Information screen for the selected object
and then transferred for all objects. If a value is shown then it was set and transferred in
the Object Information screen.
o Image / Statistics (button) - This button toggles between Image and Statistics, depending
on what information is currently being displayed.
Image - When this option is selected the area under the button displays the product
Statistics - When this option is selected the area under the button displays a small
screen will probably be different as they are minimum and maximum values for the
single object selected in the Object screen and not across all objects.
148
The User Interface
The grey boxes indicate that none of these object characteristics was selected for
transfer in the Object Information screen.
Categories
The Categories tab contains the following options for configuring object hole parameters:
o Number (drop down list) - You may create from 1 up to 6 categories of hole that may be
present in an object and set parameter values specifically for each category to be used
during product inspection. The drop down list therefore provides values from 1 to 6 for
selection.
o Edit (area) - This area contains an option radio button for selecting each available hole
size category in turn so that its parameter values may then be set.
o Category (number) (area) - This area displays the following for setting the hole size
parameters for the selected category:
Size Minimum / Maximum (fields) - These fields display the minimum and maximum
pixel sizes for the hole and the size in mm is displayed below each field. A field value
can be changed by tapping in the field and then using the up and down arrows provided
to increase or decrease the value.
Note that if the minimum hole count value is set to zero then the minimum hole size is
set to zero and is not editable.
Count Minimum and Maximum (fields) - These fields display the minimum and
maximum number of holes for the selected category, that meet the set minimum /
maximum hole sizes, that must be available, across all the objects in a pack for it to
pass inspection. A field value can be changed by tapping in the field and then using the
up and down arrows provided to increase or decrease the value.
o Current Image Statistics (area) - This area provides a field displaying the number of
holes detected for each hole size category across all objects in the current image. If a field
is coloured green this indicates that the hole size and count parameters for that category
have been met. If it is red then this indicates that they have not been met and the pack
would be rejected.
The field values and colours will change in real time as you adjust the hole size and count
parameters for each category as they are assessed against the current product pack
image; allowing you to make any adjustments that may be required to ensure that good
product packs will pass inspection.
Miscellaneous Settings
The Miscellaneous Settings tab contains the following options for configuring object hole
parameters:
o Inspection Log (area) - This area contains an option check box for selecting to add hole
size information into the inspection log.
o Area Calculator (area) - This area contains a calculator for converting values from one
unit to another which is useful when entering values in a field that must be in pixels when
you only have a value in millimetres.
Three option radio buttons for selecting px2 (pixels squared), mm2 (millimetres squared)
and mm (millimetres) units are provided, each with a corresponding field that becomes
active when its option is selected.
For example, selecting the px2 radio button enables its field. Tapping in the field displays
the pop-up numeric keypad through which you can then enter a value.
149
The User Interface
The calculator then automatically does the conversion and displays the corresponding
values (read only) in the mm2 and mm fields. This is shown in the image below.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Object Holes screen without
saving any changes made in the screen. The Object Holes screen is displayed.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Advanced Object Holes
screen and then closes the screen. The Object Holes screen is displayed.
Miscellaneous Settings
Purpose
The Miscellaneous Settings tab of the Advanced Object screen provides a number of additional
options for selection and configuration. This enables you to fine tune the object parameters so that
any which do not meet them are rejected.
Screen Contents
The screen contains the controls described below.

Miscellaneous Settings (area) - This area contains the following options:
o oise Area (field) - This field displays a pixel value to be used to allow for any background
noise around the object. Tap in the field to display the pop-up numeric keypad through
which a new value may be entered.
o Use Box Remover (option check box) - Selecting this option includes the Box Remover
tool in the inspection.
Inspection Options (area) - This area contains the following options:
o Overlay (Inspection) (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the operator
sees all inspection tool overlays,such as the box remover and other masking, on each
150
The User Interface
product image as it is captured. This could potentially be confusing to the operator so by

default it is not selected.
o Overlay Shape (drop down list) - This list provides options of Rectangle and Centre for
selecting the shape of the overlay that appears on the product image as it is captured
during inspection. The list is only enabled if the Overlay (Inspection) option has been
selected.
Loose Objects
Purpose
The Loose Objects screen is displayed by selecting either of the 'Loose' object option check boxes to
activate its button and then tapping on the button in the Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen.
The Loose Objects tool operates in a similar manner to the Object tool when in Verify mode but with
the following important distinctions:
The tool does not count objects; as for the Verify Mode for the Object tool.
The tool operates in both Bounded and Mass flow modes.
Objects can be individually weighed.
Note that two Loose Objects tools are available and each one can be configured to inspect a specific
parameters of a product. They both operate in exactly the same way and provide the same features
so to avoid duplication the following descriptions apply to both of the Loose Object tools.
Screen Contents
The Loose Objects screen provides the following options:

Image (area) - This area displays an image of the last pack inspected. Tapping on an object in
the image displays the Object Information screen which provides options for setting various
object parameters to be used when inspecting the product.
151
The User Interface
Lower Threshold (slider control) - Touch and drag the slider up or down the scale to
increase or reduce the lower threshold value. The slider is initially set to the default
As you increase the lower threshold some additional pixels whose density values fall
below the threshold will lose their colour, indicating that they will no longer be included
as part of the object. Reducing the lower threshold value may include additional pixels
as their density values are above the threshold and these will become coloured.
Lower Threshold (field) - This field displays the current lower threshold value which
value.
required.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button returns the Loose Objects screen to its normal
status without saving any lower threshold value changes.
value and returns the Loose Objects screen to its normal status.
provides a set of controls for editing the threshold value.
152
The User Interface
increase or reduce the upper threshold value. The slider is initially set to the default
maximum value of 254 but this can be reduced down to zero.
As you reduce the upper threshold some pixel image density values will be above the
threshold and lose their colour, indicating that they will no longer be included as part of
the object.
value.
required.
without saving any upper threshold value changes.
in the field.
o Total Image (option check box) - Selecting this option reduces the image size in the
available image window, which is useful when in Mass Flow mode for viewing all objects.
153
The User Interface
Advanced (area) - This area contains the following controls for configuring the Loose Object
settings:
o Settings (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Advanced Loose Objects screen
which provides further loose object settings.
this can be used to check that the Loose Objects parameters have been set up correctly or to
replace the current image if it is not representative of a standard good pack.
generating X-rays.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Loose Objects screen without saving any
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Loose Objects screen
and then closes the screen. The Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen is displayed.
Object Information
Purpose
The Object Information screen is displayed by tapping on an object in the currently displayed image in
the Loose Objects screen.
The screen provides a comprehensive set of information for the object which may then be selected to
use for all loose objects contained in the image.
Screen Contents
The screen includes a drop down list of display options and each option when selected will display a
different set of object information as described below.
154
The User Interface
Size (Basic)
When the Size (Basic) display option is selected the screen includes the following:
o Object Size (Basic) (area) - This area provides option check boxes for selecting the
Width, Length, Area, Volume and Perimeter values captured by the system for the
selected object and using them as a template against which all objects are inspected.
values selected.
Size (Advanced)
When the Size (Advanced) display option is selected the screen includes the following:
o Object Size (Advanced) (area) - This area provides option check boxes for selecting the
Compactness, Width / Length, Volume / Area, Area / Perimeter values captured by the
system for the selected object and using them as a template against which all objects are
inspected.
155
The User Interface
o [Histogram] (area) - This area provides option check boxes for selecting the Mean and/or
Standard Deviation values captured by the system for the selected object to be applied to
the histogram when displayed.
values selected.
Holes (Basic)
When the Holes (Basic) display option is selected the screen includes the following:
o Holes (Basic) (area) - This area provides option check boxes for selecting the Holes
(Count), Coverage, Minimum Size, Maximum Size, Average Size and Standard Deviation
values captured by the system for the selected object and using them as a template
against which all objects are inspected.
percentage values to be applied against each value is provided. The total object area is
also displayed.
values selected.
All Objects
156
The User Interface
When the All Objects display option is selected the screen includes the following:
o Information (X Objects) (area) - Where X is the number of individual objects contained in

the captured image, this area provides the average minimum and maximum values for the
all of the parameters included in the other displays screens. These include Width, Length,
Area, Volume, Perimeter, Compactness, Width / Length, Volume / Area, Area / Perimeter,
Histogram Mean, Histogram Standard Deviation, Holes (count), Hole Coverage, Hole
Average Area and Hole Average Standard Deviation.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Object Information screen without saving
any changes made in the screen. The Loose Objects screen is displayed.
Transfer (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Object Information
screen and 'transfers' them over into the settings for all objects included in the image. Saving
the settings in the Loose Objects screen and then Applying them in the Inspection tab of the
Product Settings screen will then utilise the saved Loose Objects inspection settings for the
current product.
Advanced Loose Objects
Purpose
The Advanced Loose Objects screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Settings' button in the Loose
Objects screen.
The screen provides advanced options for setting loose object parameters that are then used to
identify conforming objects within a product pack image when working in Bounded mode, including
the number of objects, and loose objects when working in Mass Flow mode, so that any non-
conforming packs / objects may be detected and rejected.
Screen Contents
Object Size
The Object Size tab contains a number of options described below for defining the size
parameters to be used during inspection of loose objects.
o Noise Area (area) - This area contains a Noise Area field which displays a pixel value to
be used to allow for any background noise around the object. Tap in the field to display the
pop-up numeric keypad through which a new value may be entered
o Inspection Options (area) - This area contains the Overlay (Inspection) option check box.
Selecting this option means that the operator sees all of the Loose Object tool overlays on
157
The User Interface
each product image as it is captured. This could potentially be confusing to the operator so
by default it is not selected..
o Object Size (area) - This area contains the following options for setting the size
parameters for loose objects:
Minimum / Maximum Count (fields) - These fields displays the number of loose
objects detected in the product image that meet any parameters set and transferred in
the Object Information screen for the object selected in the Loose Objects screen.
o Minimum / Maximum (fields) - These fields are provided for the object Width, Length,
Area, Volume and Perimeter parameters. When both fields show a zero value, this
indicates that they were not set in the Object Information screen for the selected object
and then transferred for all objects. If a value is shown then it was set and transferred in
the Object Information screen.
Tap on either of the fields to display the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new
value may be entered. If you select the 'Statistics' button the minimum and maximum
parameter values captured across all of the available objects are displayed which you can
then use as a guide for selecting suitable values.
o Reset (button) - Tapping on this button resets all object parameters to their default values
of zero.
o Reject Failed Objects (option check box) - Selecting this object means that the system
will reject any loose objects whose size parameters do not meet those set in this tab.
Checkweigh
The Checkweigh tab contains a number of options described below for defining the
checkweighing parameters to be used during inspection of loose objects. Note that the
Minimum Weight mode is used.
o Enable (option check box) - This option must be selected if you wish to use the
checkweighing feature and enable the controls in this tab. Objects will then be weighed if
they match the object size parameters
o Financial (area) - This area contains a field in which a number representing the object
cost per weight unit can be entered through the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the
field. The currency and weight units (metric or imperial) are set in the Advanced System
Settings screen.
158
The User Interface
o Calibration (area) - This area contains options for setting the calibration parameters to be
used.
Packs (field) - The number of packs to be used when performing a calibration is

displayed. Generally the more packs that are used the better the calibration will be.
Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new number
may be entered.
Note that for objects in a multi-pack, such as a pack containing four yoghurt pots, each
pot will be identified as a single pack towards the pack number entered.
Points (non-editable field) - Displays the current number of calibration points being
used.
Offset (field) - Displays the offset applied to the calibration, based on actual weight
against the system calculated weight, to ensure that the weight displayed and used by
the system is as accurate as possible.
Lock calibration (option check box) - This option can be enabled once calibration has
been completed. When selected, calibration points cannot be added or removed. Only
a Refresh calibration may be performed.
Compensation (%) (field) - Displays the weight compensation percentage used by the
system. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new
value may be entered.
Zoom (button) - Tapping on this button opens the Checkweigh Calibration screen
shown below which graphically displays the weights for each calibration point.
Reset (button) - tapping on this button removes all currently defined calibration points.
A new calibration will then be required.
o Settings (area) - This area contains the following object weight parameters for
configuration:
Nominal (field) - Displays the target or average object weight, including the packing.
The value can be changed through the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the field.
High (field) - Displays the automatically calculated high object weight, based on
minimum weight legislation, above which objects will be rejected if the Reject High
option has been selected.
159
The User Interface
Reject High (option check box) - If this option is selected, any objects that weigh more
than the weight set in the High weight field will be rejected.
Low (field) - Displays the lowest acceptable object weight, including the packing.
Object weighing below this value will be rejected. The value can be changed through
the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the field.
Tare (field) - Displays the weight of the packing fro each object which is subtracted
from each object before showing the final weight of the object. The default value is set
to zero but it can be changed through the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the
field.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Loos Objects screen without
saving any changes made in the screen. The Loose Objects screen is displayed.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Advanced Loose Objects
screen and then closes the screen. The Loose Objects screen is displayed.
Fill Level
Purpose
The Fill Level screen is displayed by enabling the Fill option and then tapping on its button in the
Fill Level inspection is used to ensure that a product such as a yoghurt pot contains the right amount
of yoghurt, based on defined minimum and maximum area or volume parameters.
Note that the Fill tool is not provided for the X5c .
Screen Contents
The Fill Level screen provides the following options:
Tapping on an object in the image displays the Object Information screen which provides area
and volume information for the object.
160
The User Interface
Threshold Settings (area) - This area contains a drop down list of threshold setting options
that includes basic, Offset and Linear. The controls displayed in the area depend on the option
selected and these are described below.
o Upper (field) - This field is displayed in the Settings area if the Basic option is selected.
Tapping in the field displays a number of controls, including a slider and buttons, for
setting the threshold value from a range of 1 up to 254.
increase or reduce the upper threshold value until the objects in the image are each
clearly defined by coloured pixels.
As you increase the threshold, some pixel image density values will be below the
threshold value and will lose their colour, indicating that they will be not be included in
the object.
Tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then enter a new upper
threshold value.
Tap on the + and - buttons provided to increase or decrease the upper threshold value
as required.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button returns the Fill Level screen to its normal
status without saving any upper threshold value changes.
value and returns the Fill Level screen to its normal status. The image will be updated.
o Offset (field) - This field is displayed in the Settings area if the Offset or Linear option is
selected. It is used to apply an offset from the average pixel image density in the pack
image to allow for some variation between multiple objects. Tapping in the field displays a
number of controls, including a slider and buttons, for setting the offset value.
reduce the offset value until the objects in the image are each clearly defined by
coloured pixels.
As you increase or decrease the value, some pixel image density values will be above
or below the average pixel image density value, including the offset, and will lose their
colour, indicating that they will be not be included in the object.
Offset (field) - This field displays the current offset value which may be edited in the
161
The User Interface
Fill Level (area) - This area contains the following controls for setting the object fill level
parameters:
o Fill Level (drop down list) - This list contains object fill level options of Area and Volume
for selection which determine how the object fill level is calculated by the system.
o Min (%) (field) - This field displays the minimum fill level percentage for the object. If the fill
level falls below this percentage then the object will be rejected. You can change the
percentage value through the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the field.
o Max (%) (field) - This field displays the maximum fill level percentage for the object. If the
fill level is above this percentage then the object will be rejected. You can change the
percentage value through the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the field.
o Fill Level (field) - This field displays the current fill level in px2 calculated from a Learn
process. The value may be manually changed through the pop-up numeric keypad by
tapping in the field.
o Learn (button) - Tapping on this button initiates a live fill test for the current product and
displays the screen shown below.
through the system:
displayed.
Margin - The Current, Minimum, Maximum and Mean margin values are displayed.
Volume - The current object minimum to maximum volume values (px2) is displayed.
162
The User Interface
automatically adjust the Fill Level minimum and maximum percentage settings. You
can then pass a faulty pack through the system to ensure that it is rejected and that the
Results box turns red.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button stops the live test and closes the Live Test: Fill
screen.
histogram of the current image. If the Live Test option has been selected, the histogram
screen will update as product passes through the system.
o Settings (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Advanced Fill screen which
provides the option of including the Box Remover tool in the Fill Level inspection.
this can be used to check that the Fill Level inspection has been set up correctly or to replace
Tapping on the button initiates a live test, displaying the Live Test: Fill screen described in the
Learn section above.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Fill Level screen without saving any
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Fill Level screen and
Histogram
Purpose
The Histogram screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Histogram' button in the Fill Level screen.
The screen provides a visual representation of the image values, including statistical data, so that you
can make informed changes to the tool settings and preview them against the current image before
saving.
163
The User Interface
Screen Contents
Histogram (area) - This area displays a histogram of the captured image displayed in the Fill
Level screen. The x-axis displays the image density / pixel greyscale value ranging from 0 to
255. The y-axis displays a pixel count at each image density and auto scales to fit the display.
height data.
164
The User Interface
o Logarithm (option check box) - Selecting this option changes the histogram to display
logarithmic values rather than actual values to reduce the range of values shown. The
Identification and either the Count or Average options may also be selected with this
option.
o Count (option check box) - Selecting this option displays the total number of readings
captured at the Minimum, Maximum, Mean, Median and Mode image density values
displayed in the 'Statistics' area. The Identification and Logarithm options may also be
selected with this option.
165
The User Interface
OK (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Histogram screen. The Fill Level screen is
then displayed. Note that any selections made are lost when the screen closes.
Checkweigh
Purpose
The Checkweigh screen is displayed by enabling the Checkweigh option and then tapping on its
button in the Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen.
Note that the Checkweigh tool is not provided for the X5c .
The Checkweigh option to be displayed it must first have been enabled in the Inspection Options tab
of the Advanced Product Settings screen.
Checkweigh inspection is used to ensure that any over or underweight products, based on defined
and calculated weight limits, are detected for rejection by the system. Two weighing modes are
available which are selected in the Advanced Checkweigh screen. See Weight Mode Selection for
further details.
166
The User Interface
Screen Contents
The Checkweigh screen provides the following options:
Threshold Settings (area) - This area contains the controls described below that are used to
identify the product or objects that make up a product. The objective is to adjust the threshold
value until the pixels in the image that represent the product are all coloured. The system then
utilises the density data captured for the coloured pixels as representing the nominal weight of
the product.
displays a number of controls, including a slider and buttons, for setting the threshold
value.
increase or reduce the upper threshold value until the objects in the image to be
included in the checkweigh are each clearly defined by coloured pixels.
As you increase the threshold, some pixel image density values will fall below the
threshold value and will lose their colour, indicating that they will be not be included in
the object.
Tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and then enter a new upper
threshold value.
Tap on the + and - buttons provided to increase or decrease the upper threshold value
as required.
167
The User Interface
o Offset (option check box) - If this option is selected then the Offset field is displayed in the
Threshold Settings area. It is used to apply an offset from the average pixel image density
in the pack image to allow for some variation between multiple objects.
o Offset (field) - Displays the current offset value. Tapping in the field displays a number of
controls, including a slider and buttons, for setting the offset value.
reduce the offset value until the objects in the image are each clearly defined by
coloured pixels.
As you increase or decrease the value, some pixel image density values will be above
or below the average pixel image density value, including the offset, and will lose their
colour, indicating that they will be not be included in the object.
Offset (field) - This field displays the current offset value which may be edited in the
Weight Calibration (area) - This area contains the following controls for setting the
checkweigh parameters:
o Points (non-editable field) - The current number of calibration points used is displayed and
also the nominal value entered for each one.
o Current Pack (field) - The nominal weight for the current pack is displayed. You can
change the value through the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the field.
o Calibration (button) - Tapping on this button initiates a Checkweigh Calibration for the
current product. The screens below show the calibration cycle before the first pack is
passed through the system and on completion, when a chequered flag is displayed.
168
The User Interface
through the system:
displayed. This number is set in the Advanced Checkweigh screen.
Current Pack - Displays the weight of the last pack passed through the system during
the learn cycle.
Standard Deviation - The standard deviation across all packs passed through the
system during the learn cycle is displayed.
CV (1x, 4x and 6x) CV stands for Coefficient of Variation, also known as relative
standard deviation (RSD). CV values express the variation as a percentage of the
mean values.are displayed.
Reset (button) - Tapping on this button resets all of the current calibration cycle results
to zero so a fresh set of values can be captured.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button stops the calibration cycle and closes the
screen.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button uses the values captured from the calibration cycle
to automatically adjust the Checkweigh minimum and maximum weight percentage
settings. You can then pass a faulty an over or underweight pack through the system to
ensure that it is rejected and that the Results box turns red.
o Refresh (button) - Tapping on this button initiates a Checkweigh Calibration (Refresh) for
the current product. The screens below show the calibration cycle after one pack is passed
through the system and on completion, when a chequered flag is displayed.
169
The User Interface
o Settings (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Advanced Checkweigh screen
which provides a number of options for weighing the current product, including selecting
the weighing mode and product nominal weight.
this can be used to check that the Checkweigh inspection has been set up correctly or to
replace the current image if it is not representative of a standard good pack.
Tapping on the button initiates a calibration cycle described in the Calibration section above.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Checkweigh screen without saving any
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Checkweigh screen and
Weight Mode Selection
The X5 X-ray Inspection System can operate in a number of weighing modes to meet customer
requirements and these are described below. The weight mode to be used by the system is selected
from options provided in the Advanced Checkweigh screen.
170
The User Interface
Average Weight Mode
In this mode the system calculates and displays the rolling average pack weight for a batch until the
batch is complete. The statistical reports generated will utilise the Average Weight data recorded.
In Average Weight mode, in accordance with current average weight legislation, a specific number of
packs in a batch, based on the batch size, may weigh less than the Nominal weight that is printed on
the product packaging.
The tolerance below the stated Nominal Weight within which the European governments permits a
limited number of packs to be included in a batch is known as the Tolerable Negative Error (TNE).
This utilises two pack weights, called T1 and T2, which are calculated automatically by the system
and effectively create two weight zones into which underweight packs may fall.
T1 - This is the TNE value, calculated as being 2.5% less than the Nominal weight, which
creates a zone that covers pack weights from the Nominal weight down to the calculated T1
weight. Any packs falling within this zone will be passed by the system as acceptable, though
the average pack weight for the batch must exceed the stated nominal weight.
T2 - This is twice the TNE value, calculated as being 5% less than the Nominal weight, which
creates a zone that covers pack weights from the calculated T1 weight down to the calculated
T2 weight.
The number of packs in a batch that fall between the T1 and T2 weights which may be passed
by the system as acceptable is based on weights and measure legislation and are shown in the
table below.
Pack falling below the Tu2 weight are rejected by the system as being underweight. The Low
Reject weight value in the Product Settings screen cannot therefore be set lower than the T2
weight.
T1 / T2 Allowance
Number or packs in the Number of packs allowed between T1

batch and T2
2 to 8 packs 0 packs
9 to 20 packs 1 pack
When you select Checkweigh inspection for a product, the nominal product weight is entered in the
Checkweigh screen and a calibration cycle then initiated for the system to learn the product. The
system then automatically calculates the applicable T1 and T2 weights for you, based on the table
shown below, which are then fixed for the product unless the nominal weight is changed.
171
The User Interface
Total Negative Error (TNE) Calculation Chart
% of Nominal
Nominal Weight (g) Grams
Weight
From 5 to 50 9
From 51 to 100 4.5
From 101 to 200 4.5
From 201 to 300 9
From 301 to 500 3
From 501 to 1,000 15
From 1,001 to 10,000 1.5
From 10,001 to 15,000 150
Above 15,000
Minimum Weight Mode
In this mode the system uses the Nominal Weight as the minimum acceptable weight for each pack in
a batch. The Low Reject rate value in the Advanced Checkweigh screen is therefore set to the
Nominal Weight.
Although in Minimum Weight mode, in accordance with current average weight legislation, no packs
in a batch may weigh less than the Nominal weight that is printed on the product packaging, you may
wish to reject packs that exceed an overweight limit to avoid giving away to much product. This is
particularly useful where the product may be added back into the production line at an earlier stage.
To facilitate this, a High Reject weight value can be set in the Advanced Checkweigh screen.
Advanced Checkweigh
Purpose
The Advanced Checkweigh screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Settings' button in the Checkweigh
screen.
The screen provides advanced options for firstly setting the weighing mode and then the parameters,
which are used to identify over and underweight products so that they may be rejected. See Weight
Mode Selection for further details.
Screen Contents
172
The User Interface
Advanced (area) - This area contains the following options:
o Average Weight (option radio button) - Selecting this option means that the system will
use Average Weight mode for weighing products. The options available in the 'Settings'
area will reflect this.
o Minimum Weight (option radio button) - Selecting this option means that the system will
use Minimum Weight mode for weighing products. the options available in the 'Settings'
area will reflect this.
o Use Box Remover (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the Checkweigh
inspection will include the Box Remover tool, provided it has been enabled and configured.
Financial (area) - This area contains a field in which number representing the object cost per
weight unit can be entered through the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the field. The
currency and weight units (metric or imperial) are set in the Advanced System Settings screen.
Calibration (area) - This area contains options for setting the calibration parameters to be
used.
o Packs (field) - The number of packs to be used when performing a calibration is displayed.
Generally the more packs that are used the better the calibration will be. Tapping in the
field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new number may be entered.
o Points (non-editable field) - Displays the current number of calibration points being used.
o Offset (field) - Displays the offset applied to the calibration, based on actual weight against
the system calculated weight, to ensure that the weight displayed and used by the system
is as accurate as possible.
o Lock calibration (option check box) - This option can be enabled once calibration has
been completed. When selected, calibration points cannot be added or removed. Only a
Refresh calibration may be performed.
o Compensation (%) (field) - Displays the weight compensation percentage used by the
system. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new
value may be entered.
o Zoom (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Checkweigh Calibration screen which
provides a graphical representation of the lower, nominal and upper product weights.
173
The User Interface
o Reset (button) - Tapping on this button removes all currently defined calibration points. A
new calibration will then be required.
Settings (area) - This area contains a set of object weight parameters for configuration, based
on the weight mode selected in the 'Advanced' area.
o Average Weight
With the Average Weight mode selected the following parameters are displayed:
Nominal (field) - Displays the average product weight, including the packing. The value
can be changed through the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the field.
option has been selected. The value can be changed through the pop-up numeric
keypad by tapping in the field.
Tu1 (field) - Displays the weight automatically calculated by the system from the
nominal weight as Average Weight mode is selected.
Tu2 (field) - Displays the weight automatically calculated by the system from the
nominal weight as Average Weight mode is selected.
Target (field) - Displays the target product weight, including the packing. The value can
be changed through the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the field
Tare (field) - Displays the weight of the product packing which is subtracted from each
pack before showing the final weight of the product. The default value is set to zero but
it can be changed through the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the field.
Auto Set (button) - Tap on this button to update the calculated field values based on
the nominal, target and tare weights entered.
o Minimum Weight
With the Minimum Weight mode selected the following parameters are displayed:
Nominal (field) - Displays the average product weight, including the packing. The value
can be changed through the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the field.
174
The User Interface
option has been selected. The value can be changed through the pop-up numeric
keypad by tapping in the field.
Low (field) - Displays the lowest acceptable object weight, including the packing.
Object weighing below this value will be rejected. The value can be changed through
the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the field.
Target (field) - Displays the target product weight, including the packing. The value can
be changed through the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the field
Tare (field) - Displays the weight of the product packing which is subtracted from each
pack before showing the final weight of the product. The default value is set to zero but
it can be changed through the pop-up numeric keypad by tapping in the field.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Checkweigh screen without
saving any changes made in the screen. The Checkweigh screen is displayed.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes made in the Advanced Checkweigh
screen and then closes the screen. The Checkweigh screen is displayed.
I/O (Rejects)
The I/O (Rejects) tab of the Product Settings screen is used to set up the available reject outputs.
These are described in the sections listed below.
Timing
Reject timing settings determine when a rejected device operates to remove a bad pack from
the production line. This is based on the distance that the rejected pack needs to travel along
the conveyor to be in the correct position for the reject device to remove it from the line and the
time that the device should operate for to ensure that the rejection is successful. Two outputs
are provided and their timing settings are configured separately to accommodate dual rejects
per lane. This section includes information covering the timing options available for
configuration.
Events
For any of the inspection tools that have been enabled and set up for use with a product, any
packs that are rejected for failing one or a number of specific inspections can be directed to
either of the two outputs provided. For example, by directing contaminant rejects to Output 1
and rejects that fail the product integrity inspection to Output 2, you could possibly reprocess
the Output 2 rejects depending on the product type. This section provides further details.
Settings
To prevent excessive product wastage you may wish to stop inspection after a specified
number of packs are rejected in a minute or a specified number of packs are rejected
consecutively so that an investigation can determine the cause and resolve it. In addition the
spacing or pitch between packs can be monitored to ensure that the system captures each
product image individually. This section provides information covering the available settings.
PVS
Global PVS settings are configured in the PVS screen which are then applied for use with all
products. The PVS options in the I/O (Rejects) tab are specifically for the currently selected
product and include selection of contaminant types and sizes to be used for PV tests. This
section provides further details.
175
The User Interface
Reports
Batch and Shift reports can be configured to be generated and automatically sent to the
networked LomaEnet PC. This section provides further information covering the available
report options.
Timing
Purpose
The Timing options are displayed by tapping on the 'Timing' button in the I/O (Rejects) tab of the
The options provided allow you to configure when the reject devices operate.
Screen Contents
The Timing option screen provides the following options for configuring operation of the reject
devices:
Timing (area) - This area contains the following:
o Output (number) - Multiple reject devices can potentially included in a system as multiple
tools can be configured to inspect products against different parameters . For example,
you may wish to reject contaminated products first into one reject bin and then reject
underweight or overweight products into a separate reject bin. For this reason two Output
rows are provided with the following options for each row:
Distance (mm) (field) - This field displays the distance in millimetres from the centre of
the x-ray cabinet to the point where the reject device will operate. Tapping in the field
displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new value may be entered.
Duration (ms) (field) - This field displays the duration in milliseconds that the system
allows for a rejected product to be removed from the conveyor by the reject device.
Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new value
may be entered.
Confirm (option check box) - Select this option if you wish the system to confirm that a
rejected product has entered the reject bin. This feature requires that an additional
photo-eye (PEC) is fitted across the reject bin entrance.
Bin Full (option check box) - Select this option if you wish the system to stop and
report a fault when the reject bin is full and cannot accommodate any further rejected
products. This allows you to empty the reject bin before clearing the fault and restarting
176
The User Interface
the system. This feature requires that an additional photo-eye is fitted inside the reject
bin.
o Timing (Advanced) (area) - This area contains the following:
Reject Confirm Time (ms) (field) - This field displays the time duration between a
reject being triggered by the system and the rejected product entering the reject bin. If
this time is exceeded then the system will stop to prevent the rejected product from
being passed through the system.
Bin Full Time (s) (field) - This field displays the time duration between the bin sensor
detecting that it is full and the system stopping and a fault being generated.
Line Block (option check box) - This optional feature requires that a photo-eye (PEC)
is fitted to the outfeed of the machine to detect any blockage of products exiting the
system.
Line Block Time (s) (field) - If the Line Block option is selected, this field displays the
time duration for the photo-eye to be active before the system stops and a fault is
generated.
Events
Purpose
The Events options are displayed by tapping on the 'Events' button in the I/O (Rejects) tab of the
The options provided allow you to select the inspection tool types to be used by each of the two
Outputs available in the Timing options.
Screen Contents
The Event option screen provides the following options:
Events (area) - This area contains a table containing a row each for the Mask, Contaminants
and Product Integrity inspection tools and option check boxes for selecting either the Output 1
or Output 2 settings to be used for each one.
So for example, if Output 1 is being used to reject contaminated products then you would select
the Output 1 option check box in the Contaminants row. Or if you were only using one reject
device to remove all rejects then you would select Output 1 for all of the inspection tools being
used.
177
The User Interface
Settings
Purpose
The Settings options are displayed by tapping on the 'Settings' button in the I/O (Rejects) tab of the
The options provided allow you to configure additional options for rejecting products.
Screen Contents
The Settings option screen provides the following options:
o Excess Rejects (rpm) (field) - This field displays the maximum number of rejects of the
current product that the system will allow in a minute before it automatically stops. This
allows you to investigate and resolve the cause before further products are rejected.
Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new value may
be entered.
o Consecutive Rejects (field) - This field displays the maximum number of consecutive
rejects of the current product that the system will allow before it automatically stops. This
allows you to investigate and resolve the cause before further products are rejected.
be entered.
Pack Pitch (area) This are provides a useful feature for measuring the distance between
packs. The Pack Pitch is set to the expected average distance between packs and the Zone
Width to the required resolution for the monitor. A histogram of actual pack pitches will then be
built up on the screen. This is helpful in diagnosing probelms with pack presentation. The area
contains the following:
o Monitor (option check box) - Selecting the option enables the controls listed and
described below for monitoring the pack pitch. Under normal option is not enabled.
Pack Pitch (mm) (field) - This field displays the distance in millimetres from the leading
edge of a pack to the leading edge of the following pack. This provides a measurement
of distance between packs for the system to monitor. Tapping in the field displays the
pop-up numeric keypad through which a new value may be entered.
Zone Width (mm) (field) - This field displays the zone width in millimetres. Tapping in
the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new value may be
entered.
178
The User Interface
o Min Pack Pitch (mm) (option check box and field) - Selecting the option enables the field
which displays the minimum permissible distance in millimetres from the leading edge of a
pack to the leading edge of the following pack. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up
numeric keypad through which a new value may be entered.
PVS
Purpose
The PVS options are displayed by tapping on the 'PVS' button in the I/O (Rejects) tab of the Product
Settings screen.
When the system is inspecting products, a PV test can be initiated by tapping on the Test button in
the Main Run screen. The system then waits for a short period, approximately 20 seconds, during
which a reject pack must be detected in order for the test to pass. This will confirm that all settings are
correct and the system is operating satifactorily. A screen prompt will pop up to inform of the result of
the test.
The PVS options provided allow you to enter sizes for specific contaminant types that the system
must be able to detect to pass the test.
Screen Contents
The PVS options screen provides the following options:
o Metal (mm) (option check box and field) - Selecting this option enables its field which
displays the size in millimetres of the smallest metal contaminant that must be detected
during a PV test. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which a
new value may be entered.
o Glass (mm) (option check box and field) - Selecting this option enables its field which
displays the size in millimetres of the smallest glass contaminant that must be detected
o Ceramic (mm) (option check box and field) - Selecting this option enables its field which
displays the size in millimetres of the smallest ceramic contaminant that must be detected
o Other (option check box and field) - Selecting this option enables its field which displays
the name of another contaminant that you wish to detect in products. Tapping in the field
displays the pop-up keyboard through which the contaminant name may be entered.
179
The User Interface
o False Threshold (field) - This field displays the threshold offset to be used to compensate
for any system noise that may cause false triggering; rejecting good packs that do not
contain a contaminant.
Reports
Purpose
The Reports options are displayed by tapping on the 'Reports' button in the I/O (Rejects) tab of the
The screen provides options for enabling the generation of shift reports and the use of trace codes.
Screen Contents
The Reports option screen provides the following:
Shift Reports (area) - This area provides the following options:
o Enable (option check box) - Tapping in the check box selects / deselects the generation of
shift reports.
o Pack Count (field) - This field displays the number of packs that will trigger the end of a
current shift report and the start of a new shift report. Note that all packs are counted
towards this total, including accepted and rejected packs. To edit the number, tap in the
field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and enter the required number.
Batch Reports (area) - This area provides the following options:
o Enable (option check box) - Tapping in the check box selects / deselects the generation of
batch reports.
o Batch Size (field) - This field displays the number of packs that will trigger the end of a
current batch report and the start of a new batch report. Note that all packs are counted
towards this total, including accepted and rejected packs. To edit the number, tap in the
o Advanced (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Advanced Batch Report Settings
field which provides further options for selection.
Checkweigh Settings (area) - This area displays the following options:
o Trend Average (field) - This field displays a value which is used to calculate the Trend
graph on the 'Checkweigh' tab in the Statistics screen.
180
The User Interface
Use a large value to track production variations more slowly. This will be more stable to
the occasional pack that has a very low or very high pack weight.
Use a small value to track production variations more quickly. This will give a faster
feedback on the production trend, but will also be less stable to packs that have a very low
or very high pack weight.
To edit the number tap in the field to display a pop-up numeric keypad and enter the
required number
o Weight Feedback (option check box) - With this option selected the trend average weight,
defined by the Trend Average value, will be downloaded to the PLC. If the trend average is
less than 800.0g then the format will show the decimal number.
For example, if the trend average is 254.7g then '2547' will be written to the PLC. If the
trend average is greater than 800.0g then the format will not show a decimal number. For
example, if the trend average is 1023.6g then '1024' will be written to the PLC.
System Settings
Purpose
The System Settings screen is displayed by tapping on the 'System Settings' button in the GoTo
screen.
The purpose of the screen is to provide access to the advanced system features so that their related
settings can be configured as required.
Screen Contents
The screen contains the following items for configuring the system settings:
Language (area) - The X5 system software can be displayed in a number of languages. This
area contains a drop down list of the available languages for selection. You can select the
languages to be included in the list by tapping on the Advanced Settings button to display the
Advanced System Settings screen, tapping on the 'Regional' icon to display the Regional
screen and then selecting the language option check boxes as required.
Software (area) - This area displays the current software version and includes an 'Update'
button. Tapping on the button initiates an upgrade of the software. See the Software Upgrades
section for further details.
Advanced (area) - This area contains the following advanced options:
o Reject Override (option check box) - This option is generally used during testing of the
system. Selecting the option means that the system will detect rejects but will not operate
181
The User Interface
the reject device to remove them into the reject bin which is useful for checking that the
system is correctly identifying rejects without having to unlock the reject bin to retrieve the
test pack.
o Advanced Settings (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Advanced System
Settings screen which provides access to a number of advanced options.
Backup (area) - This area contains the following options:
o Backup Settings (button) - Tapping on this button initiates a backup of the system
settings onto the fitted USB memory stick. If a memory stick is not available then a
message dialog will pop-up to inform you. A backup of the system settings is generally
carried out before a software upgrade.
o Recall Settings (button) - Tapping on this button initiates a recall of the backed up system
settings from the fitted USB memory stick. If a memory stick is not available then a
message dialog will pop-up to inform you. A recall of the system settings is generally
carried out after a software upgrade.
o Image Manager (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Image Manager screen
through which you may select any images captured by the system for saving to the fitted
USB memory stick.
Configuration (area) - This area of the screen provides a list of each system option and its
current value which enables an engineer to quickly review settings of specific interest when
diagnosing problems.
Restart (button) - Tapping on this button initiates a system restart which is recommended
when some settings have been changed.
Shut Down (button) - Tapping on this button will shut down the system.
Exit Program (button) - Tapping on this button exits the system software program and
displays the desktop screen for the system PC. A shortcut is provided on the desktop to start
the system software program.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the System Settings screen without saving any
changes made in the screen. The Main Run screen is displayed.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes and closes the screen. The Main Run
screen is displayed.
Advanced System Settings
Purpose
The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed by tapping on the 'System Settings' button in the
GoTo screen.
The purpose of the screen is to provide access to the advanced system features so that their related
settings can be configured as required.
182
The User Interface
Screen Contents
Tapping on the Access Level icon displays the Advanced Access Level screen which
enables you to set up system users and their access to system features. You may also
set the default user level to be used on system start up.
Tapping on the Images icon displays the Advanced Images screen which, through three
tabbed panes, provides options for saving images captured by the system, setting
advanced inspection options and selecting the size and shape of overlays included on
an image for Basic and Explorer tools.
Tapping on the PVS icon displays the Advanced PVS screen through which time
intervals between tests and other test parameters may be set.
Tapping on the Reports icon displays the Advanced Reports / Network screen which
provides options for configuring shift reports, LomaEnet / OPC and network connection
settings and remote control connections.
Tapping on the Statistics icon displays the Advanced Statistics screen which provides
options for selecting when to reset the statistics counters back to zero and other
statistics options.
Tapping on the Maintenance icon displays the Advanced Maintenance screen which
provides advanced options for burn-in and detector settings.
Tapping on the I/O icon displays the Advanced I/O screen which provides global settings
for inspection and rejects.
183
The User Interface
Tapping on the Regional icon displays the Advanced Regional screen through which
currency / size units, time and date formats and languages to be included for selection
are set.
Tapping on the Windows icon displays the Advanced Windows screen which provides
access to Windows system options for configuring the mouse, date/time, screen
calibration and language options.
Advanced Access Level
Purpose
The Advanced Access Level screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Access Level' icon in the
Advanced System Settings screen.
The screen provides options for you to set up system users and their access to system features. You
may also set the default user level to be used on system start up
Screen Contents
The Advanced Access Level screen provides the following:
Setup (area) - This area includes a drop down list that provides the following options for
selection:
o Users - Selecting this option displays a 'Users' area in the screen.
184
The User Interface
The 'Users' area contains the following:
User Accounts (table) - The table displays the name, access level and password for
all currently enabled users.
Add New User (button) - Tapping on this button opens the User (New) screen shown
below through which a new user can be added.
Edit User (button) - Tapping on this button opens the Edit User screen through which
the selected users details can be edited.
Delete User (button) - Tapping on this button opens the Delete User screen through
which you can confirm or cancel deletion of the selected user.
o Start - Selecting this option displays a 'Start User' area in the screen.
The 'Start User' area contains a drop down list that includes all of the currently enabled
user names and a 'None' option. When the system starts up the selected user will be
automatically logged in. Selecting the 'None' option means that you will need to log into the
system through the Access Level screen before starting product inspection.
185
The User Interface
o Pack Count (field) - This field displays the number of packs that will trigger the end of a
current shift report and the start of a new shift report. Note that all packs are counted
towards this total, including accepted and rejected packs. To edit the number tap in the
o Configuration - Selecting this option displays an 'Access Level: Configuration' area in the
screen.
The 'Access Level: Configuration' area contains the following:
User Types (drop down list) - The list displays the available user types of Operator,
Supervisor, Quality and Engineer for selection.
Set Defaults (button) - Tapping on this resets the access options for the currently
selected user type to their default values.
Diagnostics (button) - Tapping on this button displays the 'Diagnostics' area in the
screen which contains option check boxes for selecting access to the Basic, General
and Advanced diagnostics screens for the selected user type.
The option check boxes displayed can have a number of statuses depending on the
user type selected to provide some flexibility in configuring screen access. These are
'automatically selected and not editable', automatically selected and editable', 'not
selected and editable' and 'not selected and not editable'.
186
The User Interface
Statistics (button) - Tapping on this button displays the 'Statistics' area in the screen
which contains option check boxes for selecting access to the Basic, Reset, General
and Advanced statistics screens for the selected user type.
System Settings (button) - Tapping on this button displays the 'System Settings' area
in the screen which contains option check boxes for selecting access to the Basic,
Configuration, Backup and Advanced system settings screens for the selected user
type.
Product Settings (button) - Tapping on this button displays the 'Product Settings' area
in the screen which contains option check boxes for selecting access to the Basic and
Advanced product settings screens for the selected user type.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Access Level screen without
saving any changes. The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed.
187
The User Interface
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves and applies any changes made in the Advanced
Access Level screen and then closes it. The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed.
Advanced Images
Purpose
The Advanced Images screen is displayed tapping on the 'Images' icon in the Advanced System
Settings screen.
Through three tabbed panes, the screen provides options for saving images captured by the system,
setting advanced inspection options and selecting the size and shape of overlays included on an
image for Basic and Explorer tools.
Screen Contents
The Advanced Images screen provides the following:
Save
The Save tab contains the following for configuring options for saving images:
o Images (area) - This are contains the following:
Save Source Images (option check box and field) - Selecting this option enables the
field which displays the number of available source images to be saved. This defaults
to 20 but can be edited by tapping in the field to display the pop-up numeric keypad.
You can easily check the number of source images available by navigating to the
Image Manager screen.
Low Quality Image (JPG) (option check box) - As standard images are saved as large,
high quality BITMAP files. Selecting this option saves the images as small, low quality
JPEG files. You should always save the files as BITMAPs if they are to be used for
analysis purposes.
Save Reject Images (option check box and field) - Selecting this option enables the
field which displays the number of available reject images to be saved. This defaults to
60 but can be edited by tapping in the field to display the pop-up numeric keypad. You
can easily check the number of reject images available by navigating to the Image
Manager screen.
Save Reject-Source (option check box) - Selecting this option means that you will
save the reject and source images.
188
The User Interface
USB Stick (field) - This field displays the drive letter to which the files are to be saved.
By default this is the F:\ drive for a connected USB memory stick but it can be changed
by tapping in the field to display the pop-up keyboard
o Network Images (area) - This area contains the following:
Save (drop down list) - The list displays options for selecting what images are saved to
the chosen network drive. Options of None, Reject and All are provided.
Save by Date (option check box) - This option is selected by default and is not editable.
The selected images are saved in date order.
Save by Hour (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the images are
saved in date and then hour order.
Network Drive (field) - This field displays the network drive letter to which the files are
to be saved. By default this is the Z:\ drive but it can be changed by tapping in the field
to display the pop-up keyboard.
Inspection
The Inspection tab contains the following for configuring options for inspecting images:
o Inspection (area) - This are contains the following:
Rotate Images (option check box) - Selecting this option rotates each image to the
right by 90 degrees when it is saved, effectively changing it from a portrait to landscape
image.
Display: All Images (option radio button) - Selecting this option means that all images
will be displayed in the Main Run screen as they are captured.
Reject Images (option radio button) - Selecting this option means that only reject
images will be displayed in the Main Run screen as they are captured.
Reject Image Hold Time (s) (field) - This field displays the time in seconds that each
image is displayed in the Main Run screen. Note that the field is disabled and cannot
be edited if the Reject Images option is selected.
o Blanking (Fixed) (area) - This area provides the following controls for excluding any blank
space around the product on the saved image files. Normally this is space to the left and
right of the product but if the 'Rotate Images' option is selected then there is space above
189
The User Interface
and below the product. To set the areas to be blanked out on each image the following
controls are provided:
Left (option check box and field) - Selecting this option enables its field which displays
a number representing a width in pixels, starting from the left of the image, that can be
blanked out. By default this is set to zero but tapping in the field displays the pop-up
numeric keypad through which the value can be changed.
Right (option check box and field) - Selecting this option enables its field which
displays a number representing a width in pixels, starting from the right of the image,
that can be blanked out. By default this is set to zero but tapping in the field displays
the pop-up numeric keypad through which the value can be changed.
When the 'Rotate Images' option is selected in the 'Inspection' area the two controls
described above are replaced with the following controls:
Top (option check box and field) - Selecting this option enables its field which displays
a number representing a depth in pixels, starting from the top of the image, that can be
blanked out. By default this is set to zero but tapping in the field displays the pop-up
numeric keypad through which the value can be changed.
Bottom (option check box and field) - Selecting this option enables its field which
displays a number representing a depth in pixels, starting from the bottom of the image,
that can be blanked out. By default this is set to zero but tapping in the field displays
the pop-up numeric keypad through which the value can be changed.
o Mass Flow (area) - This area provides the following options for saving images when
inspecting in Mass Flow mode:
Image Length (mm) (field) - This field is required for Mass Flow mode as multiple
products are constantly passing through the system, so separate images for each
product will not be captured. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad
through which a new length can be entered.
Show Reject Lanes (option check box) - Selecting this option means that each lane
will be separately displayed in the image.
o Image Optimisation (Auto Set) (area) - This area displays values for each of the image
optimisation parameters that were automatically set during a product calibration cycle or
manually set through the Image Optimisation screen.
Reset (button) - Tapping on this button resets all of the Image Optimisation parameter
values back to their defaults.
190
The User Interface
Custom
The Custom tab contains the following for configuring the shape and size of the overlays
included in the images rejected against parameters set in the Basic and Explorer inspection
tools:
o Custom (Overlay) (area) - This are contains the following:
Inspection Tool (drop down list) - The Basic 1, Basic 2, Explorer 1 and Explorer 2
inspection tools are listed for selection. The other controls contained in this area are
then used to set options specifically for the selected tool.
Each tool being used can be selected in order and its options configured. The colour of
the overlay is different for each of the tools so that the tool responsible for rejecting a
product can be easily identified.
Overlay Shape (drop down list) - The list provides options of Rectangle, Cross
(Orthogonal), Cross (Diagonal) and Ellipse shapes to be used by the selected
inspection tool.
Overlay Size (field) - This field sets the size of the space in pixels around the
contaminant to be bounded by the selected overlay shape. The default size is 3 but this
can be changed by tapping in the field to display the pop-up numeric keypad and
entering a new value.
Note that any selections and changes made in this area are implemented on the sample
image shown in the 'Zoom (Overlay)' area so that you can view your selections before
saving and applying them.
o Custom (logo) (area) - This area contains the following:
Load (button and image) - The currently selected image is displayed. To select another
image file, tap on the button to display the New Product Image file browser dialog. Then
navigate to and select the image file which must be a BMP or JPG file. If the file is
contained on a fitted USB memory stick then this is displayed as the F: drive in My
Computer.
o Zoom (Overlay) (area) - This area provides a sample image that shows the selections
made in the 'Custom (Overlay)' area implemented onto the image so that they may be
reviewed before being saved and applied.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Images screen without saving
any changes. The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed.
191
The User Interface
Images screen and then closes it. The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed.
Advanced PVS
Purpose
The Advanced PVS screen is displayed tapping on the 'PVS' icon in the Advanced System Settings
screen.
The screen provides global options for you to set up how the product verification test process
operates for all products for which it is being used.
Screen Contents
The Advanced PVS screen provides the following:
Interval (area) - This area includes the following options for selecting the time intervals
between PV tests:
o Contaminant (min) (option check box and field) - Selecting this option enables its field
which displays the time interval in minutes between PV tests where the Contaminant
inspection tools are being used. Tapping in the field pops-up the numeric keypad through
which the time interval may be changed.
o Survey (h) (option check box and field) - Selecting this option enables its field which
displays the time interval in hours between radiation surveys. Tapping in the field pops-up
the numeric keypad through which the time interval may be changed.
o PVS Timeout (min) (option check box and field) - Selecting this option enables its field
which displays the time interval in minutes before a scheduled PV test times out and
generates a fault. Tapping in the field pops-up the numeric keypad through which the time
interval may be changed.
Tests (area) - This area includes options for setting the following PV test parameters:
o Duration (s) (field) - This field displays the time interval in seconds that a reject pack must
detected by the system in order for the PV test to pass. Tapping in the field pops-up the
numeric keypad through which the time interval may be changed.
o Verification Packs (field) - This field displays the number of packs, for each contaminant
type/size selected in the I/O (Rejects) tab of the Product Settings screen, that need to be
passed through the system and detected as rejects for the test to pass. Tapping in the field
pops-up the numeric keypad through which the number of packs may be changed.
192
The User Interface
o Exit (Auto) (s) (drop down list) - This list displays a number of time intervals in seconds
that the system will display the PV test results screen before it is closed.
o Add audit trail to PVS report (option check box) - Selecting this option adds an audit trail
details to the PVS report.
o Include PVS tests on batch report (option check box) - Selecting this option includes
PVS test details onto batch reports.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced PVS screen without saving any
changes. The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed.
PVS screen and then closes it. The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed.
Advanced Reports / Network
Purpose
The Advanced Reports / Network screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Reports' icon in the
Advanced System Settings screen.
The screen provides options for configuring shift reports, LomaEnet / OPC and network connection
settings and remote control connections.
Screen Contents
The Advanced Reports / Network screen provides the following:
Setup (area) - This area includes a drop down list that provides the following options for
selection:
o Shift Reports - Selecting this option displays a 'Shift Reports' area in the screen.
The 'Shift Reports' area contains the following:
Enable (option check box) - Selecting this option enables the options in this area.
193
The User Interface
Duration (field) - The field displays the current shift time duration in minutes and
seconds. Tapping on the 'Up' and 'Down' arrows to the right of the field will increase or
decrease the duration.
Start Time (field) - The field displays the current shift start time in the 24 hour format.
Tapping on the 'Up' and 'Down' arrows to the right of the field will increase or decrease
the start time.
o LomaEnet / OPC - Selecting this option displays 'LomaEnet' and 'OPC' areas in the
screen.
The 'LomaEnet' area contains the following:
Enable (option check box) - Selecting this option enables the options in this area.
Remote Host (fields) - The IP address of the remote PC on which the LomaEnet
application is installed is displayed. This may be edited by tapping in each field to
display the pop-up numeric keypad and entering an appropriate value.
Port (field) - The port number being used to communicate with the remote LomaEnet
PC is displayed. This may be edited by tapping in the field to display the pop-up
numeric keypad and entering an appropriate value.
o Network - Selecting this option displays the 'Network' area in the screen.
The 'Network' area contains the following:
Mode (drop down list) - This list provides options of None, Test, MODBUS TCP,
Phoenix Contact and Simple Text for selecting the message protocol to be used. The
other options enabled in this area depend on the Mode option selected.
Remote Host (fields) - The IP address of the remote PC is displayed. This is set in the
'LomaEnet' area and is not editable here.
194
The User Interface
Port (field) - The port number being used to communicate with the remote PC is
displayed. This may be edited by tapping in the field to display the pop-up numeric
keypad and entering an appropriate value.
Start / Stop / Fault (buttons) - Depending on the Mode selected, the characters to be
used for Start, Stop and Fault commands in messages can be set by tapping on a
button to display either the pop-up keyboard or numeric keypad and entering the
applicable character or number.
o Remote Control - Selecting this option displays the 'Remote Control' area in the screen.
The 'Remote Control' area contains the following:
Enable (option check box) - Selecting this option enables the option in this area.
Connections (table) - This table displays the IP address, password and name of each
remotely connected PC being used to remotely control the system.
Remote Host (fields) - The IP address of the remote PC selected in the table is
displayed. This may be edited by tapping in each field to display the pop-up numeric
keypad and entering an appropriate value.
Password (option check box and field) - Selecting this option enables its field which
displays the connection password used for the remote PC selected in the 'Remote
Host' table. This may be edited by tapping in the field to display the pop-up keyboard
and entering an appropriate password.
Name (field) - This field displays the name given to the connection for the remote PC
selected in the 'Remote Host' table. This may be edited by tapping in the field to display
the pop-up keyboard and entering an appropriate name.
Reset (button) - Tapping on this button resets the Remote Host, Password and Name
fields to their default values so that they may be re-entered.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Reports / Network screen
without saving any changes. The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed.
Reports / Network screen and then closes it. The Advanced System Settings screen is
displayed.
195
The User Interface
Advanced Statistics
Purpose
The Advanced Statistics screen is displayed tapping on the 'Statistics' icon in the Advanced System
Settings screen.
The screen provides global options for selecting when to reset the statistics counters back to zero and
other statistics options.
Screen Contents
The Advanced Statistics screen provides the following:
Reset? (area) - This area includes the following options for selecting when the statistics
counters will be reset to zero:
o Recall (option check box) - Selecting this option means that when the backed up system
settings are recalled from the attached USB memory stick through the System Settings
screen, the statistics counters will be reset to zero.
o Remote Product Change (option check box) - Selecting this option means that when a
command is received by the system from a remotely connected PC to change the product
being isnpected, the statistics counters will be reset to zero.
Settings (area) - This area includes the following settings for other statistics:
o Reset checkweigh statistics (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the
checkweigh statistics counters will reset to zero following a product change, system
settings recall or the system being shut down.
o Display Latest Weights (option check box) The latest weights are displayed.
o Loose object statistics (option check box) Loose object statistics are displayed.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Statistics screen without saving
Statistics screen and then closes it. The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed.
196
The User Interface
Advanced Maintenance
Purpose
The Advanced Maintenance screen is displayed tapping on the 'Maintenance' icon in the Advanced
System Settings screen.
The screen provides advanced options for selecting how and when automated system maintenance is
to be carried out, advised to operators thorugh automated system prompts. This screen is generally
therefore only for Loma Engineer use. Please consult your local Loma Service Centre before making
any changes to the settings in this screen.
Screen Contents
The Advanced Maintenance screen provides the following:
Burn In (area) - Burn in is effectively controlling the power being applied to the glass X-ray
tube so that it 'warms up' gradually, especially important if the system has not been used for a
number of weeks, to prevent any damage to the tube. The system will automatically detect a
requirement for this to be done and display an advisory message to the operator.
The 'Burn In' area includes options for selecting the initial and final values of the voltage and
current applied to the X-ray tube from start up to working values, including the number, value
and time duration required for each incremental step to reach the working values.
o kV (fields) - Start, Stop and Step fields are provided which display the initial voltage to be
applied to the X-ray tube (Start), the working voltage (Stop) and the voltage ramp up
values from the initial up to the working voltage (Step).
o mA (fields) - Start, Stop and Step fields are provided which display the initial current to be
applied to the X-ray tube (Start), the working current (Stop) and the current ramp up values
from the initial up to the working current (Step).
o Step Time (s) (field) - This field displays the time duration (Step) between each increase
in the voltage or current being applied to the X-ray tube as they ramp up to full working
values.
o Total Time (non-editable field) - This field displays the total time required to 'Burn In' the
X-ray tank, based on the values entered for the other parameters in this area.
Detector (area) - This area includes the following settings for calibration of the system:
o Calibration Required (days) (field) - This field displays the maximum time interval in days
between system calibrations. If no other calibrations have been carried out within this time
interval then the system will automatically initiate a calibration process.
197
The User Interface
o Calibrate (Starting Inspection) (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the
system will automatically initiate a calibration each time you start inspecting products.
o Calibrate (Inspection) (drop down list) - You can also initiate a system calibration during
product inspection based on a specified time interval. The drop down list provides options
of Disabled, 30min, 1hr, 2hrs, 3hrs, 4hrs and 8hrs for selection.
o Compensation (option check box) - Selecting this option enables the following controls for
adding offset values:
Offset (Left) (field) - This filed displays the offset value. Tapping in the field displays
the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new value may be entered.
Offset (Right) (field) - This filed displays the offset value. Tapping in the field displays
the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new value may be entered.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Maintenance screen without
saving any changes. The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed.
Maintenance screen and then closes it. The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed.
Advanced I/O
Purpose
The Advanced I/O screen is displayed by tapping on the 'I/O' icon in the Advanced System Settings
screen.
The screen provides some global settings for inspection and rejects.
Screen Contents
The Advanced I/O screen provides the following:
Inspection (area) - This area provides the following inspection options for configuration:
o Inspection Off Delay (s) (field) - This field displays the delay time in seconds. Tapping in
the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which a new value may be entered.
o Conveyor Timeout (s) (field) - This field displays the conveyor timeout in seconds.
be entered.
Rejects (area) - This area includes the following reject options for configuration:
198
The User Interface
o Reject Distance (mm) (field) - This field displays the distance in millimetres that a reject
pack has to travel to reach the point where the reject device will activate to remove it from
the production line.
o Reject Duration (ms) (field) - This field display the time duration in milliseconds for which
the reject device will operate to ensure that the non-conforming pack is removed from the
production line.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced I/O screen without saving any
changes. The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed.
I/O screen and then closes it. The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed.
Advanced Regional
Purpose
The Advanced Regional screen is displayed tapping on the 'Regional' icon in the Advanced System
Settings screen.
The screen provides controls for selecting some global system settings including the language, the
currency and size units and the time and date formats to be used.
Screen Contents
The Advanced Regional provides the following:
Units (area) - This area provides the following options for setting the system units:
o Financial (drop down list) - This list displays a number of currency symbols and
abbreviations for selection. The selected currency is then used and displayed by the
system.
o Display Imperial (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the system will use
and display imperial weight and measurement units instead of the default metric units.
Time (area) - This area includes the following options for setting the system time format:
o 24-hr (option radio button) - Selecting this option means that the system will display all
times in 24-hr format. E.g. 21:00:23.
o AM/PM (option radio button) - Selecting this option means that the system will display all
times in AM/PM format. E.g. 9:02:58 AM.
199
The User Interface
o Current Time (non-editable field) - This field displays the current time in the selected
format.
Date (area) - This area includes the following options for setting the system date format:
o D/M/Y (option radio button) - Selecting this option means that the system will display all
dates in D/M/Y format. E.g. 29/May/2015.
o Y/M/D (option radio button) - Selecting this option means that the system will display all
times in Y/M/D format. E.g. 2015/05/29.
o M/D/Y (option radio button) - Selecting this option means that the system will display all
times in M/D/Y format. E.g. May/29/2015.
o Current Date (non-editable field) - This field displays the current date in the selected
format.
Language (area) - This area includes the following options for setting the system language:
o Country Flags - A number of country flags / names are displayed and an option check
box is provided for selecting each one. All selected languages (country names) are then
made available for selection in the Language drop down list in the System Settings screen.
o None (button) - This button is enabled if any language option check boxes are selected.
Tapping on the button removes any language options selected.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Regional screen without saving
Regional screen and then closes it. The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed.
Advanced Windows
Purpose
The Advanced Windows screen is displayed tapping on the 'Windows' icon in the Advanced System
Settings screen.
The screen provides access to Windows operating system options for configuring the mouse,
date/time, screen calibration and language options.
Screen Contents
The Advanced Windows screen provides the following:
200
The User Interface
Control Panel (area) - This area provides the following options for setting the Windows
options:
o Mouse (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Windows operating system Mouse
Properties dialog, generally accessed via the Control Panel, through which you may select
and configure the mouse options.
o Date/Time (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Windows operating system Date
and Time Properties dialog, generally accessed via the Control Panel, through which you
may select and configure the operating system date and time options.
o Calibrate (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Windows operating system screen
Options dialog, generally accessed via the Control Panel, through which you may select
and configure the operating system screen options, including calibrating the touch screen.
201
The User Interface
o Language Options (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Windows operating
system Regional and Language Options dialog, generally accessed via the Control Panel,
through which you may select and configure the operating system screen regional options,
languages and advanced options.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Advanced Windows screen without saving
Windows screen and then closes it. The Advanced System Settings screen is displayed.
202
The User Interface
Image Manager
Purpose
The Image Manager screen is displayed tapping on the 'Image Manager' button in the System
Settings screen.
The screen provides options for selecting images captured by the system for saving to the fitted USB
memory stick.
Screen Contents
The Image Manager screen provides the following:
Product (drop down list) - A list of the available products set up in the system is displayed for
selection.
Image Type (drop down list) - A list of different image types is provided for selection which are
described below:
o Reject - Selecting this option displays all of the reject images captured by the system for
the currently selected product in the 'Images' area. These can then be sorted in date/time
order and saved to the USB memory stick.
o Source - Source images are images captured for packs where the reject / pass decision
has not been made. These images can then be reviewed at a later date and even on
another system. Selecting this option displays all of the source images captured by the
system for the currently selected product in the 'Images' area. These can then be sorted in
date/time order and saved to the USB memory stick.
o Reject-Source - Reject Source images are images captured for packs where a reject
decision has been made but the image has been saved without any inspection overlays
identifying why the pack was rejected. These images can then be reviewed at a later date
and even on another system. Selecting this option displays all of the source images
captured by the system for the currently selected product in the 'Images' area. These can
then be sorted in date/time order and saved to the USB memory stick
o PVS - Selecting this option displays all of the reject images captured by the system during
PV testing for the currently selected product in the 'Images' area. These can then be
sorted in date/time order and saved to the USB memory stick.
Images (area) - This area displays images based on the selections made in the Product and
Image Type drop down lists. Option check boxes are provided for each image so that it may
be included for saving to the USB memory stick.
203
The User Interface
Selected Image (area) - This area displays the first image, based on the earliest time and
date, available for the Product and Image Type selected. below the image the date and time
that it was rejected by the system is displayed.
Selected Images (area) - This area contains options for choosing how to process the images
selected in the 'Images' area. It also displays the combined memory size for the selected
images.
o Save Date / Time (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the date and time
information is saved with each image file.
o Loma Logo (option check box) - Selecting this option includes the Loma logo image file in
the files saved onto the USB memory stick.
o All (button) - Tapping on this button selects all of the images in the 'Images' area for
saving.
o None (button) - Tapping on this button deselects any currently selected images in the
'Images' area.
o Delete (button) - Tapping on this button deletes all of the images currently selected in the
'Images' area.
o Save (button) - Tapping on this button saves all of the images currently selected in the
'Images' area onto the USB memory stick.
Search/Stop Search (button) - A search feature is provided which allows you to select a time
period during which the required image was captured, for example covering a specific shift or
part of a shift. Any images captured within the time period are then displayed in the 'Images'
area. Tapping on the Search button provides the additional controls shown in the image and
described below for selecting the required time period. The Search button toggles to Stop
Search once a search is initiated.
o Start Date (calendar control) - Tapping in the left hand field displays a calendar control for
you to select the required search start date.
o End Date (calendar control) - tapping in the right hand field displays a calendar control for
you to select the required search end date.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Image Manager and any image selections
made are not saved. The System Settings screen is displayed.
Statistics
Purpose
The Statistics screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Statistics' button in the GoTo screen.
The purpose of the screen is to provide access to system and product inspection statistical data
gathered automatically by the system. The data can be easily accessed for review and saved to a
USB memory stick if required.
Screen Contents
The Statistics screen contains the four tabbed panes listed below, which together provide access to
all available statistical data.
Totals
Checkweigh
Reports
204
The User Interface
Events
System Log
Save (button) - Tapping on this button save the statistical data selected in the screen to the
USB memory stick.
Reset (All) (button) - Tapping on this button will clear all statistics counters to zero so should
be selected with caution. The dialog shown below is displayed for you to confirm the reset
action before it is applied.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Statistics screen. The Main Run screen is
displayed.
Totals
Purpose
The Totals tab of the Statistics screen is the default tab displayed by tapping on the 'Statistics' button
in the GoTo screen.
The purpose of the screen is to provide access to totals of statistical data gathered automatically by
the system. The data can be easily accessed for review and saved to a USB memory stick if required.
Screen Contents
The Totals tab contains the four sub-tabbed panes listed below, which together provide access to all
available statistical data totals.
Current Totals
This sub tab provides current totals for accepted and rejected packs, including the totals
rejected as containing contaminants and those rejected against product integrity settings.
Inspection
This sub-tab provides inspection times and dates and totals covering pack processing times.
Rates
This sub-tab provides totals data covering the rate at which packs are being passed through
the system, the reject rate and the reject percentage against the total number of packs passed.
This information is also displayed in a graphical format.
Tests
This sub-tab provides totals for contaminant tests, including the number of tests that passed
and failed and the time of the last test.
205
The User Interface
In addition, the following buttons are displayed when the Totals tabbed pane is selected:
Save (button) - Tapping on this button save the statistical data selected in the screen to the
USB memory stick.
Reset (All) (button) - Tapping on this button will clear all statistics counters to zero so should
displayed.
Current Totals
Purpose
The Current Total sub-tab of the Totals tab in the Statistics screen provides totals for inspection data
automatically gathered by the system.
Screen Contents
The Current Totals sub-tab provides the following:
Current Totals (area) - This area displays the following totals data:
o Accepts - The total number of packs that passed inspection is displayed.
o Rejects - The total number of packs that were rejected is displayed.
Contaminants - The total number of packs rejected for containing contaminants is

displayed.
206
The User Interface
Product Integrity - The total number of packs rejected for failing product integrity
inspection is displayed.
o Totals - The total number of packs inspected, including passes and rejects, is displayed.
Note that when a pack fails one of the Contaminant tests, the product Integrity tests are
NEVER performed. Therefore the Contaminsnats and product Integrity totals should always
add up tpo the total number of packs rejected.
Contaminants (area) - This area displays the following totals data:
o Contaminants - The total number of packs rejected for containing contaminants is

displayed.
Basic 1 - The total number of packs rejected against the Basic 1 inspection tool
parameters is displayed.
Explorer 1 - The total number of packs rejected against the Basic 1 inspection tool
If the Mask, Basic 2 and Explorer 2 inspection tools are being used, packs rejected against
these tools will also be included.
Note that these numbers will typically add up to more than the total number of contaminated
rejects since a pack may fail more than one contaminant inspection tool.
Product Integrity (area) - This area displays the following totals data:
o Product Integrity - The total number of packs rejected for failing product integrity
inspection is displayed
Fill Level - The total number of packs rejected against the Fill Level inspection tool
Object Checking - The total number of packs rejected against all of the Object
Checking inspection tool parameters is displayed.
Loose Objects - The total number of packs rejected against the Loose Objects
inspection tool parameters is displayed.
Checkweigh - The total number of packs rejected against the Checkweigh inspection
tool parameters is displayed.
Objects - This area displays the following totals data:
o Object 1 - The total number of packs rejected against the Object 1 inspection tool
parameters is displayed'
Note that if the Object 2, Object 3, Object 4 inspection tools are being used, rows and
totals will be included for packs rejected against these tools.
o Loose 1 - The total number of packs rejected against the Loose 1 inspection tool
Note that if the Loose 2 tool is being used, a row and total will be included for packs
rejected against this tool.
o Checkweigh - The total number of packs rejected against the Checkweigh inspection tool
207
The User Interface
High - The total number of packs rejected as being above the maximum weight,
applicable if the Reject High option has been selected in the Advanced Checkweigh
screen, is displayed.
Low - The total number of packs rejected as being below the minimum weight is
displayed.
Inspection
Purpose
The Inspection sub-tab of the Totals tab provides inspection times and dates and totals covering pack
processing times.
Screen Contents
The Inspection sub-tab provides the following:
Inspection (area) - This area displays the following inspection information:
o Date Last Run - The date and time that the system was last run is displayed.
o Last Inspection - The date and time that the last pack was inspected is displayed.
o Last Results - The result of the last inspection, PASS or FAIL, is displayed.
Process Times (area) - This area displays the following totals data:
o Packs - The total number of packs inspected is displayed.
o Process Time (ms) - The total time in milliseconds taken to process all the packs is
displayed. It is important to monitor this value when the conveyor is running at a high
speed, there are many inspection tools enabled and if the difference between the reject
distance and pack length is small.
o Maximum (ms) - The maximum time in milliseconds taken to process a pack is displayed.
o Average (ms) - The average time in milliseconds taken to process each pack is displayed.
o Timeout If the time taken to process any product image exceeds 25% of the values
entered in these fields, the time will be coloured orange as a caution. When it exceeds
50%, the time is coloured red and a fault will occur as the system cannot reject the
product. You should reduce the speed of the conveyor and the number of inspection tools
208
The User Interface
enabled, and either decrease the pack length or increase the reject distance. The following
total timeout times are displayed:
Image (ms) - The total image timeout time for all packs in milliseconds is displayed.
Reject (ms) - The total reject timeout time for all packs in milliseconds is displayed.
o Reset (Timing) (button) - Tapping on this button resets all the processing time counters to
zero.
Rates
Purpose
The Rates sub-tab of the Totals tab provides totals data covering the rate at which packs are being
passed through the system, the reject rate and the reject percentage against the total number of
packs passed. This information is also displayed in a graphical format.
Screen Contents
The Rates sub-tab provides the following:
Rates (area) - This area displays the following:
o Product Rate (ppm) - The current number of packs being inspected per minute is
displayed. This is indicated on the graph by a blue line.
o Reject Rate (ppm) - The current number of packs being rejected per minute is displayed.
This is indicated on the graph by a red line. If this value exceeds the Excess Rejects (rpm)
value set in the I/O (Rejects) tab of the Product Settings screen then a fault will be
generated.
o Reject Ratio - The current percentage of packs being inspected that are rejected is
displayed.
o Last Reject - The time that the last pack was rejected is displayed.
Rates (graph) - The graph displays time in 5 minute segments on the X axis and pack
numbers on the Y axis so that any trends can be easily identified. Tapping in the graph
alternates the information displayed between packs inspected (blue line), packs rejected (red
line) and a combination of both.
209
The User Interface
Tests
Purpose
The Test sub-tab of the Totals tab provides totals for contaminant tests, including the number of tests
that passed and failed and the time of the last test.
Screen Contents
The Tests sub-tab provides the following:
Contaminant Tests (area) - This area displays the following totals data:
o Tests Passed - The total number of packs inspected in the current production run that
have passed inspection displayed.
o Tests Failed - The current total number of packs inspected in the current production run
that failed inspection is displayed.
o Time Since Last Test - The time elapsed in milliseconds since the last pack was
inspected is displayed.
Checkweigh
Purpose
210
The User Interface
The Checkweigh tab is displayed if the Checkweigh inspection tool has been licensed in the software
and enabled in the Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen.
Selecting the Checkweigh tab of the Statistics screen displays statistical weighing data for the
currently running product.
Screen Contents
The Checkweigh tab provides the following:
Last Inspection (area) - This area displays the following information:
o Weight (g) The weight of the last pack inspected is displayed and also the result which
could be PASS or REJECT.
o Giveaway () If the last pack weight exceeds the nominal weight the value of the
overweigt amount is calculated and displayed.
Statistics (area) - This area displays the following statistical weighing data for the current
production run:
o Average Weight (g) The average pack weight is displayed.
o Standard Deviation (g) The standard deviation calculated for the number of packs
passed to date is displayed.
o Giveaway (g) The combined weight of additional product from all packs that have
passed inspection to date is displayed.
o Accepts Weight data, depending on whether Average or Minimum weight mode has
been selected, is displayed.
o Rejects The number of rejected packs to date divided out into reasons for rejection, is
displayed.
Weight Settings (area) - This area displays the current weight settings, depending on whether
Average of Minimum weight mode has been selected. It also shows if the Box Remover tool
has been selecte for use with the Checkweigh tool.
In addition, the following buttons are displayed when the Reports tabbed pane is selected:
Save (button) - Tapping on this button save the report displayed to the USB memory stick.
Reset (button) - Tapping on the button eresets the weighing data displayed.
211
The User Interface
Show Trend / Hide Trend (button) - Tapping on the Show Trend button displays the weighing
data graphically as shown in the screenshot above. The button then toggles to display Hide
Trend and when selected will show the weighing data as described above.
displayed.
Reports
Purpose
Selecting the Reports tab of the Statistics screen displays the Batch, Shift or PVS reports
automatically generated for the currently running product if they have been enabled. The reports may
be saved to the USB memory stick and also the batch statistics counters reset to zero.
The Batch option is enabled and configured in the Settings area of the I/O (Rejects) tab in the Product
Settings screen.
The Shift option is enabled and configured in the Advanced Reports / Network screen.
The PVS option is enabled and configured in the PVS area of the I/O (Rejects) tab in the Product
Settings screen and in the Advanced PVS screen.
Screen Contents
The Reports tab provides the following:
Report (drop down list) - This list is used to select the type of report to be displayed in the
'Report' area. Options of Batch, Shift and PVS are provided for selection.
Report (area) - This area displays either the Batch or PVS report, depending on the option
selected. You can scroll through the report to view the details or save it to the USB memory
stick by tapping on the 'Save' button at the bottom of the screen.
Batch [Current] (area) - This area is only displayed if the Batch option has been selected in
the 'Report' drop down list. it provides the following batch data:
o Report # - Displays the report number which starts at 1 and automatically increments as
further batches are inspected and reports generated.
o Trace Code - Displays the batch trace code automatically generated if this option is
selected.
212
The User Interface
o Start - Displays the batch start time.
o Target Packs - Displays the number of packs that represent a batch.
o Total - Displays the current total number of packs inspected for the batch.
o Accepts - Displays the current total number of packs in the batch that have passed
inspection.
o Rejects - Displays the current total number of packs in the batch that have been rejected.
Contaminants - Displays the current total number of packs in the batch that have been
rejected for containing contaminants.
Product Integrity - Displays the current total number of packs in the batch that have
been rejected for failing product integrity inspection.
In addition, the following buttons are displayed when the Reports tabbed pane is selected:
Save (button) - Tapping on this button save the report displayed to the USB memory stick.
displayed.
Events
Purpose
Selecting the Events tab of the Statistics screen displays a list of events covering a range of types
that have been captured by the system. This allows all activities carried out on the system to be
reviewed and saved to the USB memory stick. A search facility is also provided so that matching
events can all be displayed.
Screen Contents
The Events tab provides the following:
Show (drop down list) - This list is used to select the type of events to be displayed in the
'Events' table. Options of All (default), Access, Calibration, Fault, Inspection, Maintenance,
Power, product, Reject, Reports and Test are provided.
Events (table) - This table displays a row for each event and its details under the column
headings of Time, Event and Event Data. The events displayed are for the date selected in the
calendar control.
213
The User Interface
Date (calendar control and buttons) - The current date is displayed by default but you may
select a specific date by tapping in the date field to display a calendar control or using the
minus (-) and plus (+) buttons either side of the control to select the previous or next day.
In addition, the following buttons are displayed when the Events tabbed pane is selected:
Save (date) (button) - The button legend shows the date selected in the calendar control.
Tapping on the button saves the event types selected in the 'Show' drop down list for the
selected date to the USB memory stick.
All Events (button) - Tapping on this button saves all events captured for the selected date to
the USB memory stick.
Match Event (button) - You can display a list of matching events that have been captured on
the selected date by first tapping on an event in the table to select it and then tapping on the
Match Event button.
displayed.
System Log
Purpose
Selecting the System Log tab of the Statistics screen provides options to display a list of all system
events logged since the machine was started and the release notes related to the software version
installed.
A 'Save' button is provided to save either the System Log or Release Notes to the USB memory stick.
In addition a 'Reset' button is included so that the System Log information can be reset, effectively
deleting the current contents of the log.
Screen Contents
The System Log tab provides the following:
Show (drop down list) - This list is used to select and display either the System Log or
Release Notes information in the 'Information' area.
Information (area) - This area displays either the System Log or Release Notes information
based on the selection made.
In addition, the following buttons are displayed when the System Log tabbed pane is selected:
214
The User Interface
Save (button) - Tapping on this button saves the information displayed onto the USB memory
stick.
Reset (button) - This button is only enabled if the System Log option is selected. Tapping on
the button effectively deletes the current log contents.
Diagnostics
The Diagnostics screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Diagnostics' button in the GoTo screen.
The purpose of the screen is to provide diagnostic information for engineers to review the system
status to determine if there are any issues that need to be resolved.
Screen Contents
The Diagnostics screen contains the five tabbed panes listed below, which together provide access to
all available diagnostic data.
X-ray Set
System Information
Detector
PLC
Comms
Service (button) - Tapping on this button save the statistical data selected in the screen to the
USB memory stick.
Reset (All) (button) - tapping on this button will clear all statistics counters to zero so should
displayed.
X-ray Set
The X-ray Set tab of the Diagnostics screen is the default tab displayed when the screen opens. It
provides current status information for a number of system areas and these are listed and described
below.
215
The User Interface
The X-ray Set tab contains the following:

X-ray Set (area) - This area contains a coloured status panel for each system area that is
being monitored:
o Green - A green coloured panel indicates that the interlock is active and working correctly.
o Red - A red coloured panel indicates a problem with an interlock which must be rectified
before the system can be restarted and X-ray generation resumed.
o Grey - A grey coloured panel indicates that the interlock is inactive which does not indicate
a fault.
System Area (buttons) - Buttons are provided for each area, as listed and described below,
which when selected will then display applicable information in the screen.
o Interlocks
The system includes a number of lockable panels that provide access to various parts of
the system to carry out cleaning, maintenance and servicing operations.
To ensure that users are not accidentally exposed to x-rays each of these access panels is
fitted with a switch which stops the system conveyor and the generation of X-rays
automatically if an access panel is opened. The status of each panel is monitored and can
be reviewed at any time. This section provides further details.
o Signals
The system monitors the status of a number of key items to ensure that it is operating
correctly. More details are available in this section.
o X-rays
The status of a number of key X-ray parameters is constantly monitored by the system and
warnings are displayed if their values exceed defined limits. A test may also be carried out
to confirm that X-rays are being generated at the correct power level. This section includes
full details.
o Temperature
The temperature of key system components is constantly monitored to ensure that they
stay within defined limits. More details are available in this section.
o Rejects
216
The User Interface
All signals utilised by the system to ensure that the reject device and associated PECs are
operating correctly can be tested at any time. This section includes further details.
In addition, the following buttons are displayed when the X-ray Set tab is selected:
Save (button) - Tapping on this button saves the information displayed to the USB memory
stick.
Clean (button) - Tapping on this button puts the system temporarily into clean down mode for
20 seconds and displays a progress bar which counts down the time.
Service (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Service Machine screen which displays
advanced system information. The system settings provided in this screen are for the use of
Loma Service Engineers and other authorised users only.
Reset Faults (button) - Once any faults displayed by the system have been resolved, tapping
on this button resets the status of the applicable item.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Diagnostics screen. The Main Run screen is
displayed,
Interlocks
Purpose
Interlocks information is displayed by tapping on the 'Interlocks' button in the X-ray Set tab of the
Diagnostics screen.
The current status of each of the system interlocks provided is displayed in the 'Interlocks' area.
Screen Contents
The 'Interlocks' area contains a list of the interlocks fitted to the system and displays the current
status of each one via a coloured panel:
Green - A green coloured panel indicates that the interlock is active and working correctly.
Red - A red coloured panel indicates a problem with an interlock which must be rectified
before the system can be restarted and X-ray generation resumed.
Grey - A grey coloured panel indicates that the interlock is inactive which does not indicate a
fault.
Signals
Purpose
Signals information is displayed by tapping on the 'Signals' button in the X-ray Set tab of the
Diagnostics screen.
The current status of each key item of the system is displayed in the 'Signals' area.
217
The User Interface
Screen Contents
The 'Signals' area contains a list of the system key items and displays the current status of each one
via a coloured panel:
Green - A green coloured panel indicates that the correct signal is being received.
Red - A red coloured panel indicates a problem with a signal which must be rectified before
the system can be restarted and X-ray generation resumed. In the image above the air
pressure has fallen below the level required to activate the reject device.
Grey - A grey coloured panel indicates that the item is inactive, which does not indicate a fault
as no signal is expected.
X-rays
Purpose
X-ray information is displayed by tapping on the 'X-rays' button in the X-ray Set tab of the Diagnostics
screen.
The current status of a number of key X-ray parameters is displayed in the 'X-rays' area.
Screen Contents
The 'X-rays' area contains a list of key X-ray parameters and displays the current status of each one
via a coloured panel:
Green - A green coloured panel indicates that the parameter value is within specified limits.
Red - A red coloured panel indicates a problem with a parameter value which must be
investigated and resolved.
Grey - Grey panels for all panels indicates that X-rays are not being generated.
Test (X-rays) (button) - Tapping on this button displays the X-ray Diagnostics screen which is
for Loma Service Engineer use only.
X-ray Diagnostics
Purpose
The X-ray Diagnostics screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Test (X-rays) button when displaying the
X-rays information in the X-ray Set tab of the Diagnostics screen.
218
The User Interface
The screen provides options to review and update the X-ray power settings and also initiate a Burn-In
process based on the settings made in the Advanced Maintenance screen. The screen is accessible
to 'Engineer' level users but it is recommended that changes are onky carried out by Loma Service
Engineers and other authorised staff.
Screen Contents
The X-ray Diagnostics screen contains two tabbed panes, controls and buttons as described below.
Trend / Burn In
The Trend / Burn In tab contains the following:
o Set X-ray Power (area) - This area displays the kV and mA working values set in the
Advanced Maintenance screen which may be manually changed or updated automatically
through the following:
kV (field) - This field displays the voltage setting to be applied to the X-ray tube. This is
also shown as a blue line on the 'X-ray Power Trend' graph. Tapping in the field
displays the numeric keypad through which you can enter a new voltage value.
mA (field) - This field displays the current setting to be applied to the X-ray tube. This is
also shown as a green line on the 'X-ray Power Trend' graph. Tapping in the field
displays the numeric keypad through which you can enter a new current value.
Start / Update (button) - Tapping on this button initiates a 'test' process where the
current X-ray kV and mA values are compared against the preset values to ensure that
the X-ray power is being generated correctly.
The system will start to generate X-rays, if they are not already being generated, and
you will also be asked to start the conveyor.
The X-ray kV and mA values in the 'Current X-ray Power' area then start to display live
values as X-ray generation begins with a red line displaying the kV value on the 'X-ray
Power Trend' graph and a purple line showing the mA value. You can now review the
preset X-ray Power values against the current values on the graph.
219
The User Interface
Once the 'test' starts the Start button legend toggles to Update. You may then use the
Update button to change the kV and mA values in the 'Set X-ray Power' area to the
current values being generated when you tap on the button.
o Current X-ray Power (area) - This area displays the current kV and mA values being
generated.
kV (non-editable field) - This field displays the actual voltage being applied to the X-ray
tube which should match the set value. This is also shown as a red line on the 'X-ray
Power Trend' graph.
mA (non-editable field) - This field displays the actual current being applied to the X-ray
tube which should match the set value. This is also shown as a purple line on the 'X-
ray Power Trend' graph.
Filament V/A/R (non-editable fields) - These fields displays the current filament values.
o Burn In (area) - This area contains a Show button which when selected provides the
following for initiating a Burn-In process to 'warm up' the X-ray tube slowly to prevent tube
damage when starting the machine up after not using it for a prolonged period of time:
Start / Stop / Step (non-editable fields) - These field display the Burn In values set in
the Advanced Maintenance screen which will be used for the Burn In process.
220
The User Interface
Start (button) - Tapping on the Start button initiates a Burn In process and the following
information is displayed:
Start Time - Displays the time that the Burn In process was started.
Time - Displays the amount of time remaining for the process to be completed. The
percentage of the process completed is also displayed.
Actual - Displays the current step number and the total number of steps required to
complete the process. The current kV and mA values are also displayed.
Stop (button) - Tapping on this button stops the Burn In process before it has
completed.
o X-ray Power Trend (graph) - This graph is used to display X-ray power trends by showing
the set and actual kV and mA values being applied to the X-ray tube over time. The
different coloured lines displayed represent the following:
Blue - The blue line represents the kV value set in the Advanced Maintenance screen.
This will remain constant at all times.
Red - The red line represents the actual kV value being applied to the X-ray tube. This
will ramp up as X-rays start to be generated and then should match the blue line of the
set value.
Green - The green line represents the mA value set in the Advanced Maintenance
screen. This will remain constant at all times.
Purple - The purple line represents the actual mA value being applied to the X-ray
tube. This will ramp up as X-rays start to be generated and then should match the
green line of the set value.
221
The User Interface
Advanced
The Advanced tab contains the following:
o Diagnostics (area) - This area displays the status of a number of functions through
coloured panels.
Green - A green coloured panel indicates that the function is working correctly.
Red - A red coloured panel indicates a problem with the function which must be
rectified.
Grey - A grey coloured panel indicates that the function is inactive which does not
indicate a fault.
o Errors / Faults (area) - This area displays if there are errors or faults with specific system
parameter values through coloured panels.
Green - A green coloured panel indicates that the parameter level is correct.
Red - A red coloured panel indicates a problem with the parameter value which must
be rectified.
Grey - A grey coloured panel indicates that the parameter is inactive which does not
indicate a fault.
o Timing (area) - This area displays system response times. A Reset button is provided
which when selected will zero the counter values.
o Status (area) - This area displays key system values for engineers to assess whether the
system is operating correctly.
In addition, the following buttons are provided at the bottom of the screen:
Reset Faults (button) - Tapping on this button resets the counters to zero.
Stop X-rays (button) - Tapping on this button stops the generation of X-rays, effectively
stopping any X-ray Power test or Burn In process.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button saves any changes and closes the screen. The
Diagnostics screen is displayed.
222
The User Interface
Temperature
Purpose
Temperature information is displayed by tapping on the 'Temperature' button in the X-ray Set tab of
the Diagnostics screen.
The current status of the Tank, Heater and Cabinet Cooler are displayed in the 'Temperature' area.
Screen Contents
The 'Temperature' area displays the current temperature status for the Tank, Heater and Cabinet
Cooler via a coloured panel:
Green - A green coloured panel indicates that the component is operating within its specified
temperature range.
Red - A red coloured panel indicates that the component temperature is operating outside of
its specified temperature range and investigation is required to resolve the problem.
Grey - A grey coloured panel indicates that the component is inactive, which does not indicate
a fault as its temperature is not being monitored.
Rejects
Purpose
Rejects information is displayed by tapping on the 'Rejects' button in the X-ray Set tab of the
Diagnostics screen.
The current status of the reject device and its associated signalling is displayed in the 'Rejects' area.
Screen Contents
The 'Rejects' area displays the following:
Test (Rejects) (button) - Tapping on this button initiates a test of the reject signals being
generated by the system and displays the results in the Rejects screen shown below.
223
The User Interface
The screen contains the following:
o Reject I/O (area) - This area displays the results of the test for the Reject Input signal.
Green - A green coloured panel indicates that the signal is being generated correctly.
Red - A red coloured panel indicates a problem with the signal that must be
Grey - A grey coloured panel indicates that the Reject Input signal is inactive, which
does not indicate a fault as its status is not being monitored.
o Signals (area) - This area displays the results of the test for the Reject Confirmation and
Bin Full signals.
Green - A green coloured panel indicates that the signal is being generated correctly.
Red - A red coloured panel indicates a problem with the signal that must be
Grey - A grey coloured panel, displaying the legend 'OFF', indicates that the option is
not selected, which does not indicate a fault as its status is not being monitored.
o Reject Output (area) - This area displays the results of the test for the Reject Output
signal.
Output Fault (status panel) - The current status of the output fault signal is displayed via a
coloured panel
o Green - A green coloured panel indicates that the signal is being generated correctly.
o Red - A red coloured panel indicates a problem with the signal that must be investigated
and resolved.
o Grey - A grey coloured panel indicates that the rejects system is inactive, which does not
indicate a fault as its status is not being monitored.
System Information
The System Information tab of the Diagnostics screen displays information for various system areas
through a number of tabbed panes which are listed below.
Maintenance
License
System
Network Info
Drives
In addition, the following buttons are displayed when the System Information tab is selected:
displayed,
224
The User Interface
Maintenance
Purpose
System maintenance information is displayed by tapping on the 'Maintenance' sub-tab in the System
Information tab of the Diagnostics screen. This enables you to review machine usage data to plan any
maintenance activity that may be required.
Screen Contents
The Maintenance sub-tab displays the following system maintenance information:
Service / Maintenance (area) - This area displays the following information:
o Last reboot - Displays the time interval since the last system reboot. The time is update
every few seconds.
o Last restart - Displays the time interval since the last system restart. The time is update
every few seconds.
o Last service date - Displays the date and time that the system was last serviced. This is
captured when a service log entry is made in the Service Machine screen.
o Time alive - Displays the total length of time that the system has been used. This time is
updated every few seconds that the system is switched on.
o X-rays run time - Displays the total length of time that the system has generated X-rays.
o Insulating fluid wear - Displays the percentage of fluid wear expended as a percentage
of the maximum permissible value. This is also displayed as a progress bar.
o Insulating fluid time - Displays the percentage of fluid time expended. This is also
displayed as a progress bar.
o Conveyor distance - Displays the percentage of conveyor distance expended. This is

also displayed as a progress bar.
o Last run - Displays the time and date that the system was last run, including the time run
as a percentage of the total time run. This is also displayed as a progress bar.
o Remote support - Displays the length of time that a remote support connection has been
made to the system.
225
The User Interface
Help (Maintenance) (area) - This area provides a drop down list of maintenance topics and a
Help button which when tapped displays information for the selected topic.
o Insulation wear - Selecting this option and tapping the Help button pops up the dialog
shown below which displays the current insulation fluid wear value and as a percentage of
the maximum value stated in the dialog.
o Insulation time - Selecting this option and tapping the Help button pops up the dialog
shown below which displays the current insulation fluid time value and as a percentage of
the maximum value stated in the dialog.
o Conveyor distance - Selecting this option and tapping the Help button pops up the dialog
shown below which displays the current conveyor distance travelled value and as a
percentage of the maximum value stated in the dialog.
o Last run - Selecting this option and tapping the Help button pops up the dialog shown
below which displays the last time that the system was run and as a percentage of the
maximum time between system runs that is recommended.
226
The User Interface
o Shutdown (area) - This area displays the number of times that the system has shut down
in a controlled manner and the number of times it has shut down in an uncontrolled
manner, for example due to a power failure or system crash.
License
Purpose
System license information is displayed by tapping on the 'License' sub-tab in the System Information
tab of the Diagnostics screen. This enables you to review which optional features are included in the
system license.
Screen Contents
The License sub-tab displays the following system license information:
License Dongle Number - Displays the software license dongle number.
License - Displays the system software license number.
Product Integrity (area) - This area displays a list of optional product integrity inspection
tools. If the tool is licensed for use in the system then YES is displayed in green text against
the tool. If the tool is NOT licensed for use in the system then NO is displayed in red text
against the tool.
System Settings (area) - This area displays a list of optional system features. If the feature is
licensed for use in the system then YES is displayed in green text against the feature. If the
feature is NOT licensed for use in the system then NO is displayed in red text against the
feature.
227
The User Interface
System
Purpose
System information is displayed by tapping on the 'System' sub-tab in the System Information tab of
the Diagnostics screen. This enables you to review system information set up in the Service Machine
screen.
Screen Contents
The System sub-tab displays the following system information:
System (Serial Number_ (area) - This area displays the system serial number and displays
the following system information:
o Software version - Displays the system software version installed.
o PLC version - Displays the system PLC version installed.
o Born on - Displays the date that the system was first switched on.
o PC serial number - Displays the serial number of the system PC.
o OS - Displays the operating system, including the service pack, installed on the PC.total
length of time that the system has generated X-rays.
o HV serial number - Displays the HV serial number.
o Tube serial number - Displays the X-ray tube serial number.
o X-ray set type - Displays the X-ray set type installed.
o Conveyor Speeds - Displays the available conveyor speeds that can be set in the Scan
Settings tab of the Product Settings screen.
o Current speed - Displays the conveyor speed that is currently selected.
o Flow direction - Displays the system flow direction which is either Left to Right or Right to
Left.
o Packs processed - Displays the total number of packs processed.
228
The User Interface
System Metrics (area) - This area displays the total PC processing memory available (kB),
the memory being used by the system and the available free memory.
Temperature (area) - This area displays the current, minimum and maximum temperatures
measured by the system.
Network Info
Purpose
Network information is displayed by tapping on the 'Network Info' sub-tab in the System Information
tab of the Diagnostics screen. This enables you to review network information set up in the Service
Machine screen.
Screen Contents
The System sub-tab displays the following system information:
Network (area) - This area displays the following network information:
o Username - Displays the currently logged in username.
o Userdomain - Displays the Machine ID.
o Domain / Workgroup? - Displays the applicable option and its name.
o Network connection #1 - Displays the details for connection 1.
o Network connection #2 - Displays the details for connection 2.
229
The User Interface
Drives
Purpose
Drive information is displayed by tapping on the 'Drives' sub-tab in the System Information tab of the
Diagnostics screen. This enables you to review system drive information.
Screen Contents
The Drives sub-tab displays the following drive information:
System Drives (Physical) (area) - This area displays the drive letters for the drives physically
installed in the system PC.
Local Drive (C:) [NTFS] (area) - Displays the total available memory size in GB and the
amount of free memory available.
Network Drive (Z:) (area) - This drive is generally used for the USB memory stick when fitted.
The total available memory size in GB and the amount of free memory available is displayed.
Image Saving (area) - This area displays the following information:
o Pack rate (ppm) - Displays the number of images being captured every minute.
o Images to save (Max) - Displays the total number of captured images to be saved and the
maximum number that can be saved in brackets.
o Images saved - Displays the number of captured images saved to date.
o Images lost - Displays the number of captured images that have been lost.
Text Saving (area) - This area displays the following information:
o Texts to save (Max) - Displays the total number of texts to be saved and the maximum
number that can be saved in brackets.
o Texts saved - Displays the number of texts saved to date.
o Texts lost - Displays the number of texts that have been lost.
230
The User Interface
Detector
Detector information is displayed by tapping on the 'Detector' tab of the Diagnostics screen. This
screen provides a comprehensive set of detector information allowing an Engineer to select different
parameter settings and options to review detector responses both numerically and graphically.
This screen is intended for use by Loma Service Engineers and authorised and trained staff. Please
do not change any settings in this screen without first consulting your Loma Service Centre for advice.
The Detector screen provides different information based on the option selected in the 'View' drop
down list. Options provided are X-rays, Settings, Display and Debug and each of these is described in
detail below.
X-rays
When the X-rays option is selected in the 'View' drop down list the following items are displayed
in the screen:
o X-rays (area) - This area displays the following:
X-rays (option check box) - When this option is selected, if X-rays are not already being
generated then they will start and you will be asked to start the conveyor. The other
controls within the X-rays area will become active.
kV (button) - This button displays the current kV value which can be changed by
tapping on the button to display the pop-up numeric keypad and entering a new value.
mA (button) - This button displays the current mA value which can be changed by
tapping on the button to display the pop-up numeric keypad and entering a new value.
Power (drop down list) - The list displays options of Low, Medium and High for
selection. The selection is used in conjunction with the values set in the kV and mA
fields and the Load and Save buttons. For example, to set new kV and mA values to be
used by the detector for the system wide Low power settings, enter the new values in
the kV and mA fields, select the Low per option and tap on the Save button.
Load (button) - Tapping on this button loads any changes made.
Save (button) - Tapping on this button will save the currently set kV and mA as the
system wide settings for the power level selected in the Power drop down list.
Settings
When the Settings option is selected in the 'View' drop down list the following items are
displayed in the screen:
o Calibration (area) - This area displays the following:
Offset (option check box) - When this option is selected, the current Offset value for the
product set during calibration is applied to the graph to display its affect.
231
The User Interface
Gain (option check box) - .When this option is selected, the current Gain value for the
product set during calibration is applied to the graph to display its affect.
o Sensitivity (area) - This area displays the following:
Low (option radio button) - When this option is selected, the Low sensitivity values are
applied to the graph to display its affect.
High (option radio button) - .When this option is selected, the High sensitivity values
are applied to the graph to display its affect.
o Gain (area) - This area displays the following:
Overall gain (drop down list) - This list provides options of Min, Low, Med, High and
Max for selection. The gain values for the selected option are applied to the graph to
display its affect.
Display
When the Display option is selected in the 'View' drop down list the following items are
displayed in the screen:
o Display (area) - This area displays the following:
Blanking (option check box) - Selecting this option applies blanking to the product
images.
Stats (option check box) - Selecting this option displays Min, Low, High and Max
values in green text on the left of the graph.
o Trace (area) - This area displays the following:
Fixed line (option radio button) - Selecting this option displays the image density trace
line in the graph as a single yellow line.
Min / Max (option radio button) - Selecting this option displays two image density trace
lines in the graph, one coloured yellow and the other coloured grey, show the minimum
and maximum image density values being captured. These Min and Max values and
also the span between them are always displayed in white text on the left of the graph.
o Advanced (area) - This area displays the following:
Advanced (drop down list) - This list displays options of Detector, Histogram, Offset
Table and Gain Table for selection. The information displayed in the graph will then
change depending on the option selected.
Module (drop down list) - This list displays options of All and then a number for each
available diode module fitted. This enables you to display information for all modules or
a specific one in the graph, depending on the option selected.
232
The User Interface
Debug
When the Debug option is selected in the 'View' drop down list the following item is displayed in
the screen:
o Draw Quickly / Stop Redraw (button) - This button is used to TBA

Detector Graph - This graph displays the image density level being detected for each diode
in each diode pack fitted. These levels and other information displayed are affected by
selections made when either the Settings or Display options are selected in the View drop
down list.
A scroll bar is provided on the left side of the graph which controls the red line shown in the
graph. This enables you to move the line up or down in the graph to display the image density
(greyscale) value at that point.
Tapping anywhere on the graph replaces it with another screen that displays a set of detector
information. Any mismatches or problems are displayed in red text and must be resolved.
In addition, the following buttons are displayed when the System Information tab is selected:
Advanced (button) - Tapping on this button opens the Detector Diagnostics screen which
displays advanced diagnostics information and provides access to advanced features for use
by Loma Service Engineers and authorised staff only.
Test Alignment (button) - Tapping on this button TBA
233
The User Interface
displayed,
Detector Diagnostics
Purpose
The Detector Diagnostics screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Advanced' button when displaying
the Detector information in the Detector tab of the Diagnostics screen.
The screen provides options to review and update the X-ray power settings and also initiate a Burn-In
process based on the settings made in the Advanced Maintenance screen. The screen is accessible
to 'Engineer' level users but it is recommended that changes are onky carried out by Loma Service
Engineers and other authorised staff.
Screen Contents
The Detector Diagnostics screen contains two tabbed panes, controls and buttons as described
below.
Diagnostics
The Diagnostics tab contains the following:
o Capture Statistics (area) - This area displays data capture information, including the
capture time period which starts when the screen is opened.
o Error Count (area) - This area displays the number of errors detected for a number of
system parameters over the capture time period.
234
The User Interface
Information
The Information tab contains the following:
o Detector (area) - This area displays Command Timeout and USB Port information for the
detector.
o Commander (area) - This area displays advanced detector parameter values.

Pause / Resume (button) - Tapping on this button initially pauses the updating of the
statistical information being captured so that it can be reviewed. The button legend then
toggles to 'Resume' and tapping on the button resumes the updating of the statistical
information being captured.
OK (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Detector Diagnostics screen. The Detector tab
of the Diagnostics screen is displayed.
PLC
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) status information is displayed by tapping on the 'PLC' tab of
the Diagnostics screen. This screen can also be used to test output signal of each PLC channel.
The screen is intended for use by Loma Service Engineers and authorised and trained staff. Please
do not change any settings in this screen without first consulting your Loma Service Centre for advice.
Note that minimised PLC diagnostics information is provided for the X5c model.
The PLC Detector screen contains two tabbed panes which are listed and described below.
235
The User Interface
I/O
The I/O pane displays the following:
o PLC (area) - This area displays a graphic that shows the status of each system element
being monitored on each channel.
o Test Output (area) - This area provides controls for testing each output channel through
the following:
CH (field) - Tap in the field to display the pop-up numeric keypad and enter the output
channel number to be tested. Note that you will only be able to enter an available
output channel number.
Output (field) - Tap in the field to display the pop-up numeric keypad and enter an
output number for the selected channel to be used for the test. Note that you will only
be able to enter an output number available for the selected output channel.
Set (button) - Tap this button once you have selected the output channel and number
to test the output. So for example, selecting channel 10 and signal 02 will activate the
Fault / Warning Sounder.
Reset (button) - Tap this button to cancel the test.
Reset All (button) - Tap on this button to cancel the test and reset all of the selected
test input and output channels to their original default values.
o Expansion (area) - This area is displayed if an additional PLC is fitted to accommodate

extra output options that are available, for example where the system includes multiple
lanes..
Show / Hide (button) - Tapping on the Show button displays the additional PLC system
elements being monitored and their channels. The button will toggle to Hide. Tapping
on the Hide button displays the main PLC system elements and their channels.
236
The User Interface
Status
The Status pane displays the following:
o PLC (area) - This area displays status and timing information so that you can review how
the system PC is working.
Comms
The Comms tab of the Diagnostics screen provides access to system communications settings
information so that you can review if they are operating correctly. You may also activate TeamViewer
so that a connection can be made to the system from a remote PC.
The Comms tab contains a number of sub tabs that are listed and described below.
Remote Support
The Remote Support sub tab is displayed by default when the Comms tab is selected. It
contains controls for starting the TeamViewer application so that you can connect to the system
remotely via a PC that is also running the TeamViewer application. You can also test that the
machine IP address is correctly set and that internet access is available. This section provides
further details.
237
The User Interface
Network
The Network sub tab provides basic network connection details which are described in this
section.
OPC (Product change)

The OPC (Product change) sub tab provides basic OPC connection and Remote Product
Change information which is described in this section.
Parallel Port
The Parallel Port sub tab contains three tabbed panes covering Rejects, I/O Status and LPT
Allocations. More details are available in this section.
In addition, the following buttons are displayed when the Comms tab is selected:
displayed,
Remote Support
Purpose
The Remote Support sub tab is displayed by default when the Comms tab is selected. It contains
controls for starting the TeamViewer application so that you can connect to the system remotely via a
PC that is also running the TeamViewer application. You can also test that the machine IP address is
correctly set and that internet access is available. This section provides further details.
Screen Contents
The Remote Support sub tab contains the following:
Remote Support (area) - This area contains the following controls for setting up remote
support:
o Status (panel) - This panel displays the remote support status which will be either
'ACTIVE' or NOT ACTIVE'.
238
The User Interface
o Start (button) - Provided the Remote Support option is enabled for the system, tapping on
this button will manually start TeamViewer on the system so that a remote support
connection can be established with a networked PC also running the TeamViewer
application.
o Start TeamViewer (next restart only) (option check box) - Selecting this option means
that the next time the system is restarted, the TeamViewer application will automatically
start so that a remote support connection can be established.
o Start TeamViewer (always) (option check box) - Selecting this option means that every
time the system is restarted, the TeamViewer application will automatically start so that a
remote support connection can be established.
Test IP Address (area) - This area provides the following controls for setting and testing the
system IP address:
o IP Address (fields) - Four fields are provided which display the currently set IP address for
the system. Tapping in each field displays the pop-up numeric keypad through which the
field value may be updated as necessary.
o Test (button) - Tapping on this button will test that the IP address set is reachable. A
message dialog will pop-up to confirm this.
Test web address (URL) - This area contains the following controls for testing internet access
from the system:
o Web Address (field) - This field displays the currently set website address. Tapping in the
field displays the pop-up Keyboard through which the website address may be updated.
o Test (button) - Tapping on this button will test the internet connection and display the
selected website in a new screen.
Network
Purpose
The Network sub tab provides basic network connection details as described below.
Screen Contents
The Network sub tab contains the following:
Network (area) - This area displays the following network information:
239
The User Interface
o Connections - The number of currently active network connections is displayed.
o Last connection - The date and time that the most recent network connection was
established is displayed.
OPC (Product change)
Purpose
The OPC (Product change) sub tab provides basic OPC connection and Remote Product Change
information which is described below.
Screen Contents
The OPC (Product change) sub tab contains the following:
OPC (area) - This area displays the following OPC connection information:
o Connections - The number of currently active OPC connections is displayed.
o Last connection - The date and time that the most recent OPC connection was
established is displayed.
Remote Product Change (area) - This area displays the following product information:
o Current product number - The unique system number for the currently selected product
is displayed.
Name - The applicable product name is displayed. This displays 'Default' where no
product is currently selected.
Barcode - The applicable product barcode is displayed. This displays '(BLANK)' if

barcodes are not being used.
Parallel Port
Purpose
The Parallel Port sub tab of the Comms tab contains three tabbed panes covering Rejects, I/O Status
and LPT Allocations. These are listed and described below.
240
The User Interface
Screen Contents
The Parallel Port sub tab contains a number of tabs that are listed and described below.
Rejects
The Rejects tab provides advanced system reject information. This section provides further
details.
Status (I/O)
I/O status details are described in this section.
Allocations
Allocation details are described in this section.
o Rejects
The Rejects tab displays advanced system data associated with the rejects process which
can be reviewed to determine if the system is operating correctly.
The Rejects tab displays the following non-editable information in the 'Rejects' area:
Lane 1, Reject 1 - The number of rejects currently in the queue to be physically

rejected by the system and the number of packs pending rejection for Lane 1 and
241
The User Interface
Reject device 1 are displayed. If multiple lanes and reject devices are included in
the system then this information is displayed for them on separate rows.
Time (ms) - The average time in milliseconds taken by the system to reject a
pack is displayed.
Reset (ms) - The average time in milliseconds taken by the system to reset the
reject device is displayed.
Packs Displays pack data.
Last detect | Last reject - The time that the last reject pack was detected by the
system and the time that it was actually physically rejected is displayed.
Scan speed (lines per s) - The current number of scans being taken per second
by the system is displayed.
Potential Packs-in-Transit - The average number of packs that could potentially

be moving through the system is displayed.
Reject 1 delay (ms) - The average reject delay time in milliseconds is displayed.
This is the time that the pack takes, from being detected as a reject pack up to
when it reaches the reject device.
Reject 1 dwell (ms) - The average reject dwell time in milliseconds is displayed.
This is the time that the reject device activates to ensure that the pack is removed
from the production line.
o Status (I/O)
The Status (I/O) tab displays the current LPT status.
The Status (I/O) tab contains the following:
Reject Toggle (Lane 1) (area) - This area contains a Toggle button. Tapping on the
button toggels between lanes if multiple lanes are in use. Aa Reject Toggle area is
displayed for each available Lane included in the system.
LPT Status (area) - This area displays the following informations:

Faults - The number of faults generated by the system is displayed.
242
The User Interface
Input pins (5V) - A coloured circle is provided to display the status of each input pin. If
the circle is coloured green this indicates that the pin is active and 5V is being supplied
to energise the reject relay. if the circle is coloured red this indicates a problem with the
voltage on the input pin which must be resolved. If the circle is coloured grey this
indicates that the pin is not active.
o Allocations
The Allocations tab provides reject wiring information to enable an Engineer to trace any
faults with the reject system.
The Allocations tab provides details of the reject wiring connections for each lane included
in the system to assist in tracing faults.
Service Machine
Purpose
The Service Machine screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Service' button in the Diagnostics screen.
The screen provides access to a number of advanced system settings and also for logging service
and maintenance activities carried out by Loma Engineers. It is therefore recommended that you
contact you local Loma Service Centre and do not make any changes to settings in this screen.
Screen Contents
The Service Machine screen contains the four tabbed panes listed below.
Maintenance
The Maintenance tab provides options for Loma Engineers to record service and maintenance
activities carried out on the system and reset the system timers and counters if required.
System
The System tab provides Loma Engineers with access to machine, hardware, software and
performance settings through a number of tabbed panes.
Debug
The Debug tab provides options to the Loma Engineer for suppressing or activating some
features and including additional system information in the event logs to assist in any
investigations carried out during servicing and maintenance activities to determine if the system
is operating at its optimum performance.
243
The User Interface
Windows
The Windows tab provides Loma Engineers with access to the basic and advanced Windows
operating system functions so that they may be adjusted by the Engineer if necessary.
Service Log (button) - Tapping on this button opens the ServiceLog.csv file in Notepad and
the Windows On Screen Keyboard so that the Engineer can record all servicing and
maintenance activities carried out.
Lock System / Unlock System (button) - Tapping on the Lock System button will lock the
system so that no changes can be made to the system parameters. The button legend then
toggles to display 'Unlock System'. Tapping on the 'Unlock System' button pops up a message
dialog to advise that the system is locked. Clicking on the 'Yes' button displays the pop-up
numeric keypad so that the correct Loma Engineer's password can be entered to unlock the
system.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Product Settings screen without saving
any changes.
Apply (button) - Tapping on this button saves and applies any changes made in the Product
Settings screen and then closes it.
Maintenance
The maintenance tab of the Service Machine screen is the default tab displayed when the screen
opens. It provides options for Loma Engineers to record service and maintenance activities carried
out on the system and reset the system timers and counters if required.
The Maintenance tab contains the following:

Service / Maintenance (area) - This area contains a number of option check boxes for the
service and maintenance activities listed below. Checking an option means that when the
changes are saved the selected activity is logged in the system to record it being carried out.
The following option are provided for selection:
o Oil change - The Oil Wear and Oil Time counters will be reset when this option is
selected.
o Tank change - The Oil Wear, Oil Time and X-rays Run Time counters will be reset when
this option is selected.
o Conveyor service - The Belt Distance counter will be reset when this option is selected.
244
The User Interface
o Detector replaced - The Calibration Time and detector statistics counter will be reset
when this option is selected.
o HVPSU replaced - The HVPSU fault counts counter will be reset when this option is
selected.
Faults (area) - This area contains the following:
o Fault detection (drop down list) - Displays option of YES and NO for selection. The NO
option is generally used to suppress the generation of fault messages when running the
system in demo mode or carrying out investigations.
Machine timers / counters (area) - This area contains a number of option check boxes for
various machine timers and counters listed below. Checking an option means that those
timers / counter will be reset once saving the changes in the screen.
o Packs processed
o Time alive
o X-rays run time
o Remote support time
System
The System tab of the Service Machine screen provides access to a number of advanced system
settings used by Loma Engineers. It is therefore recommended that you make any changes to
settings in this screen.
Screen Contents
The System tab contains the four tabbed panes listed below.
Machine
The Machine tab provides access for Loma Engineers to the Machine Settings which will
generally do not need to be changed unless a system component such as the X-ray tube is
replaced.
Hardware
The Hardware tab provides access for Loma Engineers to options and settings for the system
hardware. These are set during the system build to customer requirements so should not need
to be changed unless a system component has been changed or the system updated.
Software
The Software tab provides access for Loma Engineers to various software options and settings.
Again these are set during the system build to customer requirements but may be changed
where, for example the customer wants to change a feature such as the screen colours or
location in which to save images.
Performance
The Performance tab provides Loma Engineers with access to system performance setting
options which generally do not need to be changed unless it is necessary for specific product
applications.
245
The User Interface
Machine
The Machine sub tab of the System tab in the Service Machine screen is the default tab displayed
when the screen opens. It provides access for Loma Engineers to the Machine Settings which will
generally do not need to be changed unless a system component such as the X-ray tube is replaced.
The Machine sub tab contains the following:

Machine Settings (area) - This area contains the following:
o Machine ID (field) - This field displays the machine ID which can be changed as required
by tapping in the field to display the pop-up keyboard.
o Serial number (PC) (field) - This field displays the PC serial number and is entered during
system build. It will only need to be changed if the system PC is replaced.
o Serial number (Tube) (field) - This field displays the X-ray tube serial number and is
entered during system build. It will only need to be changed if the X-ray tube is replaced.
o Machine model (drop down list) - The list displays options of X4 and X5 for selection and
is set during product build.
o Machine type (drop down list) - A list of all available machine types is displayed for
selection. This is set during product build.
o Computer type (drop down list) - A list of all available computer types which could be
used in the system is displayed for selection. This is set during product build.
o HVPSU model (type) (field) - A list of available HVPSU types which could be used in the
system is displayed for selection. This is set during product build.
Hardware
Purpose
The Hardware sub tab of the System tab in the Service Machine screen provides access for Loma
Engineers to options and settings for the system hardware. These are set during the system build to
customer requirements so should not need to be changed unless a system component has been
changed or the system updated.
246
The User Interface
Screen Contents
The Hardware sub tab contains the following:
Section (drop down list) - This list provides a list of topics for which options may be displayed
and configured. The tab content is therefore dictated by the option selected. Each of these is
described below.
Communications
When the Communications option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab
o Sub-section (drop down list) - This control appears when the Communications option has
been selected. The list provides options of Standard and Product change and the content
displayed changes depending on the option selected.
o Standard
With the 'Standard' option selected in the Sub-section drop down list, the following content
is displayed:
Serial port (PLC) (drop down list) - A list of COMS ports to be used for two way
communication between the PC and PLC is displayed for selection.
PLC number of I/O (drop down list) - This list contains options of 40 (standard PLC)
and 60 (including expansion module) for selection.
247
The User Interface
PLC type (drop down list) - Displays options of Omron and Allen-Bradley for selection,
which are the names of the PLC manufacturers.
Serial port (HVPSU) (drop down list) - A list of COMS ports to be used for
communicating with the HVPSU.
Remote Support (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided to select if a
remote TeamViewer connection to the machine is permitted.
Hide remote support (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided to select if
the remote support connection icon is displayed.
o Product change
With the 'Product change' option selected in the Sub-section drop down list, the following
content is displayed:
(Handheld) barcode active (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided to
select if barcodes are to be used by the system to identify products passed through the
system for inspection.
Barcode length (fields) - The Minimum and Maximum number of barcode characters
permitted may be set in these fields by tapping in each one to display the pop-up
numeric keypad.
Action: Not found (drop down list) - This list provides a number of optional actions to
select what the system will do if a pack barcode is not recognised by the system.
None (log only) - The system will just log it as an event. No fault will be generated.
Pop-up warning - The system will display a warning message to the operator so that
they may stop the system if necessary.
Change product - The system will automatically recall another product defined in the
'"Not found" product number' field which will become active when this action option
is selected.
Set fault - The system will generate a fault to advise the operator and stop the system.
Action: Error (drop down list) - This list provides a number of optional actions to select
what the system will do if there is an error in the pack barcode.
None (log only) - The system will just log it as an event. No fault will be generated.
Pop-up warning - The system will display a warning message to the operator so that
they may stop the system if necessary.
248
The User Interface
Change product - The system will automatically recall another product defined in the
'"Error" product number' field which will become active when this action option is
selected.
Set fault - The system will generate a fault to advise the operator and stop the system.
Mode (drop down list) - This list provides options for selecting the communication mode
to be used for remote support. Options of None, OPC and Network are available for
selection.
When the Network option is selected in the Mode drop down list the following additional
Connect mode (drop down list) - Options of N/A, Passive and Active are available for
selection.
Product change mode (drop down list) - Options of By number and By barcode are
available for selection.
Queue (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided to select if the system
queues multiple packs between the barcode scanner and the X-ray beam.
Confirm (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided to select whether the
system sends a reply message to the remote PC after a remote product change
request message is received. The reply message will be SUCCESS, FAIL or IN-RUN
when the product is already selected.
Conveyor
When the Conveyor option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab contains
the following:
o Low / Medium / High speed (m/min) (fields) - These fields display the minimum, medium
and maximum conveyor speeds in metres per minute that will be selectable in the system
when adding product. Tapping in a field pops-up the numeric keypad to edit the value.
o Auto-start inspection (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided to select if
the system will automatically start inspection when the start button is selected. As this will
also start the conveyor automatically this option should be used with caution.
o Start prompt time (s) (field) - This field displays the time period in seconds that the
system will wait before prompting the user to start the conveyor if it is not already running.
o Direction of flow (drop down list) - Options of 'Left to Right' and 'Right to Left' are
provided to select which way the conveyor should run.
249
The User Interface
o Invert lane order (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided to select whether
to swap the lane labels on a multi lane system so that lane 1 becomes lane 2 and vice-
versa.
Detector
When the Detector option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab contains
the following:
o Sub-section (drop down list) - This control appears when the Detector option has been
selected. The list provides options of Settings and Inspection and the content displayed
changes depending on the option selected.
o Settings
With the 'Settings' option selected in the Sub-section drop down list, the following content
is displayed:
Baseline (14-bit) (field)
Baseline convert to (8-bit) (field)
Target calibration value (14-bit) (field)
Target converts to (8-bit) (field)
Conversion mode (drop down list) - Options of Standard and Normalise are provided
for selection..
Number of modules (drop down list) - Options of 6, 10, 12 and 18 are provided to
select the number of diode modules fitted to the machine.
Physical diode pitch (drop down list) - Options of 0.2mm, 0.4mm and 0.8mm are
provided for selection based on the type of diode module fitted.
Adaptive array technology (drop down list) - Options of Fine, Medium and Coarse
are provided for selection to set how the system scans the product.
Array inverted (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided for selection. The
Yes option is selected for the X5c model as the diode array is located at the top of the
machine. the No option is selected for all other X5 models as the diode array is located
at the bottom of the machine.
250
The User Interface
o Inspection
With the 'Inspection' option selected in the Sub-section drop down list, the following
Calibration check step (drop down list) - Options Off, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28 and 32
are provided to select the number of offset /gain checks on the diode array to be carried
out during a detector calibration process.
Maximum offset (field) - Displays the maximum offset to be used during the detector
calibration. The value can be edited by tapping in the field to display the pop-up
numeric keypad.
Maximum gain (field) - Displays the maximum gain to be used during the detector
calibration. The value can be edited by tapping in the field to display the pop-up
numeric keypad.
Maximum average gain (field) - Displays the maximum average gain to be used
during the detector calibration. The value can be edited by tapping in the field to display
the pop-up numeric keypad.
Pack pixels required (field) - Displays the minimum number of pixels below the
inspection threshold that will trigger the system to capture a product image.
Drift compensation (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided to select
whether compensation should be used. Note that this is not selectable when inspecting
in Mass Flow mode.
Bad diode check (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided to allow a
check for bad diodes to be included in the detector calibration process.
Bad diode allowance (field) - This field is active if the Bad diode check option is set to
Yes. the number of bad diodes allowed for the system to continue inspecting is
displayed. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad to allow the value to
be edited.
251
The User Interface
I/O
When the I/O option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab contains the
following:
o Swap Reset <=> Line block (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided to
select if you want to swap PLC inputs 0.00 and 2.05.
o Use remote fault reset (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided to select if
you wish to reset faults remotely.
o Auto clear fault messages (drop down list) - options of No and Yes are provided to select
if you wish to clear all fault messages remotely.
o Light curtain timeout (field) - This option is available for X5 SpaceSaver systems only.
The field display the time delay period in seconds that the PECs fitted for the light curtains
on the system infeed and outfeed can be blocked before a fault is generated by the
system. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad to allow the time to be
edited.
o Proximity switch (drop down list) - This option is used for X5 Pipeline systems only.
Options of No and Yes are provided for selection.
o Force inspect signal (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided for selection.
o Cleandown requires interlocks (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided to
select whether interlocks must be open to run the conveyor.
o Lamp type (drop down list) - A list of available lamp types is provided. This selection is
made during system build but may need to be changed if the lamp is replaced for a
different type.
o System cooling (drop down list) - Options of Vortex and Air Conditioner are provided for
selection. This selection is made during system build but may need to be changed if the
cooling system is changed for a different type.
o Type of UPS (drop down list) - Options of None, MGE, Puls and APC (110V) are provided
for selection. This selection is made during system build but may need to be changed if the
UPS is changed for a different type. Note that if a UPS is fitted the 'Shut Down' option in
the GoTo menu is removed.
252
The User Interface
Limits
When the Limits option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab contains the
following:
o System number of lanes (drop down list) - Options of 1 to 6 are provided to select the
maximum number of separate lanes that can be selected in the system.
o Flexible lanes (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided to set whether the
number of lanes and lane widths may be edited in the system.
o Permanent pack time (ms) (field) - Displays the maximum amount of time permitted for a
pack to pass through the system. A fault is generated if this time period is exceeded.
o System number of products (drop down list) - Options of 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000
and 2000 are provided to set the maximum number of products that may be added to the
system.
o Maximum diode rate (field) - Displays the maximum number of values captured by the
system per second from all available diodes.
Maintenance
When the Maintenance option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab
o Max lines in Events log (field) - Displays the maximum number of events that may be
saved in the monthly archives. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad so
that the value can be updated..
253
The User Interface
o Tank warmup (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided to set whether a tank
warmup process should be initiated before full calibration power is applied to the X-ray
tube.
o Tank warmup time (min) (field) - Displays the time period in minutes to be provided for
the tank warmup process. The time period and power settings steps to be used over the
warmup period are also displayed. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric
keypad so that the time period may be updated. The step information is then automatically
updated as well.
Mass Flow
When the Mass Flow option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab
o Fire reject not inspecting (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided for
selection.
o Mass flow images (field) - Displays the number of flowing on-screen images to display.
Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad for editing the value.
o "Grab New" trigger level (field) - Displays the image threshold at which the system will
capture a new image. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad so that the
time period may be updated. The step information is then automatically updated as well.
o Pump running timeout (min) (field) - This option is available for X5 Pipeline systems
only. The field displays the maximum time period that the pump can be stopped before a
fault is generated.
PVS
254
The User Interface
When the PVS option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab contains the
following:
o Test blanking shift (field) - Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad for
editing the value.
Rejects
When the Rejects option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab contains
the following:
o Sub-section (drop down list) - This control appears when the Rejects option has been
selected. The list provides options of Standard and Parallel Port and the content displayed
changes depending on the option selected.
o Standard
With the 'Standard' option selected in the Sub-section drop down list, the following content
is displayed:
Rejects per lane (drop down list) - Options of 1 and 2 are provided for selecting the
number of reject devices that are included in each lane in the system.
Dual lane support (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided for setting
whether the system supports multiple lanes.
Finger rejects (drop down list) - Options of None, 2, 4, 6 and 8 are provided for
selection.
Bin lock (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided to set automatic locking
and unlocking of the reject bin to prevent rejected products being removed from the bin.
Bin lock timeout (s) (field) - Displays the bin lock timeout period. Tapping in the field
displays the pop-up numeric keypad for editing the time.
Stop vortex for reject (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided to select
whether to shut off the air supply to the Vortex cooling system when the reject device
operates if they are both using the same air supply.
Reject fail safe (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided to for selection.
255
The User Interface
o Parallel Port
With the 'Parallel Port' option selected in the Sub-section drop down list, the following
Timeout (reject input fault) (drop down list) - Options of 20s and 60s are provided for
selection. It is not recommended that this option is set to Off.
Pack check (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided to select whether
the pack check feature is being used in the system.
Pin 12 allocation (input) (drop down list) - Options of None, Clear line and Pack check
(Lane 1) are provided to for selection.
Pin 13 allocation (input) (drop down list) - Options of None, Pump (On / Off), Count
pulses and Pack check (Lane 2) are provided for selection.
Xrays
When the Xrays option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab contains the
following:
o Maximum allowed kV (field) - Displays the maximum voltage that may be applied to the
X-ray tube. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad for editing the value.
o Maximum allowed mA (field) - Displays the maximum current that may be applied to the
X-ray tube. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad for editing the value.
o Insulating fluid (oil) type (drop down list) - Options of Transformer BS:148 and Midel
7131 are provided to select the oil type being used in the X-ray tank. Note that these oil
256
The User Interface
types should not be mixed. Currently Loma use Midel 7131 oil for all new systems and the
Shell Transformer BS:148 oil is no longer used except on old systems.
o Check for decaying X-rays (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided to
select for the system to check for at least 1 pixel at a grescale greater than 42.
o Pre-warn time (s) (field) - Displays the time period in seconds. Tapping in the field
displays the pop-up numeric keypad for editing the time.
o Allow "user" power level (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided to select
if the user can set another power level in addition to the Low, Medium and High levels
provided.
Software
Purpose
The Software sub tab of the System tab in the Service Machine screen provides access for Loma
Engineers to various software options and settings. Again these are set during the system build to
customer requirements but may be changed where, for example the customer wants to change a
feature such as the screen colours or location in which to save images.
Screen Contents
The Software sub tab contains the following:
Section (drop down list) - This list provides a list of topics for which options may be displayed
and configured. The tab content is therefore dictated by the option selected. Each of these is
described below.
o Access
257
The User Interface
When the Access option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab contains
the following:
Individual user accounts (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided to
select whether named user accounts and an access log can be created in the
system.
o Appearance
When the Appearance option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab
Skin mode (drop down list) - A number of 'skins' (standard colour schemes) are
provided in the list for selection to change the appearance of the system screens. A
Disabled (turned off) option is also provided.
Product description field (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided for
selection to set whether a description field is included in the Product Settings
screen.
Disable clicks in run (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided to select
whether clicks are disabled if inspecting products with the keyswitch set to OFF.
Name lanes (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided to select whether
unique names can be applied for each lane. This is only applicable for multi-lane
systems.
258
The User Interface
o Checkweigh
When the Checkweigh option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab
Low weight accept rate (drop down list) - Options of 12 (Australia), 40

(Europe [not France], US) and 50 (France) are provided to select which
checkweighing legislation to use. Effectively each on sets different values
for the number of packs that can fall between the set Tu1 and Tu2 values.
o Customisation
When the Customisation option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab
contains the following to set up the running of a custom command by adding a button to
the GoTo screen:
Show custom button (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided for
selecting whether the custom button is added to the GoTo screen.
Custom button text (field) - The text to be displayed on the custom button can be
entered into this field by tapping in the field to display the pop-up keyboard.
Custom command (field) - The custom command to be run can be entered into this
field by tapping in the field to display the pop-up keyboard. For example, you may
wish to run an application installed onto the system PC or run a batch file.
259
The User Interface
o Image Saving
When the Image Saving option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab
Source common path (drop down list) - Options of No and Yes are provided to
select whether to save source images to the C:\Tmp\Common folder on the system
PC.
Network maintenance (%) (drop down list) - Numerous options between 1 and 80%
are provided to select when network maintenance is required as the amount of
memory used increases.
Inspection log, SQL path (field) - Displays the default location of the SQL database.
Tapping in the field displays the pop-up keyboard to enter another location if required.
o Reporting
When the Reporting option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab
Maximum product reports (field) - This field displays the maximum number of Batch
and PVS reports that can be stored by the system. Tapping in the field displays the
pop-up numeric keypad to edit the value.
Maximum system report (field) - This field displays the maximum number of Shift
and Configuration reports that can be stored by the system. Tapping in the field
displays the pop-up numeric keypad to edit the value.
260
The User Interface
Report width (characters) (field) - This field displays the maximum number of
characters available for each row in the report. Tapping in the field displays the pop-
up numeric keypad to edit the value.
o Update
When the Update option has been selected from the 'Section' drop down list the tab
3rd party (button) - This button is provided to initiate an update of any 3rd party files
installed onto the system PC. When these files need to be updated Loma Systems
will provide a new Update3rdParty.cab which must be copied onto a USB memory
stick which is then fitted to the machine. Tapping on the button then uploads the new
files and overwrites the current files on the system PC automatically.
Manuals (button) - This button is provided to initiate an update to the installed user
manuals, including translated versions. When new manuals and manual versions are
available Loma Systems will provide a new UpdateManuals.cab for each language
which must be copied onto a USB memory stick which is then fitted to the machine.
The manual language to be updated is then selected from the drop down list. Tapping
on the button then uploads the new user manual file for the selected language and
overwrites the current manual file on the system PC automatically.
Language (drop down list) - A list of the languages in which the user manual is
currently available is displayed for selection.
Performance
261
The User Interface
Purpose
The Performance sub tab of the System tab in the Service Machine screen provides Loma Engineers
with access to system performance setting options which may help to speed up the software in
demanding, high speed applications..
Screen Contents
The Performance sub tab contains the following:
Image refresh rate (drop down list) - Options of Fast (1s), Normal (2s) and Slow (5s) are
provided to select the rate at which the main Run screen is updated. Note that reject images
are displayed immediately.
High speed system (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided for selection. When
the Yes option is selected the monitoring of processor load, fan speed, CPU and motherboard
temperature are turned off, the Inspection Log cannot be created and the Operating procedure
cannot be used.
Save last reject (drop down list) - Options of Yes and No are provided for selection. If the Yes
option is selected then the last reject image is saved for review in the Inspection tab of the
Images are NOT saved if the Remote Support option has been enabled in the Service
Machine > System > Hardware > Communications sub tab.
Debug
The Debug tab of the Service Machine screen provides options to the Loma Engineer for suppressing
or activating some features and including additional system information in the event logs to assist in
any investigations carried out during servicing and maintenance activities to determine if the system is
operating at its optimum performance.
The System tab contains the four tabbed panes listed below.
General
The General tab provides access for Loma Engineers to a number of options for use when
assembling, testing. servicing and demonstrating the system.
Logs
The Logs tab provides Loma Engineers with options for logging and saving specific system
data.
Extra Events
The Extra Events tab provides Loma Engineers with options for saving additional events in the
Events log under the MAINTENANCE category.
Advanced
The Advanced tab provides Loma Engineers with a list of options which can be manually set
through the software rather than through the user interface.
General
Purpose
The General sub tab of the Debug tab in the Service Machine screen is the default tab displayed
when the screen opens. It provides access for Loma Engineers to a number of options for use when
assembling, testing. servicing and demonstrating the system.
262
The User Interface
Screen Contents
The General sub tab contains the following:
Debug (General) (area) - This area contains the following:
o Debug mode (option check box) - Selecting this option activates debug mode in the
system.
o Suppress pre-release (option check box) - Selecting this option suppresses the display of
"Pre-Release" at startup.
o Ignore setup keyswitch (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the
keyswitch state is not monitored when carrying out certain functions such as saving
product parameters and exiting the program.
o Ignore air pressure (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the air pressure
is not monitored which is useful when assembling, servicing and demonstrating the system
where an air supply is not connected.
o Switch off sounders (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the Fault and
Reject sounders are disabled which is useful when assembling, servicing and
demonstrating the system.
o Simulator interval (ms) (field) - Displays the frequency at which images are loaded using
the F5 button when using the demo feature. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up
numeric keypad for editing the value.
o High speed simulator (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the system
will use the pack simulator to load and display simulator images stored on the system PC
C:\ drive.
o High speed simulator (ms) (field) - This field is active when the High speed simulator
option has been selected. It displays the time in milliseconds between the loading of each
simulator image. Tapping in the field displays the pop-up numeric keypad so that you can
edit the time if required.
263
The User Interface
Logs
Purpose
The Logs sub tab of the Debug tab in the Service Machine screen provides Loma Engineers with
options for logging and saving specific system data.
Screen Contents
The Logs sub tab contains the following:
Debug (Logs) (area) - This area contains the following:
o Log temperature (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the system will
save the Detector, Motherboard and CPU temperatures to the Temperature.csv log file.
o Log temperature (min) (field) - This field is active when the Log temperature option has
been selected. It displays the time period in minutes between the temperature values
being saved to the Temperature.csv log file.
o Log memory (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the system will save
the system wide memory values to the MemoryData.csv log file.
o Log memory (min) (field) - This field is active when the Log memory option has been
selected. It displays the time period in minutes between the memory values being saved to
the MemoryData.csv log file.
o Save production log (csv) (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the
system will save inspection parameters set in the Basic 1 and 2, Explorer 1 and 2 and
Checkweigh tools for the currently running product in a <PRODUCT NAME>.csv log file.
Extra Events
Purpose
The Extra Events sub tab of the Debug tab in the Service Machine screen tab provides Loma
Engineers with options for saving additional events in the Events log under the MAINTENANCE
category.
264
The User Interface
Screen Contents
The Extra Events sub tab contains the following:
Log extra events (area) - This area contains the following:
o Conveyor (PLC, 0.08) (start / stop) (option check box) - Selecting this option means that
the system will save the conveyor stop / start data to the Events log file.
o Vortex (PLC, 1.05) (start / stop) (option check box) - Selecting this option means that the
system will save the vortex stop / start data to the Events log file.
o X-rays enable output (PLC, 10.07) (enable / disable) (option check box) - Selecting this
option means that the system will save the X-rays enable / disable data to the Events log.
o Detector Offset or gain (load / save) (option check box) - Selecting this option means
that the system will save the Detector Offset or Gain load / save data to the Events log.
Advanced
Purpose
The Adavenced sub tab of the Debug tab in the Service Machine screen provides Loma Engineers
with a list of options which can be manually set through the software rather than through the user
interface.
265
The User Interface
Screen Contents
The Advanced sub tab contains the following:
Developer mode (area) - This area contains a list of options which can be manually set
through the software, including their Hex values.
Windows
Purpose
The Windows tab of the Service Machine screen is the default tab displayed when the screen opens.
It provides Loma Engineers with access to the basic and advanced Windows operating system
functions so that they may be adjusted by the Engineer if necessary.
Screen Contents
The Windows tab contains the following:
Basic (area) - This area displays a number of icons covering basic Windows operating system
functionality available on the system PC. Tapping on an icon will launch the function interface.
Advanced (area) - This area displays a number of icons covering advanced Windows
operating system functionality available on the system PC. Tapping on an icon will launch the
function interface.
Image Style
The Image Style screen is displayed by tapping anywhere in the image window on the Main Run
screen when the system is running in inspection mode.
The screen provides options for selecting how pack images are displayed in the image window as
they pass through the system.
266
The User Interface
The Image Style screen provides the following options for selecting how pack images are displayed in
the Main Run screen:
Zoom (option button) - If this option is selected then the image size is initially doubled. You
can then scroll around the image by tapping on a point of interest and then zoom up to a
maximum of 10 x the original image size.
3D (option button) - If this option is selected the image is displayed as a three dimensional
model with the ability to rotate the image to view how the density of the product varies and
where a contaminant is located within the product.
Full Screen (option button) - If this option is selected the whole screen is utilised to maximise
the image size displayed.
Effect (drop down list) - Tapping in this field or on the arrow to the right of the field shows a list
of visual effects that can be used when displaying the product image. Options of 'Normal',
Colourise' and Negative are provided for selection.
Rejects (button) - Tapping on this button displays the Image Manager screen so that you can
review all rejected images captured by the system.
Product Menus
Purpose
The Product Menus screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Product' button in the Main Run screen.
Through this screen you can select a product to run, add a new product, edit an existing products
settings, delete a product and export or import a products set-up information
Screen Contents
Product Menus (area) - This area displays a list of available products that have been added
to the system. The currently running product is always selected when the screen opens.
Tapping on another product will select it and activate the 'Recall' button so that the products
settings can be recalled for inspection.
Images (area) - This area contains the following:
o Product Image (image panel) - If available, a stored image of the selected product is
displayed.
267
The User Interface
o Load (button) - This button is shown if an image is not available for the selected product.
Tapping on the button displays a file browser window for you to locate and select the
required image.
o Delete (button) - This button is displayed if an image is available for the selected product
and is being displayed. Tapping on the button will delete the image. You can then tap on
the Load button to select a new image.
o Last Reject (image panel) - If available, an image of the last reject for the selected product
is displayed.
o View Images (button) - This button is active if reject images are available for the selected
product. Tapping on the button displays the Image Manager screen so that you can review
all available images.
Recall (button) - This button is active when a different product to the one already running is
selected in the list. Tapping on the button displays a Recall Product Settings dialog and
selecting the Yes option in the dialog will recall and load the selected product settings. the
Main Run screen will then be displayed, showing the recalled product name at the top of the
screen and inspection of the product can be started.
New (button) - Tapping on this button displays a Create New Product dialog and selecting the
Yes option in the dialog will display the pop-up keyboard for you to enter a name for the new
product. After entering and saving the new product name the Main Run screen will then be
displayed, showing the new product name at the top of the screen. Before starting inspection
you should then select the Product Settings option in the GoTo screen to configure the product
details and carry out a calibration.
Export (button) - This button is displayed when the currently running product is selected in the
list. Tapping on the button displays an Export Current Product dialog and provided you have a
USB memory stick fitted to the machine, selecting the Yes option in the dialog will copy the
product settings onto the memory stick.
Delete (button) - This button is displayed when a product other than the currently running
product is selected in the list. Tapping on the button displays a Delete Product dialog and
selecting the Yes option deletes the product from the system.
Import (button) - Tapping on this button displays an Import Product dialog and provided you
have a USB memory stick fitted to the machine with the product settings file on it, selecting the
Yes option in the dialog will copy the product settings into the system from the memory stick.
Exit (button) - Tapping on this button closes the Product Menus screen and displays the Main
Run screen.
Mimic
Purpose
The Mimic screen is displayed by tapping on the mimic image in the top right corner of the Main Run
screen.
It displays a mimic of the x-ray inspection system and contains a number of hotspots. Tapping on a
'hotspot' provides quick access to other screens through which all the parameters for setting up and
operating the system can be configured.
268
The User Interface
X5 Mimic Screen X5 Mimic Screen - Hotspots Active
X5c Mimic Screen X5c Mimic Screen - Hotspots Active
Screen Contents
Tapping on a hotspot over specific area displays a related screen, as described in the table below.
Tapping on this area displays all of the hotspot available on the mimic image.
Tapping on the Loma logo displays the Main Run screen.
Tapping on the Screen hotspot displays the Inspection tab of the

Tapping on the Controls hotspot displays the System Settings

screen.
269
The User Interface
Tapping on the Product hotspot displays the General tab of the Product Settings
screen.
Tapping on the Conveyor hotspot displays the Scan Settings tab of the Product
Settings screen.
Tapping on the Reject hotspot displays the I/O (Rejects) tab of the Product Settings
screen.
Tapping on the Filing Cabinet hotspot displays the Product Menus screen.
Tapping on the Pie Chart hotspot displays the Totals tab of the Statistics screen.
Tapping on the Key hotspot displays the Access Level screen.
Tapping on the Spanner hotspot displays the X-ray Set tab of the Diagnostics
screen.
Tapping on the Manual hotspot displays the X-ray Inspection System user Guide in
PDF format.
Other standard navigation features available in the screen are described in the General Navigation
section.
Contaminant Detection Test

Purpose
The Contaminant Detection Test screen is displayed by tapping on the 'Test (PVS)' button in the
GoTo screen, which is available when a scheduled PVS test is due.
On-screen instructions are provided to guide you through the test sequence and inspection
information is also displayed to keep you informed of the testing status.
270
The User Interface
Screen Contents
Looking for test pack (area) - This area displays messages that provide information and
prompt you to take some action, and also a test progress bar that indicates how far through
the test process you are.
When the system requires you to pass a test pack, the size and type of contaminant is
displayed along with the message 'Please Pass Sample Pack Now...'.
The test pack should display as being rejected by the system which is correct. If it passes
inspection then effectively the test has failed for that test sample and the test should be
cancelled. The product inspection settings should be reviewed and possibly another product
learn process carried out. Any product packs that have passed inspection since the last
successful PVS Test was carried out should then be re-inspected.
When the test has been successfully completed, the messages 'Test: PASS' and Test Piece
Detected!' is displayed.
If another test sample containing a different type of contaminant is then to be tested, the size
and type of contaminant is displayed along with the message 'Please Pass Sample Pack
Now...'.
Once all tests have been successfully completed the screen will close and the Main Run screen
is displayed.
Last Inspection (area) - This area displays the name and captured value for the parameter
margin that has been exceeded to cause the reject.
In addition, another area displays the number of packs that have passed inspection and the
number that have been rejected during the test.
Time (button) - This button is displayed whilst the test sequence is in progress. To the right of
the button the time in seconds available to you to pass the next test pack through the system
is displayed. If you require additional time then tapping on the button will increase the available
time up to the maximum duration set in the Advanced PVS screen.
Cancel (button) - Tapping on this button cancels the test and displays the Main Run screen.
OK (button) - This button is displayed once the test has successfully completed. Tapping on
the button closes the screen and displays the Main Run screen.
271
The User Interface
THIS SCREEN IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
272
This chapter provides general information about using the X5 X-ray Inspection System, including
some guidance on setting up the system to provide the best results.
Establishing a Good Product Learn
Carrying out a full product learn is an essential first step to ensure that the inspection system
performs effectively.
Selecting the Inspection Tools

A wide range of inspection tools are provided covering the detection of contaminants within
products and the integrity of products themselves, covering a range of parameters including
length, width and area.
Regular Inspection Performance Testing

Regular testing of the system's inspection performance, including checking activation of reject
devices, provides confirmation and continued confidence in its inspection capabilities.
Handling Rejected Products

Effective removal of non-conforming products from the production line to ensure that they are
not delivered to customers is an essential part of the inspection process.
Establishing a Good Product Learn

Before starting to inspect a new product, you must first add the product through the Product Menus
screen. A full product learn process must then be completed through the Learn Product Settings
screen by tapping on the Learn Product button in the General tab of the Product Settings screen.
The process consists of passing known good product packs through the system so that it can
establish the optimum settings to be used by the system for inspecting the product.
Carrying out a full product learn process is therefore a very important first step to ensure that the
system performs effectively.
Selecting the Inspection Tools

The X5 X-ray Inspection System offers a range of inspection tools for not only identifying
contaminants in products but also for checking product integrity against one or a number of
predefined criteria. The tools used are heavily dependant on the product application and are listed
and described below.
Image Processing
Image processing is not an inspection method itself but, through the use of a number of tools, helps
you to set up the pack image captured by the system so that the inspection methods used are
focused on the product pack itself. The following image processing tools are provided:
Image Optimisation - This tool allows you to manually or automatically set the range of
greyscale values in a product image that actually represent the product. You can also adjust
the overall image 'brightness' to make it easier for the system to detect contaminants. See
Image Optimisation for further details.
Blanking - This tool provides controls for blanking out areas of the image that do not contains
the product and do not therefore need to be included in the inspection. This reduces the risk of
false rejects from contaminants that are possibly on the conveyor rather than in the product
itself. See Blanking for further details.
273
Image Analysis - This tool provides controls for setting the minimum and maximum image
greyscale values to be used by the system when inspecting the product. Effectively, image
pixels whose values fall outside of these limits are ignored and not included in the image or
image data. See Image Analysis for further details.
Contaminants
Detection of contaminants in an X-ray inspection system is basically achieved through comparing
each image pixel against a preset range of greyscale values. But the Loma X5 X-Ray Inspection
System offers a wide range of detection modes and tools that enable you to fine tune this process by
setting up multiple layers of inspection, each focused on specific contaminant attributes. The following
contaminant tools are provided:
Box Remover - The box remover tool provides controls for blanking out the packing box or
container around the image that does not need to be included in the inspection.
As the edge appears denser than the product, you would have to reduce the detection
sensitivity to ignore the edge which could result in a contaminant in the actual product not being
detected. The Box Remover tool is provided to specifically address this common issue. See
Box Remover for further details.
Masking - Masking is a blanking tool which may be used to aid the other contaminant
inspection methods by applying a mask to an area of the product which effectively tells the
system to ignore detection in that area.
This is useful for removing heavy visible product edges or dense objects contained in the
product without having to reduce the overall system detection sensitivity.
Two excellent examples of using masking are to firstly to remove the 'scavenger' which is
placed in fresh meat packs to absorb oxygen within the packs and keep the contents fresh and
secondly to mask a 'give-away' toy inserted into food products at Christmas time. See Masking
for further details.
Product Integrity
Product integrity inspection is used to check that the attributes of each product pack conform to a
standard and a number of tools are provided to specify the standard requirements. For example, a
product may need to be a certain width and length, within specified upper and lower limits. A pack
may need to contain a certain volume of product or the product itself may need to contain a certain
number of holes. As for contaminant inspection, you can set up multiple layers of product integrity
inspections that focus on specific product attributes. The following product integrity tools are provided:
Object Checking - Object checking identifies single or multiple objects contained within a
product pack and then provides a set of tools for defining acceptable minimum and maximum
values for a range of object parameters that must be met for the object to pass inspection.
o Object - Four individual Object tools are provided which can be used simultaneously to
inspect products for conformance with different parameters.
Product size parameters that can be set include width, length, area, volume, perimeter,
compactness, width / length, volume / area and area / perimeter.
In addition, holes within a product can be categorised and their parameters covering hole
count, coverage, minimum size, maximum size, average size and standard deviation. See
Object for further details.
o Loose Objects - Two individual Loose Object tools are provided which can be used
simultaneously to inspect products for conformance with different size parameters as for
the Object tools.
In addition the Loose Objects tools can also include a checkweigh function which is used
to weigh individual products in a Mass Flow or Bounded Flow line and also weigh
individual products contained within a single pack. See Loose Objects for further details.
274
Fill Level
The Fill Level tool can be used to quickly measure the fill level of a varying product. Two good
examples where this might be used are in measuring the fill level of each pot of yoghurt in a pack or
measuring the amount of fruit in a box of cereal. See Fill Level for further details.
Checkweigh
The Checkweigh tool can be used to identify and then weigh single products or multiple objects
contained within a product pack. Product samples of known weights are passed through the system
and their actual weights are entered. Generally at least three acceptable product samples of different
weights are used, being high, nominal and low. The system then calculates a calibration curve, using
the image density values captured for each product sample against its actual weight, which is then
used to calculate the weight of all products as they are inspected. See Checkweigh for further details.
Regular Inspection Performance Testing

Once the x-ray inspection system has been installed and set up it is important to carry out routine
product verification (PV) testing to ensure that non-conforming product are detected and rejected from
the product line.
Testing parameters are set up through the I/O (Rejects) tab of the Product Settings screen where the
size of metal, glass, ceramic and another user defined contaminant are set. The frequency, duration
and reporting options for PV testing are then set up in the Advanced PVS screen.
Handling Rejected Products

A reject collection device, such as a reject bin, will typically be used to separate rejected products
from 'good' products. The reject bin should be monitored and emptied before it becomes full. An
additional 'Bin Full' photo-eye option is available that will automatically provide a warning to the
operator when the bin requires emptying.
It is advisable to analyse rejected product data with a view to identifying any trends associated with
specific products or issues with other production line equipment and potentially identifying product
that can be re-used.
Information gained from the product analysis can then be used to implement preventative measures,
thus reducing waste and its associated costs.
275
276
This chapter provides general information about using the x-ray inspection system, including some
guidance on setting up the system to provide the best results.
Setting Up the System
This section provides guidance for setting up some basic features of the system.
Configuring the System

This section gives some guidance for configuring the available options to provide an effective
inspection system.
Adding a New Product

This section provides guidance for adding a new product into the system for inspection.
Carrying Out a PVS Test

This section provides guidance for carrying out a PVS test.
Setting Up the System

This section provides guidance covering how to set up some basic features of the X5 X-ray Inspection
System.
Setting the Time and Date
This section describes how to set the time and date to be used by the system.
Setting the Language

This section describes how to set the language to be used by the system. A wide range of
languages are available for selection and the process is very simple.
Setting the Machine ID

This section describes how to set a unique name / number identifier for the system. This is
useful for data analysis purposes when you are using more than one x-ray inspection system
as the machine ID is provided in generated reports.
Setting User Access Level and Password

Four user access levels are available which manage access to the system features and
functionality. Level 1 provides basic operator access whilst level 4 provides access to all of the
systems features and functionality.
277
Setting the Time and Date

It is important that the correct time and date are set on the system as they are used to time stamp the
data in the statistical reports produced.
To change the time and date, proceed as follows:
1. Tap on the System Settings button in the GoTo screen. The System Settings screen is
displayed.
2. In the 'Advanced' area, tap in the 'Advanced Settings' button to display the Advanced
278
3. Tap on the 'Windows' icon to displays the 'Advanced Windows' screen.
4. Then tap on the 'Date/Time' button to display the Date and Time Properties screen.
5. Use the controls provided in the screen to set the date, time and time zone as required.
Then tap on the 'OK' button to save the changes and close the screen.
6. Tap on the 'OK' button in the Advanced Windows screen to close the screen. Then click on
the Exit button in the Advanced Windows screen and finally the OK button in the System
Setting screen to display the main Run screen.
279
Setting the Language

The following procedure provides an example of changing the system language from English to
French.
displayed.
280
3. Tap on the 'Regional' icon to display the Advanced Regional screen.
4. In the 'Language' area tap on the French option check box to select it. Then tap on the OK
button to save the changes and close the screen. Note that you can select any of the
languages to make them available for selection in the 'Language' drop down list in the
5. Tap on the Exit button in the Advanced System Settings screen to close the screen. Then
tap on the 'OK' button in the Advanced Windows screen to close the screen and display the
6. In the 'Language' area, select the 'Francais' option from the drop down list.
281
7. The screen contents will now display in French.
8. Tap on the 'OK' button to save the change and close the System Settings screen. The Main
Run screen is displayed.
NOTE - To ensure that special characters for some languages such as Thai are displayed
correctly, you may need to also select the language in the Advanced tab of the Regional
and Language Options screen which is displayed by tapping on the Language Options
button in the Advanced Windows screen.
Setting the Machine ID

The Machine ID can be edited to a convenient name to allow it to be easily associated to a specific
machine in situations where multiple machines are in use. Note that the Machine ID can only be
changed by a Loma Engineer as it requires access to the Service Machine screen.
To add or edit a Machine ID, proceed as follows:
1. Tap on the Diagnostics button in the GoTo screen. The Diagnostics screen is displayed.
282
2. Tap on the 'Service' button to display the Service Machine screen. Then select the 'System'
tab and the 'Machine' sub tab.
3. Tap on the 'Machine ID' field to display the pop-up keyboard and update the Machine ID as
required. Then tap on the 'OK' button to save the change and close the screen.
4. Finally, tap on the OK button in the Diagnostics screen to close the screen and display the
Main Run screen.
Adding a New User

User can be added to the system and assigned an access level and unique password to manage their
access to the features and functionality available in the system. These are described in the User
Access section.
To add a new user, proceed as follows:
displayed.
283
3. Tap on the 'Access level' icon to displays the Advanced Access Level screen.
4. With the 'User' option selected in the Setup drop down list, tap on the Add User button to
display the User (New) screen.
284
5. Enter a user name in the User field through the pop-up keyboard, select an access level
from the drop down list and enter a password through the pop-up numeric keypad in the
Password and Confirm fields.
6. Tap on the 'OK' button to close the User (new) screen and on the OK button in the
Advanced Access Level screen to close the screen. Then click on the Exit button in the
Advanced Windows screen and finally the OK button in the System Setting screen to display
the Main Run screen.
Configuring the System

Wherever possible, configuration of the system will be carried out by Loma Systems before the
machine is despatched, or by a Loma Service Engineer during a commissioning visit. Primarily, the
commissioning visit is required as part of the installation process so that the engineer can optimise
machine performance in its actual working environment and for the products that are to be inspected.
There are circumstances, however, where it may be necessary for the end user to carry out some or
all of the configuration and commissioning procedures. Typically, this would occur when Loma
Systems do not have enough information about the end application, such as the belt speed or reject
details, to fully configure the machine.
Options and parameters available for configuring the system are listed and described below.
Setting the Units
Setting Access Levels
Managing Images
Setting PVS Testing
Reports
System Statistics
System Maintenance
Operating System
285
Setting the Units

It is important that the correct units are set on the machine as they are used when displaying product
information and in the statistical reports produced.
To change the units, proceed as follows:
displayed.
286
3. Tap on the 'Regional' icon to display the Advanced Regional screen.
4. In the 'Units' area tap on the 'Financial' drop down list and select the required currency.
If you wish the system to use imperial instead of the default metric size and weight units then
tap on the Display Imperial option check box.
In the 'Time' area, select the required option by tapping on its option radio button.
In the 'date' area, select the required option by tapping on its option radio button.
Then tap on the OK button to save the changes and close the screen.
5. Tap on the Exit button in the Advanced System Settings screen to close the screen. Then
tap on the 'OK' button in the Advanced Windows screen to close the screen and display the
6. Finally, tap on the 'OK' button to save the change and close the System Settings screen.
The Main Run screen is displayed.
Setting Access Levels

Each of the four Access Levels included in the system initially provide access to a default set of
screens based on the User type.
So for example an Operator (Access Level 1) would not have access to product or system settings
screens as they would not need this to carry out an Operator's activities. In addition, they would
probably not have received the in depth training on the system that would enable them to make any
changes to the settings in those screens.
However, some users may carry out a range of actions that are not all included in the default settings
for any of the available Access Levels. So to manage this situation provision is made in the Advanced
Access Level screen to enable access to some additional screens for each Access Level / User type.
See the Advanced Access Level section for a full description of the controls available in this screen.
Selecting the 'Configuration' option from the drop down list in the Setup area of the Advanced Access
Level screen provides a number of controls in the 'Access level: Configuration' area that allow you to
make additional screens available to the Operator, Supervisor and Quality Access Levels. The
Engineer Access Level will already have full access selected for all screen but you can deselect
access for some screens if required.
287
A description of the default and additional screens available for each Access Level is provided below.
Diagnostics
Tapping on the Diagnostics button displays the screen options shown in the image above.
Selections for each Access Level are as follows:
o Operator (Access Level 1) - Basic is selected by default and General may be selected.
Advanced is not available for selection.
o Supervisor (Access Level 2) - Basic is selected by default and General and Advanced
may be selected.
o Quality (Access Level 3) - Basic and General are selected by default and Advanced may
be selected.
o Engineer (Access Level 4) - Basic, General and Advanced are selected by default and
cannot be deselected.
Statistics
Tapping on the Statistics button displays the screen options shown in the image above.
o Operator (Access Level 1) - No options are selected by default but Basic, Reset and
General may be selected.
288
o Supervisor (Access Level 2) - Basic, Reset and General are selected by default. Reset
and General may be deselected if required.
o Quality (Access Level 3) - Basic, Reset and General are selected by default and may not
be deselected.
o Engineer (Access Level 4) - Basic, Reset, General and Advanced are selected by
default. Basic, Reset and General may be deselected if required.
System Settings
Tapping on the System Settings button displays the screen options shown in the image above.
o Operator (Access Level 1) - No options are selected by default but Basic may be
selected.
o Supervisor (Access Level 2) - Basic and Backup are selected by default but may both be
deselected if required.
o Quality (Access Level 3) - Basic, Backup and Advanced are selected by default and may
not be deselected.
o Engineer (Access Level 4) - Basic, Configuration, Backup and Advanced are selected by
default. Backup and Advanced may be deselected if required.
Product Settings
Tapping on the System Settings button displays the screen options shown in the image above.
289
o Operator (Access Level 1) - No options are selected by default but Basic may be
selected.
o Supervisor (Access Level 2) - Basic is selected by default and Advanced may be

selected.
o Quality (Access Level 3) - Basic and Advanced are selected by default and may not be
deselected.
o Engineer (Access Level 4) - Basic and Advanced are selected by default but may both
be deselected if required.
Based on the details provided above, to configure the screen access for each Access level proceed
as follows:
displayed.
290
3. Tap on the 'Access Level' icon to displays the Advanced Access Level screen. Then select
the Configuration option from the drop down list in the Setup area.
4. Select an Access Level from the drop down list in the Access Level: Configuration area and
then tap on the Diagnostics, Statistics, System Settings and product Settings buttons in turn
and select the available screen options required.
5. Once you have completed all selections, tap on the 'OK' button to save your changes and
close the Advanced Access Level screen. Then click on the Exit button in the Advanced
Windows screen and finally the OK button in the System Settings screen to display the Main
Run screen.
291
Managing Images
The system captures an image of each product pack passed through the system when carrying out a
learn process and this is saved as a source image as it has been used to establish the product
settings.
An image of each rejected product pack is also captured and saved as it passes through the system
so that it may be viewed either immediately or at a later time to establish the cause of the reject.
Images are automatically stored on the system PC to a location specified in the Service Machine
screen by selecting the System tab, Software sub-tab and then selecting the Image Saving option
from the drop down list provided.
Images can be saved as high quality .bmp files, recommended for source images, and also as low
quality .jpg files which will obviously take up less storage space but cannot be imported into another
machine when carrying out reject investigations. The images can be saved onto a fitted USB memory
stick or to a remote location on the network if a network connection is established.
Options for saving images captured by the system, setting advanced inspection options and selecting
the size and shape of overlays included on an image for Basic and Explorer tools are provided in the
Advanced Images screen.
The Image Manager, selected through the System Settings screen, is also provided to enable you to
review and select specific images, based on the date and time they were saved, and save them to a
network location or USB memory stick. Images may also be deleted in the Image Manager screen.
Setting PVS Testing

Once the x-ray inspection system has been installed, commissioned you can start to add products to
the system for inspection.
At this time you will use test sticks to set up the inspection tools to detect contaminants of specific
types and sizes. It is then advisable to carry out regular product verification testing to ensure that the
specified contaminants are still being detected to provide confidence that the system is working
correctly.
The PVS test comprises of passing sample packs containing contaminants through the system at
predefined intervals to ensure that the system detects and rejects them. In addition, this also tests the
operation of the reject device.
The types and sizes of contaminants to be used in the testing are set up through the I/O (Rejects) tab
of the Product Settings screen by selecting the PVS button.
The frequency, number of packs, duration and reporting options for PVS testing are then set up in the
Advanced PVS screen which is displayed by tapping on the PVS icon in the Advanced System
Settings screen.
Statistical test data, including the number of tests that have passed and failed and the time elapsed
since the last test, is displayed in the Statistics screen by selecting the Totals tab and then the Tests
sub-tab.
Managing Products
Tapping on the products button in the Main Run screen displays the Product Menus screen which
provides the following options:
Product menus may be recalled, created or deleted. Note that a New product will have the
exact settings as the current active product. The current active product cannot be deleted.
When X-ray inspection is off, Product menus may additionally be Exported or Imported. A USB
memory stick must be inserted for these operations. An exported menu contains the full set of
parameters. Products may be created on one machine, exported and then imported on
another machine, enabling the copying of products across systems.
292
Reject images for the current product run may be viewed via the thumbnail viewer on the right
side of the screen and saved to memory stick. The image save option offers high or low
resolution depending on available space on the disk. See Image Manager for further details.
Changing the Product

To change the product being inspected, proceed as follows:
1. Stop inspection and tap on the Products button in the Main Run screen to display the
Product Menus screen.
2. Tap on the required product in the list to select it. Then tap on the 'Recall button at the
bottom of the screen to display the pop-up Recall Product Settings dialog and tap on the
'Yes' option to close the dialog.
3. The Main Run screen is displayed showing the recalled product name at the top of the
screen. You can now start inspection of the product.
Adding a New Product

New products are added to the system through the Product Menus screen which initially copies the
settings for the currently selected product to potentially save setup time.
To add a new product, proceed as follows:
1. Tap on the Product button in the Main Run screen to display the Product Menus screen.
2. Tap on the 'New' button at the bottom of the screen to display the pop-up Create New
Product dialog and tap on the 'Yes' option to close the dialog and display the pop-up
Keyboard.
Enter a name for the new product and tap on the OK button to save it. The Main Run screen
is displayed showing the new product name at the top of the screen.
3. If you know that the product settings should be the same as the product that they were
copied from then you can start inspecting straight away.
If the product settings are not the same then tap on the GoTo button to display the GoTo
screen and then tap on the Product Settings button to display the Product Settings screen..
293
4. Configure all settings for the new product in the screen as required. See Product Settings for
further details.
5. Tap on the 'Apply' button to save all changes and close the screen. The Main Run screen
will be displayed and you can start inspection.
Deleting a Product
You may only delete a product if it is not currently being used. To delete a product, proceed as
follows:
1. Tap on the Products button in the Main Run screen to display the Product Menus screen.
2. Tap on the required product in the list to select it. Then tap on the 'Delete button at the
bottom of the screen to display the pop-up Delete Product dialog and tap on the 'Yes'
option. The product is removed from the list.
3. Tap on the Exit button to close the screen and display the Main Run screen.
Exporting a Product
When exporting products all of the product information is included in a *.jpg file. This is a useful
feature for keeping backup copies of products and for importing them onto another machine. You may
only export a product if it is currently being used. To export a product, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that a USB memory stick with suffient free space is fitted to the machine.
3. The product currently being used will be selected in the list. Then tap on the 'Export button
at the bottom of the screen to display the pop-up Export Current Product dialog and tap on
the 'Yes' option. The product settings are then copied onto the fitted USB memory stick.
294
Importing a Product
You can import a previously exported product onto any machine from a USB memort stick. To import
a product, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that the USB memory stick containing the product file is fitted to the machine.
2. Then tap on the 'Import button at the bottom of the screen to display the pop-up Import
Product dialog and tap on the 'Yes' option. The product settings are then copied onto the
system and the imported product will be displayed for selection in the list.
Carrying Out a PVS Test

The PVS test comprises of passing sample packs containing contaminants through the system at
predefined intervals to ensure that the system detects and rejects them. In addition, this also tests the
operation of the reject device.
When a test is due the system operator is prompted to initiate a test. If a test is not initiated within a
specified time period then a fault is generated by the system.
You may also select whether the sample contaminated pack is rejected by the system or allowed to
pass through by tapping on the Test (Confirm): OFF or Test (Confirm) button in the GoTo screen.
The types and sizes of contaminants to be used in the testing are set up through the I/O (Rejects) tab
of the Product Settings screen by selecting the PVS button.
The frequency, number of packs, duration and reporting options for PVS testing are then set up in the
Advanced PVS screen which is displayed by tapping on the PVS icon in the Advanced System
Settings screen.
To initiate a PVS test, firstly ensure that you have sample test packs available containing the types
and sizes of contaminants being used for the test. Then proceed as follows:
1. Tap on the Test (PVS) button in the GoTo screen to display the Contaminant Detection Test
screen.
2. The screen displays the first contaminant type and size to be used. Select the required
sample test pack and pass it through the system the required number of times until the Test:
PASS message is displayed
295
3. Each test pack should display as being rejected by the system which is correct. If a pack
passes inspection then effectively the test has failed for that test sample and the test should
be cancelled. The product inspection settings should be reviewed and possibly another
product learn process carried out. Any product packs that have passed inspection since the
last successful PVS Test was carried out should then be re-inspected.
4. If the test requires you to pass a different size or type of contaminant you will be prompted to
pass the required pack until the Test: PASS message is displayed for that contaminant size
and type.
5. Repeat this process until all required test samples have been used and the tests have all
passed. The Main Run screen will then be displayed.
6. If any test fails, tap on the Cancel button to stop the test. The Main Run screen will be
displayed showing an image of the last rejected pack. Tapping on the red X in the top left of
the screen will open the Inspection tab of the Product Settings screen so that you can
identify the reason why the test failed. For example, the False Threshold value set in the I/O
(Rejects) tab of the Product Settings screen may have been exceeded and needs to be
adjusted.
296
Reports
This chapter provides information about the available reports that are generated from information
automatically collected by the system.
The system can be configured to automatically generate reports containing statistical data recorded
and saved by the system and then output the data to remote PC running the LomaEnet application or
a USB memory stick if fitted.
Batch Reports
Batch reports are enabled and configured in the I/O (Rejects) tab of the Product Settings screen by
tapping on the Reports button.
The batch size may be entered and also the use of batch trace codes enabled in this screen. See I/O
(Rejects) for further details.
In addition, any PVS tests carried out during the batch run can be included in the batch report by
selecting that option in the Advanced PVS screen.
Shift Reports
297
Reports
Shift reports are enabled and configured in the Advanced Reports / Network screen which is
displayed by tapping on the Reports icon in the Advanced System Settings screen and then selecting
the Shift Reports option in the Setup drop down list provided.
The shift duration in hours and minutes and the start time may be may be entered. See Advanced
Reports / Network for further details.
PVS Reports
PVS reports are automatically generated when test interval and other options have been selected and
configured in the Advanced PVS screen which is displayed by tapping on the PVS icon in the
Advanced System Settings screen
The time interval between tests, the number of sample packs to be used for the test and other test
options may be entered and selected. See Advanced PVS for further details.
Configuration Reports
A report that includes all system configuration is available by selecting the X-ray Set tab of the
Diagnostics screen and tapping on the Save button at the bottom of the screen. The report is saved to
a USB memory stick if fitted or to a remote PC if a LomeEnet or Network connection has been set up
and configured.
298
Reports
Displaying and Saving Reports

Batch, Shift and PVS reports can be displayed and saved through the Reports tab of the Statistics
screen.
When any report type is selected, a list of the reports already generated in date/time order by the
system is displayed. A report can then be manually selected and sent to a remote PC running the
LomEnet application or saved to a USB memory stick if fitted.
When the Batch or Shift report option is selected, in addition to a list of reports already generated,
data for the current Batch or Shift is also displayed for review. See Reports for further details.
Maximum Reports
The maximum number of product (batch and PVS) and system (Shift and Configuration) reports that
can be saved by the system is set in the Service Machine screen by selecting the System tab,
Software sub-tab and the selecting the Reporting option from the Section drop down list. Note that the
Service Machine screen is only available to Loma Engineers.
299
Reports
System Statistics
The X5 X-ray Inspection System continuously captures and displays an incredible amount of statistical
data covering all aspects of the system operation and products being inspected which enables you to
review them and then investigate further by drilling down through the available data to determine for
example why products are being rejected.
Most of the available statistical data is provided in the Statistics screen which is displayed by tapping
on the Statistics button in the GoTo screen. See Statistics for a full description of the screen and its
contents.
System Maintenance
Maintenance activities are covered in the Maintenance chapter of this guide but maintenance intervals
and some other key system options may be set in the Advanced Maintenance screen which is
displayed by tapping on the Maintenance icon in the Advanced System Settings screen.
300
Diagnostic Functions
The X5 X-ray Inspection System provides a number of advanced diagnostic functions to test, validate
and fault find all areas of system. These are described in full in the Diagnostics section and are listed
and summarised below.
Interlocks
The system includes a number of lockable panels that provide access to various parts of the
system to carry out cleaning, maintenance and servicing operations. To ensure that users are
not accidentally exposed to x-rays each of these access panels is fitted with a switch which
stops the system conveyor and the generation of X-rays automatically if an access panel is
opened. The status of each panel is monitored and can be reviewed at any time. See Interlocks
for further details.
Signals
The system monitors the status of a number of key items to ensure that it is operating correctly.
See Signals for further details.
X-rays
The status of a number of key X-ray parameters is constantly monitored by the system and
warnings are displayed if their values exceed defined limits. A test may also be carried out to
confirm that X-rays are being generated at the correct power level. See X-rays for further
details.
Temperature
The temperature of key system components is constantly monitored to ensure that they stay
within defined limits. See Temperature for further details.
Rejects
All signals utilised by the system to ensure that the reject device and associated PECs are
operating correctly can be tested at any time. See Rejects for further details.
Maintenance
Service and maintenance information is available covering the major system components and
including operating statistics which enables you to review machine usage data to plan any
maintenance activity that may be required. See Maintenance for further details.
License
License information is provided which displays what features and functionality is included in
your system. See License for further details.
System
A full set of system information, including software versions, key component types and serial
numbers, system memory metrics and operating temperatures, is provided. See System for
further details.
Network Information
A set of network information, including network connection details, is provided. See Network
Info for further details.
Drives
Information covering the available system and network drives is provided, along with image and
text saving statistical data. See Drives for further details.
301
Reports
Detector
A comprehensive set of detector information allowing an Engineer to select different parameter
settings and options to review detector responses both numerically and graphically. See
Detector for further details.
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) status information is provided and you can also test the
output channels of the PLC. See PLC for further details.
Comms
System communications settings information is provided covering remote support, network
connections, OPC connections and parallel ports. You may also activate remote support
through the TeamViewer application. See Comms for further details.
Service Machine
This screen is displayed for Loam Engineers only as it contains advanced system information
and settings and is also used for logging service and maintenance activities and assisting in the
resolution of system faults. The screen contents are included for completeness but are not
intended for customer use. See Service Machine for further details.
302
Maintenance
This chapter describes the maintenance procedures for the X5 X-ray Inspection System.
Your warranty may be invalidated if you do not follow the maintenance schedule set out
within this user guide. This warranty statement is in addition to the terms of sale.

Maintenance Warnings
A list of applicable safety warnings to be observed when maintaining the system is provided.
Inspection and Cleaning

This section provides guidance for carrying out routine inspection and cleaning of the system.
PEC Maintenance
This section provides guidance for carrying out checks to ensure that the PECs are operating
correctly
Air Regulator Unit Maintenance

This section provides some guidance covering maintaining the compressed air regulator unit.
Conveyor Belt Maintenance

This section provides some guidance covering maintaining the conveyor belt.
Adjusting the Reject Devices

This section provides some guidance covering adjustment of the reject devices.
Software Upgrades
This section provides some guidance for upgrading the system software.
Maintenance Warnings
The following safety warnings apply when carrying out maintenance operations on an X5 X-ray
Inspection System.
1. LETHAL HAZARD ELECTRICAL SUPPLIES
2. LETHAL HAZARD COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLIES
3. WORKING ON EQUIPMENT
4. REJECT DEVICES
For details see the Safety Warnings section.
303
Maintenance
Inspection and Cleaning
Cleaning Materials Required

The X5 X-ray Inspection System is designed for wash down cleaning using a mild detergent and then
thoroughly rinsing the machine with clean water. A damp non-abrasive cloth only should be used to
clean the touch screen.
If chemicals are used they must not cause harm to the materials used in the manufacture of the
system. The following are included:
Grade 304 stainless steel (frame, enclosure and covers)
Polyurethane belt
Lead impregnated curtains
Stainless Steel / Acetal (hinges and handles)
PBT (bearing housings)
Under no circumstances should the machine be subjected to a high pressure wash down
cleaning regime.
Do not inject water directly into or at any electrical components, the front touch screen or
any bearings, bushes or drives.
Daily
1. Isolate the electrical and compressed air supplies to the system.
2. Alternatively, if cleaning the conveyor belt with the power on, isolate the compressed air supply
to the system and then turn the X-ray key switch the CLEANDOWN position.
3. Check that there is no build up of debris on the conveyor.
4. Check that the belt and rollers are clean and free from a build up of either product or foreign
material, e.g. wrapping film. Material on the rollers may cause incorrect tracking of the belt.
5. If there is a significant spillage of wet product onto the belt then remove the belt, wash it down
to ensure that it is clean and then dry both the underside of the belt and the bed of the
conveyor thoroughly with a paper towel or air line before refitting. This is required to prevent the
underside of the belt sticking to the bed of the conveyor and potentially causing the motor to
overload.
6. Check that the reject bin is not full, This is particularly important if a 'Bin Full' detection device is
not fitted. If, necessary, empty the bin in accordance with company practice.
7. Either wipe or wash the system using a mild detergent solution and then rinse using clean
water. Pay particular attention to the centre section of the main cabinet as this area is not seen
when in production.
8. Clean / wipe any photoelectric cells (PEC) and reflectors.
9. Clean / wipe the lead impregnated curtains on the infeed, inner left, inner right and outfeed
areas of the system.
10. Check that the air regulator unit water trap is clean and the outlet is not blocked.
11. Reconnect the electrical power and compressed air supplies to the system or if in
CLEANDOWN mode turn the X-ray key switch to the ON position.
12. Check that the conveyor belt is tracking correctly.
13. Check that the reject mechanism successfully rejects a recognised bad product into the reject
bin.
If the system is not in constant use then these checks may be increased to weekly.
304
Maintenance
Weekly
1. Isolate the electrical power and compressed air supplies to the system.
2. Check the security of all fixtures and fittings, ensuring that all guards are securely fastened in
place.
3. Check that all electrical interlocks and emergency stops listed below function correctly:
o Emergency Stop buttons on the front panel and rear door.
o Front panel, lid, rear door, infeed cover and outfeed cover interlocks.
o Red lamp failure.

4. Check that the system and associated equipment has been cleaned correctly and there is no
build-up of product or debris.
5. Check that the lead impregnated curtains are in good condition and not damaged in any way.
6. Inspect the conveyor belt for damage, contamination and deterioration.
7. Check that the conveyor belts are correctly tensioned and are neither too tight or too slack. If a
belt feels too loose but is still capable of moving the product without slippage, it may need to be
adjusted.
Over tensioning a belt may cause damage to bearings and motors.
8. Check that the external fan blades are clear of dust and debris.
Monthly
1. Check that the internal cabinet fan, located in the upper section of the cabinet, is working
correctly. This should be running all the time that mains power is connected.
2. Check that the fan is working on the X-ray tank cooling system. This is located at the lower rear
of the cabinet.
Do not attempt to check operation of fans with X-rays on and interlocks overridden.
Do not operate the system if any fans are not running. In this unlikely event please contact
your local Loma Service centre for advice.
3. Check that the PC fan is working correctly.

4. Check the oil level in the X-ray tank is approximately 15mm below the filler plug. The filler plug
is located on the top of the X-ray tank situated in the upper area of the cabinet. If the level is
lower than stated, contact you local Loma Service Centre for advice.
The tank oil level should not change unless there is a leak in the system. In addition it should
be noted that the oil is of a special insulating type (Midel 7131) and must not contain any
moisture or air bubbles.
WARNING: If the system has not been used for a period of one month or more then it is
critical that the X-ray set is re-seasoned. Failure to do so could cause the X-ray set to be
stressed and this may result in premature failure. It may also invalidate the system warranty.
if in doubt, please contact your local Loma Service Centre or Loma Systems directly.
CONTAMINANTS: Oil must always be handled with care as prolonged bare skin exposure
can cause skin problems. Always handle oils in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
305
Maintenance
OIL
Manufacturer Type
Midel Midel 7131 (X-ray tank)
5. Check that the belt and all rollers are clean and free from debris and greasy elements.
6. Check that all rollers are square across the conveyor and can rotate freely.
7. With the belt in a slack condition and centralised along the length of the conveyor, adjust the
tensioning evenly until there is no slippage when the belt is under load.
Yearly
1. Arrange for the X-ray cooling oil to be changed.
Failure to change the X-ray oil an a yearly basis could lead to premature failure of X-ray
components.
Note that Loma Systems Service Engineers can perform an oil change on request, but the
Customer is responsible for the safe disposal of the old oil.
2. Check the detector inserts for wear.

3. Check all connectors and terminals within the electrical services cabinet.
4. Confirm that the 12V and 24V DC supplies are within the 5% limits.
5. Check the operation of the vortex cooling system.
6. Check the operation of the pneumatics and low air pressure switch settings.
7. Check the operation of all cooling fans.
PEC Maintenance
Generally PECs are maintenance free, but to ensure reliable detection of products, you should
regularly check that there is no build up of dirt or dust on each PEC and its reflector and ensure that
they are correctly aligned.
Omron
Omron PECs are initially set up when the system is built using the adjuster mechanism provided on
the unit.
To check that each PEC is operating correctly, ensure that the green and red LEDs located on the top
of the PEC are illuminated in normal operation and that the red LED turns off when the beam is
broken. If this does not happen then adjust the PEC as follows:
1. Turn the adjuster on top of the PEC fully counter-
clockwise. The red LED will be off and the green LED will
be on.
2. Then turn the adjuster clockwise until both the green and
red LEDs are on. The PEC is now correctly set
306
Maintenance
Sensopart
Sensopart PECs are initially set up when the system is built using its Teach In function.
To check that each PEC is operating correctly, ensure that the green and amber LEDs located on
either side of the top of the PEC are illuminated in normal operation and that the amber LED turns off
when the beam is broken. If this does not happen then adjust the PEC as follows:
1. Press and hold in the Teach In button located on the top

of the PEC. The green and amber LEDs will both flash at
the same time.
2. When the green and amber LEDs start to flash alternately,

release the button. The green LED will flash on its own.
3. Press the button and hold in for 1s. The amber LED will be
lit and the green LED will flash.
4. After a few seconds the green and amber LEDs will both
be lit continuously, indicating that the PEC is now set up
correctly
SICK
SICK PECs are generally used where a broader beam is
required to capture the product, for example for reject
confirmation when using an air blast reject device to remove a
lightweight pack that could be blown above a standard PEC light
beam when entering the reject bin, thereby causing a fault to be
generated.
To check that each PEC is operating correctly, ensurethat the
green Power On and amber beam LEDs located on the top of the
PEC are both illuminated in normal operation and that the amber
LED turns off when the beam is broken. If this does not happen
then check the alignment and cleanliness of the PEC and
reflector. If this does not clear the problem, contact your local
Loma Service Centre for further advice
Air Regulator Unit Maintenance

With the exception of systems fitted with Air Blast or Stop-On-Detect or electrically driven rejects the
compressed air supply pressure to the fitted reject device is fed through an air regulator unit. The
particular model of regulator may vary according to the specification of the system. Each type will
have a pressure adjustment control, air input and output fittings, a pressure gauge and a water trap.
Adjustment of the air pressure is normally carried out by pulling up the adjustment knob to release the
lock and by turning the control clockwise or anti-clockwise to increase or decrease the pressure.
Adjustment of the upper and lower air pressure limits is described in Setting Up the Air Supply.
Removal of water from the water trap bottle is carried out by operation of a rotating knob or by
pressing a button. Either way the control will be located at the bottom of the water trap bottle. Water
should be removed regularly.
The correct setting of the air pressure can be found in the individual system specifications in the
Technical Specifications chapter.
307
Maintenance
Setting Up the Air Supply

Once the air supply has been connected up to the pneumatic assembly it must be set up to work
safely within defined air pressure limits. See Technical Specifications for further details.
The assembly contains an air pressure switch which will cut off the air supply if the air pressure falls
below a set minimum value or above a set maximum value. This will in turn generate a system fault
and the conveyor will stop, preventing any over or underweight products being passed through the
system.
Setting the air pressure units
If the digital display is not showing the air pressure in the correct units, which is generally either bar or
psi units, then proceed as follows to change units:
1. Press the button for 2 seconds or longer to display [F 0].
2. Press the button once to enable the unit value to be edited.
3. Press the button until the required unit is displayed, bAr or Psi.
4. Press the button to confirm the selection.
Setting the air pressure upper and lower limits
To set the lower and upper air pressure limit values, proceed as follows:
6. Press the button once to display [P _ 1], which is used for the lower pressure limit.
7. Press and hold the button to display the required lower pressure limit value of 200.

9. [P _ 2] will be displayed which is used for the upper pressure limit.
10. Press the or buttons to display the required upper pressure limit value of 500.
308
Maintenance
Conveyor Belt Maintenance

If the conveyor belt slips during normal operation you should firstly check the condition of the rollers
and make sure that debris has not built up between the rollers and the conveyor belt.
Adjusting the Belt Tension

The belt tension is factory set before delivery so should not need adjustment in ordinary use. If you do
need to adjust the belt tension, possibly due to a belt change, proceed as follows:
1. If the belt is slack on the one side, it can be adjusted by moving the roller on that side until it
makes good contact with the belt.
2. Using a 10mm spanner, slacken off the back nut of the tension adjuster on the appropriate
side by a couple of turns.
3. Then tighten the front nut on the tension adjuster. This effectively pulls the threaded bolt
back until the back nut becomes tight, pushing the roller back onto the belt to take up any
slack.
4. Start the conveyor and check that the belt runs down the centre of the conveyor. Make
further adjustments to the belt tension as required.
309
Maintenance
Adjusting the Belt Tracking

Once the belt tension is set correctly, if it moves to one side this indicates that the tracking needs to
be adjusted.
To adjust the belt tracking, proceed as follows:
1. If the tracking is out on one side, it can be adjusted by moving the roller back on the other
side.
2. Using a 10mm spanner, slacken off the back nut of the tracker adjuster on the appropriate
side by a couple of turns.
3. Then tighten the front nut on the tracker adjuster. This effectively pulls the threaded bolt
back until the back nut becomes tight, pushing the roller back onto the belt to take up any
slack.
4. Start the conveyor and check that the belt moves down the centre of the conveyor and does
not move to one side. Make further adjustments to the tracker adjusters as required.
310
Maintenance
Adjusting the Reject Devices
Pusher and Plough Rejects

At the reject solenoid valve, adjust the two throttle screws, in conjunction with the reject delay and
dwell times until the required reject timing and speed of operation are obtained. Both the reject timing
and the speed of operation are affected by the air pressure supplied to the conveyor.
Air Blast Reject

Since this type of reject has no throttles, the only variables that can be adjusted are the reject delay
and dwell times. There is no air regulator supplied as standard with the air blast reject. However, the
air supply pressure should be approximately 100psi (6.9 bar).
Signal Only
Where signal only is required, adjustment to the reject delay and dwell times is all that is necessary.
Multi-Flap Rejects
Multi-flap rejects systems have additional pneumatics to allow the operation of typically four flaps. A
feed from the main pneumatics is connected to a valve island with a gang of solenoid valves, one for
each flap. these valves are then connected to a cylinder for each reject flap that operates the flap.
Each cylinder has a flow control valve at each end so that it can be adjusted for speed and a threaded
end which allows fine adjustment of the flap position.
In normal operation the product slides down the reject flaps to the output chute of the system. In the
case of a reject, the flap opens and the contaminated product or portion of the product is dropped
directly into the reject bin or onto a reject conveyor.
Software Upgrades
This section provides details for upgrading the X5 X-ray Inspection System software.
Pre-requisites for upgrading are a copy of the latest software on a USB Memory stick which is used to
import the latest software, overwriting the existing software installed on the machine.
To upgrade the software, proceed as follows:
1. Obtain a copy of the applicable upgrade files for your system from Loma Systems.
2. Copy the files onto a USB memory stick and insert it into the USB socket provided.
3. Navigate to the System Settings screen and tap on the Update button in the 'Software' area.
The upgrade will start automatically.
4. Once the upgrade has completed, tap on the Shut Down button to perform a controlled
system shut down.
5. Then restart the system.
311

814203-1.0-EnG - X5 X-Ray Inspection System User Guide

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

814203-1.0-EnG - X5 X-Ray Inspection System User Guide

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

X5 X-ray Inspection System User Guide

Document Number: 814203-1.0-ENG ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS Copyright 2015 Loma Systems

About X-Ray Inspection ...........................................................................7

Safety First .............................................................................................13

Intended Use of the Machine ............................................................................................................ 19

About the X-Ray Inspection System Range ...........................................37

Getting Started .......................................................................................45

The User Interface .................................................................................57

Scan Settings ................................................................................................................................. 73

Using the X-ray Inspection System ......................................................273

Operating Instructions ..........................................................................277

Diagnostic Functions ............................................................................301

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

About this Guide

Document Change Control

Copyright and Acknowledgements

The Loma Group of Companies

About this Guide

About X-ray Inspection

About the X-ray Inspection Range

The User Interface

Using the X-ray Inspection System

Document Change Control

Notes and Warnings

Copyright and Acknowledgements

The Loma Group of Companies

Use of X-rays in the Food Industry

The X-ray energy must be high enough to

The greyscale image produced is a

o Glass - Soda lime is a typical type of glass.

o PVC and TFE - Packaging or belting materials are not detectable.

o Salt or sugar clumps

Product Integrity Analysis

o Missing product by count

o Weight measurement by zone

Relative Specific Gravity Chart

Food Metals Non Metals

Bread 0.5 Aluminium 2.7 Cork 0.24

Crisps 0.6 Iron 7.1 Wood 0.65

Cereal 0.65 Tin 7.3 Epoxy 1.12

Peanuts 0.65 St/St 7.9 Nylon 1.15

Water 1.0 Brass 8.5 Bone 1.8

Potato 1.05 Bronze 8.8 Brick 2.3

Meat 1.2 Copper 8.9 Concrete 2.4

Lead 11.3 Glass 2.6

Responsibilities and Disclaimer

Intended Use of the Machine

End of Life Treatment

End User Licence Agreement

c. Hooks, rings, etc. are not damaged.

CE Mark / Machine identification etched on the

Caution: X-ray Hazard

Caution: Electric Shocks

Caution: Hazardous Machinery

Caution: Pinch Point

Caution: Isolate Machine Before Maintenance

Safety Relay and Circuits

Responsibilities and Disclaimer

Intended Use of the Machine

End of Life Treatment

Work Instructions, Training and Record Keeping

End User Licence Agreement

2. Rights and Limitations: